Desigo™ CC
Graphics Editor Version 2
Engineering
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Building Technologies
Copyright Notice
Copyright Notice
Notice
Document information is subject to change without notice by Siemens Switzerland
Ltd. Names, and various data used in examples are fictitious unless otherwise
noted. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express
written permission of Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
All software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and
may be used or copied only in accordance with license terms.
For further information, contact your nearest Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
representative.
© 2014 Copyright Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
Credits
Desigo, Desigo CC, Cerberus DMS, Cerberus PRO, and Sinteso are registered
trademarks of Siemens Switzerland Ltd.
Other product or company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their
respective owners.
Edition: 2014-03-27
Document ID: A6V10415487_en_b_02
2
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Table of Contents
About This Document ...................................................................................................8
Document Revision History............................................................................................11
1
1.1
Overview of Graphics ...................................................................................12
Graphic Libraries and Folders .........................................................................13
1.2
1.3
1.4
Graphics Related Folders ...............................................................................13
Graphics Viewer: Operating and Engineering Mode ........................................14
Graphics Library Browser - Operating and Engineering Mode .........................14
1.5
1.6
1.7
Graphics Editor - Operating and Engineering Mode.........................................15
Security and Graphics Overview .....................................................................15
Scopes and Data Point Access .......................................................................16
1.8
User Settings Overview ..................................................................................17
2
Navigation in Graphics .................................................................................18
2.1
2.2
Accessing the Graphics Editor ........................................................................18
Drag-and-Drop Overview ................................................................................19
2.3
2.2.1
Drag-and-Drop Cursor Image...........................................................20
Table of Graphics Drop Targets ......................................................................20
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer .......................................................................21
3.1
Point Centered Mode ......................................................................................22
3.2
Status and Commands Overview ....................................................................22
3.3
3.4
3.5
Viewing Graphic Objects.................................................................................23
Zooming and Panning.....................................................................................25
Graphics Viewer Components.........................................................................25
3.6
3.5.1
3.5.2
Graphics Viewer Toolbar ..................................................................25
Views ...............................................................................................26
3.5.3
About the Status and Commands Window .......................................28
3.5.4
3.5.5
Status and Command Window .........................................................30
Status and Commands Connection Lines .........................................31
3.5.6
About Tooltips ..................................................................................31
Graphics Viewer Tasks ...................................................................................32
3.6.1
Commanding Off-Normal Properties.................................................32
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
Commanding Properties in Graphics Viewer ....................................32
Dragging Object Properties from the Graphics Viewer ......................33
Creating a Graphic ...........................................................................33
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
Creating a Graphics Sub-Folder .......................................................34
Deleting a Graphic Item ...................................................................34
Disabling Point Centered Mode ........................................................35
3.6.8
3.6.9
Displaying a Graphic ........................................................................35
Displaying Properties .......................................................................35
3.6.10
3.6.11
3.6.12
Editing a Graphic .............................................................................36
Enabling Point Centered Mode.........................................................36
Navigating to a Linked Element ........................................................36
3.6.13
Navigating to the Graphics Library Browser from System Browser....37
3
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3.7
3.6.14
Printing from the Graphics Viewer ....................................................37
3.6.15
Selecting Objects from System Browser ........................................... 37
3.6.16
Selecting Objects within Graphics Viewer......................................... 37
3.6.17
3.6.18
Using the Depths Navigation View ...................................................38
Working with the Aerial View ............................................................38
3.6.19 Zooming in the Graphics Viewer ......................................................39
Graphics Viewer Appendix..............................................................................39
3.7.1
Keyboard Shortcuts .........................................................................39
3.7.2
Mouse Functions .............................................................................40
4
Overview of Graphics Library Browser .......................................................41
4.1
4.2
Library Browser (System Browser) ..................................................................41
Graphics Library BrowserTasks ......................................................................43
4.2.1
Accessing the Library Browser .........................................................43
4.2.2
4.2.3
Creating a Symbol Folder in Your Library ......................................... 43
Creating a Symbol from the Library Browser .................................... 44
4.2.4
Editing a Symbol from the Library Browser ....................................... 44
5
Overview of Graphics Editor ........................................................................46
5.1
5.2
5.3
Graphics Editor Modes ...................................................................................46
Overview of Views and the Dock Panel...........................................................47
Graphics Editor Workspace ............................................................................48
5.4
5.3.1
Scrollbars ........................................................................................49
5.3.2
5.3.3
Graphics Editor Toolbar ...................................................................49
Ribbon .............................................................................................50
5.3.4
5.3.5
Work Area .......................................................................................50
File Menu.........................................................................................50
5.3.6
5.3.7
5.3.8
Home Tab........................................................................................51
View Tab .........................................................................................59
Options Tab .....................................................................................61
5.3.9
5.3.10
5.3.11
Quick Access Toolbar ......................................................................63
Views...............................................................................................63
Open Dialog Box..............................................................................67
Workspace Configuration................................................................................67
5.4.1
Saving the Layout Configuration ......................................................67
5.4.2
Restoring the Default Layout Configuration ...................................... 68
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.5
5.4.5
Working with the Views and the Dock Panel..................................... 69
Custom Library Updates after an Upgrade Installation..................................... 71
5.5.1
Updating Custom Symbols from a Custom Library ........................... 72
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.6
Working with Modes.........................................................................68
Working with the Ribbon ..................................................................68
Updating Symbol Dependencies ......................................................73
Manually Updating 1.1 Symbol References to 2.0 Symbol References74
Updating Graphics with Updated Symbols........................................ 75
Working with a Graphic...................................................................................75
5.6.1
Overview of Graphic Components and Types................................... 75
5.6.2
Bitmap Images.................................................................................78
5.6.3
About Graphic Viewports .................................................................79
4
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5.7
5.8
5.6.4
Working with Graphic Viewports .......................................................80
5.6.5
Working with Graphics .....................................................................82
5.6.6
Working with Linked Graphics ..........................................................84
5.6.7
5.6.8
Working with Bitmap Transparency ..................................................85
Overview of the Consistency Checker ..............................................86
5.6.9
Consistency Checker Workspace .....................................................88
5.6.10 Working with the Consistency Checker.............................................91
Viewing a Graphic...........................................................................................93
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
Aerial View.......................................................................................93
Working with the Aerial View Viewport Rectangle .............................93
About Zooming and Panning ............................................................94
5.7.4
5.7.5
Working with Zooming and Panning .................................................94
Using the Pan Mode ........................................................................94
5.7.6
Using the Zoom Group Functions .....................................................94
Searching for Graphic Files.............................................................................95
5.8.1
Find and Replace Overview .............................................................95
5.8.2
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.10
Find and Replace View ....................................................................97
5.8.3
Working with the Find and Replace View..........................................99
Working with AutoCAD Images .....................................................................101
AutoCAD Files Overview................................................................101
AutoCAD Importer..........................................................................102
Working with the AutoCAD Importer ...............................................103
About Symbols .............................................................................................105
5.10.1 About Symbols...............................................................................105
5.10.2
5.10.3
5.10.4
Generic Symbol .............................................................................106
Object Referencing and Symbols ...................................................107
Symbols Styles and Function .........................................................108
5.10.5
Symbol Property Substitution .........................................................109
5.10.6
5.10.7
Working with Symbols ....................................................................111
Troubleshooting Symbols Error Messages ..................................... 116
5.11
About Graphics Templates............................................................................116
5.11.1 About Graphic Templates...............................................................116
5.11.2 Working with Graphic Templates ....................................................117
5.12
The Graphics Library Browser.......................................................................120
5.12.1 Library Browser (Graphics Editor) ..................................................121
5.13
5.12.2 Working with the Library Browser ...................................................123
Overview of Elements ...................................................................................125
5.13.1
About Elements .............................................................................125
5.13.2
5.13.3
5.13.4
About Element Handles .................................................................127
Element Handle Table....................................................................129
About Grids....................................................................................130
5.13.5
5.13.6
5.13.7
About Guidelines ...........................................................................131
About Linking Elements .................................................................132
Grouping and Ungrouping Elements............................................... 133
5.13.8
5.13.9
Element Alignment and Precision ...................................................134
Notes on Resizing Elements ..........................................................135
5
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5.13.10 About Tooltips................................................................................ 135
5.13.11 Basic Element Tasks ..................................................................... 136
5.13.12 Working with Element Groups ........................................................ 142
5.13.13 Working with Element Arrangement ............................................... 144
5.13.14 Working with Grids and Gridlines ................................................... 145
5.14
5.13.15 Working with the Stroke Group....................................................... 148
5.13.16 Working with Element Alignment .................................................... 149
Working with Element Types......................................................................... 151
5.14.1
5.14.2
5.14.3
Animation Element......................................................................... 151
Working with Animation.................................................................. 152
Ellipse Element .............................................................................. 152
5.14.4
5.14.5
Working with the Ellipse Element ................................................... 152
Import AutoCAD Element ............................................................... 153
5.14.6
5.14.7
5.14.8
Import .XML Element ..................................................................... 154
Line Element.................................................................................. 154
Working with the Line Element ....................................................... 154
5.14.9
Text Element ................................................................................. 155
5.14.10 Working with the Text Element ....................................................... 155
5.14.11 Path Element ................................................................................. 156
5.14.12 Working with the Path Element ...................................................... 158
5.14.13 Polygon Element............................................................................ 161
5.14.14 Working with the Polygon Element ................................................. 162
5.14.15 Rectangle Element ........................................................................ 163
5.14.16 Working with the Rectangle Element .............................................. 163
5.15
5.16
5.14.17 Import Raster Image Element ........................................................ 164
5.14.18 Working with Imported Images ....................................................... 164
Formatting Elements..................................................................................... 165
5.15.1
About Formatting Text ................................................................... 165
5.15.2
5.15.3
About Stroke.................................................................................. 168
Working with the Format Group...................................................... 169
The Element Tree and Layers ....................................................................... 170
5.16.1 Element Tree View ........................................................................ 170
5.16.2 Working with the Element Tree View .............................................. 172
5.16.3
5.16.4
5.17
5.18
About Layers ................................................................................. 174
Working with Layers....................................................................... 175
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group ......................................... 177
5.17.1 Brush View and Brushes Group Overview ...................................... 177
5.17.2
State Color Overview ..................................................................... 178
5.17.3
5.17.4
5.17.5
Brush Editor View .......................................................................... 179
Brush Editor View Tasks ................................................................ 183
Brushes Group Tasks .................................................................... 186
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations......................................... 188
5.18.1 About Property Evaluations ............................................................ 188
5.18.2 Properties View.............................................................................. 195
5.18.3
5.18.4
Working with the Properties View ................................................... 197
About Animation ............................................................................ 198
6
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5.19
5.18.5
Evaluation Editor View ...................................................................200
5.18.6
Working with the Evaluation Editor View......................................... 205
Working with Value Simulation ......................................................................208
5.19.1
5.19.2
5.20
5.21
5.19.3 Working with Value Simulation .......................................................211
About Depths................................................................................................211
5.20.1 Planning Your Depths ....................................................................212
5.20.2 Depths View ..................................................................................212
5.20.3 Working with Depths ......................................................................213
Overview of Printing......................................................................................214
5.21.1
5.21.2
5.22
About Value Simulation ..................................................................208
Value Simulator View .....................................................................209
Print Preview .................................................................................215
Page Setup View ...........................................................................216
5.21.3 Working with Printing .....................................................................221
Graphics Editor Appendix .............................................................................225
5.22.1 Context Menus...............................................................................225
5.22.2
Graphics Editor Keyboard Shortcuts...............................................230
5.22.3
5.22.4
Table of Element Handles ..............................................................235
Element and Graphic Properties.....................................................236
5.22.5
5.22.6
5.22.7
Error Messages and Troubleshooting Graphics Engineering .......... 245
HTML Literal Word Colors ..............................................................246
Troubleshooting AutoCAD Conversion ........................................... 247
7
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
About This Document
Document Revision History
About This Document
Purpose
This manual provides a complete description of the Desigo CC graphical
environment, including navigation, Graphics Viewer, Library Browser, and the
Graphics Editor.
Scope
This document applies to Desigo CC Version 2.
Target Audience
Project Engineers are responsible for planning and configuring a customer project.
They provide the parameterization of products, devices, and systems and are
responsible for general system troubleshooting. They have the training appropriate
to their function and to the products, devices, and systems to be configured. They
are familiar with the applied operating system(s) and the related network
environment.
Field Engineers provide the basic installation of devices and systems for a specific
customer at the customer site. They have the training appropriate to their function
and to the products, devices, and systems to be installed. They are also familiar
with the applied operating system(s) and the related network environment. Field
engineers are responsible for infrastructure troubleshooting (for example,
hardware, communication, network, and so on).
Librarians are application experts who are in charge of creating specific system
profiles for a market segment or a geographical region. They coordinate the use of
the advanced tools that permits the customization of the management station
libraries for specific uses. They have the training appropriate to their function and
to the products, devices, and information to be configured.
Liability Disclaimer
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and
software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot
guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcome.
8
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
About This Document
Document Revision History
Documentation Conventions
The following table lists conventions to help you use this document in a quick and
efficient manner.
Convention
Examples
Numbered Lists (1, 2, 3…) indicate a
procedure with sequential steps.
1. Turn OFF power to the field panel.
2. Turn ON power to the field panel.
3. Open the cabinet.
One-step procedures are indicated by a
bullet point.

Conditions that you must complete or must
be met before beginning a procedure are
designated with a ⊳.
Intermediate results (what will happen
following the execution of a procedure step),
are designated with an indented ⇨.
Results, after completing a procedure, are
designated with a ⇨.
⊳The report you want to print is open.
Expand the Event List.
1. Click Print
.
⇨The Print dialog box displays.
2. Select the printer and click Print.
⇨The print confirmation displays.
Bold font in a procedure indicates something Type F for Field panels.
you should type or select, or when a dialog Click OK to save changes and close the
box or window is specified.
dialog box.
The Create a new project dialog box
displays.
Menu paths in procedures are indicated in
bold.
Select File > Text, Copy > Group, which
means from the File menu, select Text,
Copy and then Group.
File paths containing placeholders display
[installation drive:]\[installation
the placeholders in italics enclosed in square folder]\[project]\...
brackets.
Error and system messages are displayed in The message Report Definition
successfully renamed displays in the
Courier New font.
status bar.
Italics are used to emphasize new or
important terms.
The Open Processor continuously executes
a user-defined set of instructions called the
control program.
This symbol signifies a Note. Notes provide
additional information or helpful hints.
Cross references to other information in
printed material are indicated with an arrow
and the page number, enclosed in brackets:
[→92]
For more information on creating flowcharts,
see Flowcharts [→92].
Getting Help
For more information about the Desigo CC products, contact your local sales
representative.
9
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
About This Document
Document Revision History
Safety Messages According ANSI Z535.6
The following examples show the ANSI standard safety messages used in this
document to draw the reader’s attention to important information.
ANSI distinguishes between personal injury safety messages and property damage
warning messages.
The personal injury safety messages have safety alert symbols and the following
alert level labels: DANGER!, WARNING!, CAUTION!
The label for property damage messages is: NOTICE.
Examples:
NOTICE
Property Damage Warning Message
Equipment damage or loss of data may occur if you do not follow a procedure or
instruction as specified.
CAUTION
Caution Safety Message
Minor or moderate injury may occur if you do not follow a procedure or instruction
as specified.
WARNING
Warning Safety Message
Personal injury or property damage may occur if you do not follow a procedure as
specified.
DANGER
Danger Safety Message
Electric shock, death, or severe property damage may occur if you do not perform
a procedure as specified.
10
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
About This Document
Document Revision History
Document Revision History
Document Identification
The document ID is structured as follows:
ID_Language(COUNTRY)_ModificationIndex_ProductVersionIndex
Example: A6Vnnnnnnnn_en_a_02
Document Revision History.
Modification Index
Edition Date
Brief Description
b
2014-03-27
2nd Edition containing HF1
a
2014-03-04
First Release Edition
c
11
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
1
Overview of Graphics
Graphic Libraries and Folders
1 Overview of Graphics
The Graphics application allows you to create, view, store, and handle large
graphics representing equipment, floors, buildings, facilities, and entire campuses.
These graphical representations can contain dynamic elements to represent
devices or values you want to monitor or control. The Graphics application consists
of three main components; the Graphics Viewer, the Graphics Editor, and the
Graphics Library Browser.
The Graphics application is located by selecting System Browser > Application
View. Project graphics are listed in the root of the Graphics Tree.
Graphics Viewer
The Graphics Viewer is the component of the Graphics application that allows you
to view the graphics representing your facility or equipment. It is where you can
change the current state of an object’s properties from a graphic, by using the
floating Status and Commands windows. You can filter your view of a graphic by
discipline, section, or you can zoom in and out for greater detail or for a birds-eye
overview.
The Graphics Viewer is accessible from the Systems Browser’s Application View,
and then clicking Graphics, or any one of the actual graphics in its root structure.
The Graphics Viewer displays in the Default tab of either the Primary or Secondary
pane. If you have the appropriate security access, you can access the Graphics
Editor from the Graphics Viewer.
For more information on the Graphics Viewer, see Overview of Graphics Viewer [ ➙
21].
12
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics
1
Graphic Libraries and Folders
Graphics Editor
The Graphics Editor is the Graphics component that, with the appropriate security
rights, allows you to create and modify simple and dynamic graphical
representations of your devices, facility, campus, or equipment. The Graphics
Editor also allows you to test and simulate your dynamic graphics before going
online with them. Graphics, Symbols, and Graphic Templates are all created in the
Graphics Editor.
The Graphics Editor is accessible from the:

Graphics Viewer, by switching from Operating to Engineering mode, or by
clicking Edit

from the Graphics Viewer toolbar.
Graphics Library Browser, by right-clicking on a Symbol or Graphic Template
thumbnail in the Primary pane, and selecting Edit, or by clicking Edit
from
the Graphics Library Browser.
For more information on the Graphics Editor, see Overview of Graphics Editor [ ➙
46].
Graphics Library Browser
The Graphics Library Editor allows you toggle between a view that displays all the
available Symbols and graphic template objects in your project libraries.
The Graphics Library Browser displays in the Primary pane when you click a
libraries Symbol or Graphic Templates folder. It is also accessible from within the
Graphics Editor as one of the views you can display in the dock panel.
For more information on the Graphics Library Browser, see Overview of Graphics
Library Browser [➙ 41].
1.1
Graphic Libraries and Folders
Graphics Libraries and folders are located and created in the System Browser, in
both the Management View and Application View.
In order to view graphics, you must first create your libraries and sub-libraries that
will host the graphics. This is accomplished in the System Browser’s Management
View. The System Settings folder contains the configuration area for all your
libraries.
Existing graphics associated with your plant are listed and viewed from the
Application View tree, under the Graphics application.
1.2
Graphics Related Folders
Graphic Related Folders
Graphic related folders are displayed in both the System Browser’s Application
View and the Management View. There are three types of graphic folders: Graphic,
Symbols, and Graphic Template.



Application View > Graphics – Displays all graphics (*.CCG) files.
Management View > Project* > System Settings > Libraries > [Appropriate
Sub-Library] > Symbols – Displays all the related Symbols (.CCS) files
associated with the selected library.
Management View > Project* > System Settings > Libraries > [Appropriate
Sub-Library] > Graphic Templates – Displays all the related Symbols (*.CCT)
files associated with the selected library.
13
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
1
Overview of Graphics
Graphics Viewer: Operating and Engineering Mode
*If your System Browser display mode is set to Show Name, you will see
ManagementView instead of Project.
See also

1.3
Creating a Graphic Template Library [➙ 118]
Graphics Viewer: Operating and Engineering Mode
The following table describes the Graphics Viewer behavior according to the
Graphics window mode.
Graphics Viewer window
mode
Graphics Viewer application behavior
Operating


Engineering


1.4
The Graphics Viewer displays
– In the Default tab of the Primary pane.
– The Textual Viewer tab displays and is available in
the Primary pane.
Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
The Graphics Viewer displays:
– In the Graphics tab of the Primary window.
– The Object Configurator tab displays and is
available in the Primary pane.
Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
Graphics Library Browser - Operating and
Engineering Mode
The following table describes the Graphics Library Browser behavior according to
the Graphics window mode.
Graphics Viewer window
mode
Graphics Viewer application behavior
Operating


The Graphics Library Browser displays:
– In the Default tab of the Primary pane.
– The Textual Viewer tab displays and is available in
the Primary pane.
The Graphics Viewer toolbar displays.

When you click the
Edit icon, the Graphics Editor
displays in Operating mode.
Engineering



The Graphics Library Browser displays:
– In the Graphics tab of the Primary pane.
– The Library Object Configurator tab displays and is
available in the Primary pane.
– The Object Configurator tab displays and is
available in the Primary pane.
The Graphics Viewer toolbar displays.
When you click the
Edit icon, the Graphics Editor
displays in Engineering mode, and the Library Browser
14
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics
Graphics Editor - Operating and Engineering Mode
1
view opens and displays all the associated Symbols or
graphic templates of that particular library.

1.5
Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
Graphics Editor - Operating and Engineering Mode
The following table describes the Graphics behavior according to the Graphics
window mode.
NOTE :
In addition to having a Graphics Editor license, you must also have Graphic Editor
Application rights to create, edit, or delete a Symbol or Template Graphic.
Graphic Editor level access is defined by the Security application.
Graphics Editor window
mode
Graphics Editor application behavior
Operating


Engineering


1.6
The Graphics Editor displays
– In the Default tab of the Primary pane.
– The Textual Viewer tab is displayed and available
in the Primary pane.
Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
The Graphics Editor displays:
– In the Graphics tab of the Primary pane.
– The Object Configurator tab is displayed and
available in the Primary pane.
Can create, open, and edit graphic files.
Security and Graphics Overview
Access levels are the security rights users are granted to access applications and
objects in the Desigo CC software. The access levels for the Graphics Viewer,
Graphics Editor, and Graphics Library Browser are as follows:
Graphics Viewer
The access rights for the Graphics Viewer application define the user’s ability to
display a graphic or a Symbol in the Graphics Viewer and in the Graphics Editor
Runtime mode.
Access
Show
If Enabled
You can display a graphic in the Graphics Viewer and in the Graphics Editor
Runtime mode.
Graphics Editor
If you have access rights for the Graphics Editor application, you can create,
modify, and delete graphics, Symbols, graphic templates, and graphic folders.
Access
Show
If Enabled
You can access the Graphics Editor.
15
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
1
Overview of Graphics
Scopes and Data Point Access
Create
You can create new and save existing graphics and graphic folders.
Delete
You can delete graphics and graphic folders.
Save
You can save any changes to a graphic.
NOTE: If disabled, you can open a graphic, but, in Read-Only mode. No changes
can be made.
Graphics Library Browser
If you have access rights for the Graphics Library Browser, you can navigate to and
display Symbols and graphic templates in the Graphics Viewer, as well as the
user’s ability to create and modify them in the Graphics Editor.
Access
1.7
If Enabled
Show
You can view Symbols and Graphic Templates in the Graphics Viewer and the
Graphics Editor.
Create
You can create new graphics, Symbols, and graphic templates, and save existing
Symbols and graphic templates.
Delete
You can delete graphics and graphic folders.
Save
You can save an existing Symbol or graphics template in its original name or in one
of the existing names in the library.
Scopes and Data Point Access
Assigning Scopes to Graphic Objects
Scope is a grouping of system objects, or nodes with specific scope definitions
used for the purpose of assigning access rights. You can create scopes and assign
access rights to any of the graphic nodes in the Graphics system tree. For more
information, see Scopes.
You can apply scopes to the following graphic nodes:

Graphics


Symbols
Templates

Manual and Automatic Pages
Data Point Access Privileges
Data points are integrated into a graphic by associating them with elements. These
data points and elements can be evaluated by creating expressions that result in a
graphic that allows you to view dynamic values of a facility, building, or piece of
equipment. Data points, therefore, always display using the elements they are
associated with.
Depending on the your access rights, which are set in the System Manager, certain
data points can be inaccessible. In this case, if one or more data points associated
with an element is inaccessible, then the associated element will not display in the
graphic while in Runtime mode or in the Graphics Viewer. However, the parent of
an element, such as a Symbol instance or a group, and any other associated
children (elements), are not affected and will display on the graphic. This is
considered the Hide-Rule for data points in a graphic.
The Hide-Rule does not apply to: Object References and Link Reference since
there are no COV subscriptions involved in these scenarios.
When a data point with an existing address is subscribed for COV’s, the data
point’s status and value are updated automatically in the Value Simulator view. If
16
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics
User Settings Overview
1
the Status for the point reads, General AccessDenied, this indicates that the
data point is inaccessible and therefore not readable for COV subscriptions.
1.8
User Settings Overview
Graphics Viewer
The following user settings are automatically saved when you exit out of the
Graphics Viewer.

The Auto zoom selection is maintained.
Graphics Editor
The Graphics Editor allows you to retain your user settings applied to layout, views,
and values. Therefore, when you exit and re-enter the application, your settings do
not change. User settings are stored in the user’s Windows Temp Folder,
c:\Users\[username]\AppData\Local\Temp.
If you want to restore your settings to the last saved layout, select the
button
from the Options tab > Layout group. The Graphics Editor will return to the last
saved layout and settings.
The following user settings are automatically saved when you exit the Graphics
Editor, and retained when you log on again.

The location of the Quick Access toolbar and any shortcut items added to it.

The size, position, and window state (maximized) of the Graphics Editor
window.

The Ribbon status; whether it is maximized or minimized.
The Dock Panel layout, including size, position of each panel, and if it is
docked and where, if it is floating, or set to auto-hide.



The Library Browser filter and library selections, as well as the magnification
setting.
The Break Lock, Logical Units, and Disable Layer Visibility Range options
located on the View tab.

All selections from the View tab, whether they are visible or not. The only
exception is the Aerial View; it is always visible in the dock panel upon opening
the Graphics Editor.

All Value Simulator view settings and selections, except for the Run Value
Simulator. If enabled, it resorts back to the disabled state when you exit the
Graphics Editor.

The most recent changes made to the Graphic and Graphic Workspace
properties are stored, so that the next graphic you create, automatically takes
the properties of the previously created graphic.
17
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
2
Navigation in Graphics
Accessing the Graphics Editor
2 Navigation in Graphics
2.1
Accessing the Graphics Editor
You can switch between the Graphics Viewer and the Graphics Editor in Operating
or Engineering mode.
To Access the Graphics Editor in Operating Mode
 You are in the Graphics Viewer, in Operating mode.
1. From the Graphics Viewer toolbar, click Edit
.
 The Graphics Editor opens in Operating mode in the Default tab of the
primary pane.
2. To switch to Engineering mode in the Graphics Editor, click the
button.
 The Graphics Editor switches to
and displays in the
Graphics pane. The Object Configurator tab also displays.
3. To return to the Graphics Viewer from Engineering mode, click the Edit
.
 The Graphics Viewer displays in Engineering mode, in the primary pane.
To Access the Graphics Editor in Engineering Mode
 You are in the Graphics Viewer in Engineering mode.
1. From the Graphics Viewer toolbar, click Edit
.
 The Graphics Editor displays in Engineering mode in the Graphics tab of
the primary pane. The Object Configurator tab is also displayed.
2. To return to the Graphics Viewer, do one of the following:
 From the Graphics Editor toolbar, click Edit
. The Graphics Viewer displays
in the primary pane in Engineering mode.
 Click on the
button. The Graphics Viewer displays in the
primary pane in Operating mode.
To Switch Graphics Editor from Operating to Engineering Mode
 You are in the Graphics Editor in Operating mode.

Click the
button.
 The Graphics Editor switches to
and displays in the Graphics
pane. The Object Configurator tab also displays.
To Switch from Graphics Editor Engineering Mode to the Graphics
Viewer Engineering Mode
You are in the Graphics Editor in

Click Edit
mode.
.
The Graphics Viewer displays in Engineering mode in the primary pane.
18
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Navigation in Graphics
Drag-and-Drop Overview
2.2
2
Drag-and-Drop Overview
The Graphics application supports the drag-and-drop of nodes and their properties
from System Browser, the Graphics Viewer, and the Contextual pane to the canvas
and various fields in the Graphics Editor views. After a drag-and-drop, the name
and the address of the data point reference display in the target field.
NOTE: In order to drag-and-drop a node or object properties to the Graphics
Editor, you must have the proper licensing or user access.
Drag Source
All object nodes from any of the System Browser applications, regardless of where
they exist within the folder’s hierarchy, are drag sources that can be dropped on to
a receiving field, a drop target. In the case of the Graphics Viewer, the properties of
any object that has a valid reference to an object, such as a selection reference,
expression, or evaluation associated with it, is a valid drag source. These
properties can be dragged over to the Graphics Editor or onto another application
pane or view that accepts drag source.
Drop Target
All text or field boxes in the Graphics Editor are valid drop targets for the data point
reference nodes. Generally, the data point references are dropped into the
Expression field of the Evaluation Editor or used in the Animation Symbol for a
substitution.
When you drop a node, the full path or hierarchy of the name display in the
fieldname, separated with the separator from the hierarchy. For example,
“User1:\Campus1\Building1\Floor1”.
Drag Data
The drag data depends on the type of reference associated with the element or
object when the drag was initiated.

Evaluation – Data point I.D. of all unique referenced objects from all
expressions.

Selection Reference – Data point of the Selection Reference property.

Symbol – Data point of the Object Reference, the associated object.
Drag-and-Drop Multiple Objects from System Browser
You can drag-and-drop multiple objects from System Browser to the Graphics
Editor. When you drag-and-drop multiple objects over, the objects display in the
alignment wrapped mode when dropped on the canvas. This means the objects
display side-by-side in a row, and wrap to the next row as needed. When you
initially drop the objects on the canvas and release the mouse button, the objects
remain selected, if you would rather the objects are “cascaded,” on the canvas,
then you can undo the wrap align step by pressing CTRL+Z or click
from the
ribbon, and the objects instead display in a cascaded format on your canvas.
Tips on Using Drag-and-Drop

When you drag-and-drop a node from the System Browser or the Graphics
Viewer to the Graphics Editor, only the name of the data point reference is
displayed in the Graphics Editor, and not the description, which may be visible
in System Browser, depending on the display view.
19
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
2
Navigation in Graphics
Table of Graphics Drop Targets

2.2.1
While, some nodes might belong to a hidden or another hierarchy, the structure
should match the System Browser structure.
Drag-and-Drop Cursor Image
You can drag any item displayed in the Symbol Browser , Graphics Viewer, and
Contextual pan --including a search result—to the Graphics Editor, if you have the
application and licensing right to the Graphics Editor. Objects in the Graphics
Viewer are always a drag source, and the Graphics Editor is a drag source and
drag-target. Both support selecting both single and multiple items. The cursor
image changes (see the following table) depending on whether or not the view
accepts drops. You can cancel dragging by pressing the ESC key or by moving the
cursor outside the boundary of the Graphics Editor window.
Cursor Image
Accepts Drop
Does Not accept Drops
2.3
Table of Graphics Drop Targets
Many fields in the Graphics Editor views are valid drag–and-drop targets for normal
text from other applications. For example, drag-and-drop text from a word
processing application into the Text property field.
You can also drag-and-drop data point references from System Manager, the
Graphics Viewer, and the Contextual pane into select fields in the Graphics Editor.
The following fields are drop targets for valid data point references:
Drop Target Field for Data Point References
View Name
List of Drop Target Fields for Data Point References
Ribbon

Hover anywhere over the Ribbon and any associated graphics open
and display in the work area.
Graphic Canvas

Object displays on the canvas.
Evaluation Editor 
Expression
Find and
Replace


Find what
Replace with
Value Simulator

Object Reference
Properties





Text Property
Selection Reference
Object Reference (Symbols only)
Expression field
Navigation Target
20
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Table of Graphics Drop Targets
3
3 Overview of Graphics Viewer
The Graphics Viewer is the Graphics component that allows you to display and
view graphics in your facility. While viewing your graphics, you can do the following
in the Graphics Viewer:

Increase or decrease them in size

Pan them
Scale them to
– predefined viewports

–
–
–
predefined zoom steps
full size
1:1 resolution

View them in part or as a whole using the viewport rectangle

Navigate and filter the view in the primary or secondary work area by depth,
layer, and discipline using the Graphic Navigation View


View them from above using the Aerial View
Mouse-over elements or objects on the graphic to view tooltip information

View related properties in the contextual pane


View changing property values of system objects on a graphic
Acknowledge and command objects on a graphic using the Status and
Commands window

Access the Graphics Editor to edit them

Access the Graphics Editor to create a new graphic
21
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Point Centered Mode
3.1
Point Centered Mode
Point Centered Mode ensures that a selected data point or group of data points will
always be centered in the Graphics Viewer.
For example, you might be required to put a data point in this mode if you are
monitoring a fire system in a chemical manufacturing facility with key sensors that
must always be viewed. Enabling Point Centered Mode in such a scenario ensures
that the data point does not blend in with and become lost among surrounding
graphics. Or, you might be required to put the Graphics Viewer in this mode, if, for
example, you are monitoring a fire system in a pharmaceutical manufacturing
facility or an intrusion system in high security sites with key areas that must always
be viewed. You can also enable the Group Center Mode, to ensure that the parent
and all children of the selected point are always selected; therefore, the group(s) of
points do not blend in with and become lost among any surrounding graphics. In
Group mode, Siblings are all data points with the same parent as the selected data
point. Those siblings are retrieved from the currently selected view when the
selection in the System Browser changes. This mean, though, that selecting the
same data point in different views, for example, Logical or Management View,
could return different siblings.
To implement the feature, you select a data point object in System Browser. The
System Manager application then opens the Graphics Viewer and loads the point’s
default graphic view, depth, and graphic associated with it. You then select the
Point Centered Mode button from the Graphics Viewer toolbar to center the point in
the viewport. The feature is disabled by selecting the button again.
While in Point Centered Mode, you cannot pan the object. However, you can select
any zoom factor without affecting centering in the viewport or you can select
another Symbol to shift the focus to another object or Symbol.
3.2
Status and Commands Overview
The Status and Commands window displays on a graphic, and allows you to
display and change the current state of an object’s properties in your building
control system. Access to objects is based upon the object privileges and privilege
profiles set for you by your system administrator.
Display of Properties on a Graphic
Properties display on a graphic in one of two ways—automatically or manually.
 They display automatically when a property goes into an off-normal state. The
Status and Command window displays the icons associated with the properties
in an off-normal state on the graphic. You expand the icon view to display the
detailed property information and the command options.
The Status and Command window(s) display manually when you right-click an
object in a graphic that has data points associated with it. You can display
multiple Status and Command windows in Graphics.
When a Status and Command window displays on the graphic, a connection line
displays between the window and its associated objects on the canvas. The
connection line between the Status and Command window and the object(s)
remains intact, even when the window is moved around on the canvas.

Properties and commands also display in the Operation and Extended Operation
tabs of the Contextual pane for the selected object.
For more information on commanding properties and priority arrays, see Command
Priorities and Priority Arrays.
22
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Viewing Graphic Objects
3
Summary Status
In order to simplify the system display and highlight the most important information,
the system sometimes combines properties into a Summary Status property. The
Summary Status displays the highest priority status that is currently active for an
object. For example, if an object has an active Fire Alarm and Fire Fault, the Fire
Alarm would be displayed in the Summary Status.
3.3
Viewing Graphic Objects
The Graphics Viewer allows you to display dynamic graphics of your building
control system. System Manager is the client application that hosts the Graphics
Viewer. Within System Manager, you navigate the various views of System
Browser to select the objects you want to display in the Graphics Viewer. System
Browser displays only the objects in the system that you have access to, based on
your user profile and privileges.
Primary and Secondary Selections
When you select a graphics object from System Browser, the Graphics Viewer
displays the representative graphic. The selected object is considered the primary
selection. The object properties also display in the Operations\Extended
Operations view. The graphic that has the primary selection displays the name of
the graphic and the object name according to your Display selection in the System
Browser, in the upper, left-hand corner of the primary pane. See figure below.
If you left-click a Symbol on a graphic or, the referenced object of the Symbol
becomes the secondary selection, while the primary selection remains the same in
System Browser. The figure illustrates the primary selection in System Browser,
iAnalog Output 1, see below.
23
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Viewing Graphic Objects
And, in the Graphics Viewer, the Operations tab in the Contextual pane changes its
display to correspond to the new, secondary selection. System Browser, however,
still displays the original, primary selection, to show your starting point.
When you select an object from System Browser that is associated with a graphic,
the Graphics Viewer displays the representative graphic and the object’s
associated Symbol on the graphic is selected. As a result, the Operations tab
displays the object properties to correspond to the selection.
Double-clicking a Symbol on a graphic makes the referenced object associated
with the Symbol the primary selection in System Browser, and all workflows are
updated accordingly.
24
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Zooming and Panning
3.4
3
Zooming and Panning
The Graphics Viewer supports zooming and panning within the active graphic.
Zooming allows you to magnify or reduce the graphic image, and panning allows
you to move the graphic around on the canvas.
In zooming mode, you can left-click and drag a rubber band rectangle around any
area of the graphic. The rectangle represents the area that will be zoomed to full
view once you release the mouse button. Pressing the ESC key cancels the
rubber-band rectangle function.
3.5
Graphics Viewer Components
The components that make up the Graphics Viewer consist of a toolbar, two views
for navigating the active graphic, keyboard and mouse shortcuts, and tooltips.
3.5.1
Graphics Viewer Toolbar
The Graphics Viewer toolbar allows you to navigate to and work with graphic pages
displayed in the Graphics Viewer. Use the mouse to select a toolbar button.
Graphics Viewer Toolbar Operating Mode
Icon
Name
Description
Edit
Allows you to toggle between the
Graphics Viewer and the
Graphics Editor.
NOTE: Only displays if a
Graphics Editor license is
detected.
Home
Returns the view of the
displayed graphic to the state
before the primary selection
changed.
Zoom In (+20%)
Allows you to zoom in by + 20%
on the active graphic with each
mouse click.
Zoom Out (-20%)
Allows you to zoom out by - 20%
on the active graphic with each
mouse click.
100%
Displays the active graphic at
100% magnification.
Zoom
Allows you to choose from a predefined zoom level that will be
applied to the graphic in the
primary pane.
Selecting Auto from the dropdown menu allows you to
maintain the scale and focus of
the current graphic, even when
the primary pane is resized.
Zoom View
Displays the Zoom View and
allows you to zoom in on the
active graphic by adjusting the
slider.
25
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Components
Aerial View
Switches between Aerial View
being visible or hidden in the
Graphics Viewer area.
Zoom Real
Allows you to zoom in on the
active graphic using your mouse
wheel. To activate, click on the
icon. To de-activate, left-mouse
click anywhere on the graphic.
Scale to Fit
Scales the elements on the
graphic the fit in the viewing area
of the graphic.
Point Centered Display Mode
Moves the selected point to the
center of the graphic.
Previous Depth
Updates the active depth on the
current graphic to display at the
previous depth selected.
NOTE: The depth navigation is
enabled when there has been a
previous depth selected, prior to
the current selected depth.
Next Depth
Updates the active depth on the
current graphic to display at the
next available depth.
NOTE: The depth navigation is
enabled when a graphic contains
more than one configured depth.
Default Depth
Displays the graphics depth that
has the largest Display Size.
If you are in a manual viewport,
the depth from the viewport is
used. If the viewport has no
depth associated with it, the
depth with the largest Display
Size is selected.
Layer visibility and zoom factor
change, but the scroll position
remains the same.
3.5.2
Fit to Secondary Selection
Allows you to calculate the depth
and the viewport from the
current selection.
Depths Navigation View
Switches between Depths
Navigation View being visible or
hidden in the Graphics Viewer
area.
This view allows you to view a
graphic content by depth, and by
layer, or by discipline associated
with a layer.
Page Setup
Displays the Page Setup view
for the current graphic.
Print
Displays the Print dialog box to
print the current graphic.
Show Status and Command Pane
Allows you to enable or disable
the Status and Command pane
from displaying.
Views
The Graphic Viewer provides you with two floating views, the Aerial View and the
Graphic Navigation view, to help you navigate the active graphic in either the
26
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Components
3
primary or secondary work area of System Manager. Both views can be resized
and toggled to display or not, using the Graphics Viewer toolbar.
Aerial View
The Aerial view provides you with a bird’s-eye view of the active graphic at all
times. The viewport rectangle, a rectangular shaped border within the Aerial view,
provides a visual representation of the region that has the current focus. You can
also draw a viewport rectangle in the area you would like to zoom in on, or click
and drag the viewport to move to another location on the graphic.
Item
Description
1
Viewport Rectangle
Allows you to view graphics in part or as a whole.
Navigation View
The Graphic Navigation view allows you to customize and navigate through views
of the active graphic by selecting a depth and then filtering, by discipline or by
layer, which of the associated layers to display. If you choose to filter the layers by
discipline, only the layers designated with that discipline display in the graphic
view. Otherwise, if you filter on layers only, all the layers of the selected depth
display in the Graphic Navigation view, and you can manually choose which layers
will be visible in the current view of the graphic.
27
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Components
Navigation View
3.5.3
Item
Description
1
Selected Depth
Displays the active depth. Use the drop-down menu to
select from a list of available depths.
2
Filtering
Allows you to select how to filter the layers associated with
the selected depth. You can filter the layers by Discipline or
by Layers.
3
Discipline Selection
Displays the discipline used to filter the associated layers
with. Use the drop-down menu to choose from a list of
available disciplines. The active graphic will only display
layers designated with the selected discipline.
This section is only active if you have selected to filter the
depth by Discipline.
4
Layer Selection
Displays the list of available layers associated with the
selected depth. If a layer is checked, the associated layer
displays in the current graphic view. If unchecked, the layer
does not display.
This section is only active if you have selected to filter the
selected depth of the graphic by Layer.
About the Status and Commands Window
Overview of the Window
In Graphics, the Status and Command window is a floating view that displays an
object’s properties, current status, and command buttons in the following two
scenarios.

Automatically, in the Graphics Viewer when an object associated with the open
graphic has a property in an off-normal state. The Status and Commands
window displays in the collapsed, icon view over the associated object. To
expand the view of the window, click the vertical expander on the side of the
window.
28
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Components

3
Manually, when you move the pointer over an object on a graphic and then
right-click it and select Show Status and Commands.
Connection Point and Lines
The Status and Command window is a floating view that displays over an object on
the canvas, and can be moved around in the Graphic Viewer. The Status and
Command window displays a connection line to its associated object(s) on the
canvas. The connection point of the connection line, anchors itself in the following
manner:

Non-engineered elements – The connection point aligns itself to the center of
the element.

Symbols – The connection point aligns itself to the center of the first element in
the Symbol, according to the element tree.
Customized Connection Point – You can create a connection point location by
drawing an Ellipse where you want to anchor the connection point for the
Symbol. In the Ellipse Descriptor field, you can enter text stating it is an
“Anchor for the Connection Point”. To hide the Ellipse from view, either cover it
up by another element (preferred method) or disable the Visible property for the
element in the Property Tree. In both cases, make sure that the Ellipse is the
first element in the Symbols element tree in the Element View.
For graphics and graphic templates only, you can specify the maximum number of
connection lines to display. The default value of 65535 is used when the property
Graphics > Max Connection Lines is left blank, in which case under normal
circumstances all lines display with the Status and Commands window. If the
actual number of connection lines associated with a Status and Command window
exceeds the number of connection lines specified in this property, then none of the
lines display.

Drag-and-Drop
The Status and Commands window is a drag source for data point properties.
When the Status and Command window is expanded, you can drag a data point or
one of its properties from the window to any of the drop targets in the Graphics
Editor or other applications. You cannot drag-and-drop virtual data point properties,
such as those properties that display No Properties or Not Available.

Evaluation Editor: When you drop a data point property in the Expression field
of the Graphic Editor’s Evaluation Editor, the current value of the property
displays in the Result field for the element’s property.

Ribbon: When you drop a data point property onto the Ribbon, all the graphics
associated with that data point display as tabbed graphics in the work area.
Graphic Canvas: When you drop a data point property onto the canvas, the
associated data point Symbol displays on the graphic.
For a list of the drop sources in the Graphics Editor see the Table of Graphics Drop
Targets [➙ 20].

29
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Components
3.5.4
Status and Command Window
The Status and Commands window displays the following information about an
object, its properties, and its status.
Item
Description
1
Icon
Displays the icon associated with the property type.
2
Object Path and Object Name
The path and the name of the object.
3
Property Name
Displays the name of one or more properties associated with the object the
selected object(s).
If you select multiple objects of the same type in the system, the icon next to
the property name indicates this with a triangular symbol in the lower righthand corner. Clicking this symbol expands the table row to show all of the
selected objects of the same type that share this property. You can then
change all properties for the selected objects at the same time.
4
Current Value
Displays the current value of each property.
5
Argument Area and Progress / Result Area
When you initiate a command that requires additional arguments, the
required argument fields display for you to enter one or more arguments
prior to sending the command. You must complete all required arguments
before sending the command.
An argument field that displays a red border around it means that the value
for that property is invalid. You will need to enter a valid value before
commanding the property.
 Once you execute a command, displays the progress and then the
result of a command once you execute a command. During the
command, the Progress / Result field displays Command in Progress,
along with information about how many objects have been commanded
and how many will be commanded all together. After a command
execution is complete, successful commands display Success. Failed
commands display the reason the command failed and, if you executed
multiple commands, the number of failed commands.
6
Command Area
Displays the name of a command that you can initiate. If a command button
has a triangle in the lower right-hand corner, the command has multiple
buttons or options, and clicking on the triangle then displays the options.
Some commands are sent immediately after you initiate them by clicking on
the Command button. Others require you to enter arguments before they
can be sent. When a command requires arguments (additional fields
requiring information to continue with the command), the property row will
expand after you click the command button. You then complete the
additional fields and click the appropriate button (Send, Command, etc.).
Some object properties support grouping of command buttons under a
single command button with a drop-down list of your choices. The button
you choose from the drop-down list becomes the new commandable button
in the group.
30
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Components
3
The Send button displays only for commands that require additional
arguments. Clicking the Send button sends a command after you have
entered all required arguments.
Command Types:
Multiple Option Selection:
Visual display of associated properties. Each slot represents a property
option. If a property is selected, it is shaded, see example above.. Hovering
over each slot allows you to view the property option; clicking on the slot
allows you to select the option.
7
Expand\Collapse Button
Allows you to expand, collapse, or close the window :
 Expands the Status and Commands window when icons display offnormal properties.
 Minimizes a Status and Command window so that only the icons of the
off-normal properties display.
Closes a Status and Command window completely, if there are no
properties in an off-normal state.
8
Scrollview indicator
Indicates whether or not more buttons are available, yet not visible, and
where the buttons are displayed.
When you move the mouse over the scroll-view indicator, East-West cursor
displays, and allows you to scroll through the commands.
More command buttons are to the right of the last displayed button.
More buttons are to the left of the first displayed button.
There are more buttons on either side of the visible buttons.
Scrollbar
Displays when the window has run out of space, and allows you to scroll
through the active properties.
Status and Commands Window
3.5.5
Status and Commands Connection Lines
Visibility of the connection line and its connection point are controlled as follows:

A Connection line and its connection point are only visible if the element is
visible.

An element is only visible when the Layer is visible that contains the element.
A Layer is only visible if a Depth is visible that contains that particular Layer.


3.5.6
A Status and Command window is only displayed when there is at least one
connection to an element.
About Tooltips
Tooltips are customizable properties that display as a yellow text box when you
mouse-over an element or object on the active graphic. The text box for a tooltip
contains descriptive text, the current value of the graphic object, and the name(s)
of the associated objects based on the view selected in System Browser.
31
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
When you move your cursor over an object or element on the active graphic, an
associated tooltip displays.
Item
Description
1
Static Tooltip
Descriptive text entered into the Tooltip property field that is associated with the
General category in the Property Viewer.
2
Dynamic Tooltip
Current tooltip text based on a tooltip evaluation, if any, and the current field values.
Evaluations are created in the Evaluation Editor.
3
4
Static Link Reference and Link Description
The name and description of the file linked to the element as entered in the Link
Reference and Link Description fields from the Commands category in the Property
Viewer.
Dynamic Link Reference and Link Description
The name and description of the associated link resulting from any evaluations on the
Link Reference and Link Description fields. The text displayed depends on the current
field values. Evaluations are created in the Evaluation Editor.
5
Data point References
The name(s) of the object and the System Browser view the name is based on. One
line entry per object.
3.6
3.6.1
Graphics Viewer Tasks
Commanding Off-Normal Properties
 You have a graphic open in Graphics Viewer, and one or more objects have
properties in an off-normal state. The system has displayed the objects and the
icons of the properties that are in an off-normal state. You want to view or
command these off-normal properties.
1. Navigate to the Status and Command window associated with the object you
want to command.
2. Click Expander
to display the list of property information for the object.
 The system displays a list of the object’s properties, their current state, and
all commands available to you for this object, based on your system
privileges.
3. Click the command button that displays the command you want to execute.
 If the command does not have arguments associated with it, the command
is sent and the status displays.
 If the command button has arguments associated with it, proceed to Step
4.
4. Complete the required fields.
5. Click Send.
 The system displays the status of the command
3.6.2
Commanding Properties in Graphics Viewer
 You have a graphic open in Graphics Viewer, and you want to command the
properties of an object in the graphic.
32
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
3
1. Right-click the object, and select Status and Commands.
 The system displays a list of the object’s properties, their current state,
value, status, and all commands available to you for this object, based on
your system privileges and the configuration settings for the object.
 If you select multiple properties to command, the selected properties
display an icon with a triangular symbol in the lower right-hand corner.
2. If you selected multiple properties in the step above, click the triangular symbol
on the icon next to the property you want to command. Otherwise, proceed to
Step 3.
 The table row of the proper expands to show multiple instances of the
property—one for each of the objects selected.
3. Click the command button that displays the command you want to execute.
 If the command does not have arguments associated with it, the command
is sent and the status displays.
 If the command button has arguments associated with it, proceed to Step
4.
4. Complete the required fields if any are associated with the command.
5. Click Send.
 The system displays the status of the command.
3.6.3
Dragging Object Properties from the Graphics Viewer
Referenced properties of an object or Symbol on a graphic in the Graphics Viewer
can easily be dragged over to another graphic in the Graphics Editor, the
Contextual Pane, or any other view or pane in that accepts a drag source.
NOTE: To select multiple objects, nodes, or properties, click CTRL and then click
each item you want to drag over to the Graphics Editor.
 A graphic is displayed in the Graphics Viewer.
 If you are dragging an object or Symbol to the Graphics Editor, you must have
another System Manager pane open. See, Launching a New System Manager.
1. Hover over an element or Symbol in the Graphics Viewer. A red border
displays around the highlighted object.
2. Click the LEFT mouse button and drag.
 The cursor changes to
.
3. Release the LEFT mouse button when the cursor changes to
over the
intended drop target.
 The data from the object is copied to the area or field.
3.6.4
Creating a Graphic
 You are in System Browser > Application View and Graphics is selected, or
one of the sub-graphic components, and the Graphics Viewer is displayed in
the Primary or Secondary pane. NOTE: In order to create a graphic, you must
have the appropriate access rights to the Graphics Editor application.
1. In System Browser, select Application View, and then Graphics.
33
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
2. In the Graphics Viewer, click the Operating button to switch to Engineering
mode.
3. Do one of the following:
-
From the Graphics toolbar, click CreateNew
, and select New Template
Graphic.
-
From the Application button menu, click New Graphic.
A blank, tabbed graphic template displays in the Graphics Editor work area.
4. Create and design the graphic as necessary.
5. From the Graphics toolbar, click Save As
.
 The Save As dialog box displays.
6. Do one of the following:
-
-
3.6.5
Saving a Graphic - Select the Graphics folder where you want to save the
graphic. In the Name field, type a name for your graphic and click Save.
The graphic is saved to GMSProjects > [Name of Your Project] > Graphics
folder or sub-folder you may have selected. The graphic is saved in both a
.CCG and a .PNG file format. The graphic is also listed in System Browser
under Graphics.
Saving a Graphic Template - Navigate to the Libraries folder that contains
the Graphics Template folder where you want to save the graphic template.
In the Name field, type a name for your graphic template and click Save.
The template is saved in a CCT and .PNG file format.
Creating a Graphics Sub-Folder
You want to create a Graphics sub-folder in System Browser and in your project's
Graphics folder.
 You are in Engineering mode and the Graphics Editor is displayed in the
Graphics tab of the work area.
1. To select the location of the new graphics folder, in System Browser, in the
Applications View, click Graphics or a sub-folder, if one exists.
2. From the Graphics Editor toolbar, click Create New
.
 The Create New context menu displays.
3.
Click New Folder.
 The Create New Folder dialog box displays.
4. In the Create New Folder field, type a name for the new folder.
5. Click OK.
 The folder is created and displayed in the Graphics folder in System Browser.
3.6.6
Deleting a Graphic Item
You want to delete a graphic item, a graphic or a folder, from the Graphics folder.
You can only delete an empty folder, you cannot delete a folder that contains any
graphical objects.
 You are in Engineering mode and the Graphics Editor is displayed.
1. In System Browser > Application View, expand the Applications folder.
34
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
3
 The list of available applications display.
2. Expand the Graphics folder.
3. Navigate to and click the graphic or graphic folder you want to delete.
4. From the Graphics Viewer toolbar, click Delete
 The Delete icon is now active
.
and the System Manager dialog box
displays.
5. Click Yes to confirm you want to delete the listed graphic item.

3.6.7
The graphic item is deleted and removed from System Browser.
Disabling Point Centered Mode
 Point Centered Mode is enabled, and you want to disable it.
1. From the Graphics Viewer toolbar, click Point Centered Mode
.
2. Select None.
 Point Centered mode is disabled.
3.6.8
Displaying a Graphic
 You are in the System Browser, Application View, and are in Operating mode.
1. From System Browser, select Application View from the drop-down menu.
2. In the Selection pane, expand the Applications arrow.
 The list of available applications displays.
3. Expand the Graphics folder, and click the graphic you want to view in the
Primary pane.
 The selected graphic displays in the Primary pane of the Graphics Viewer.
3.6.9
Displaying Properties
 You have an object in the System Browser and you want to display the
associated properties.
 You have manually displayed the Status and Commands window for an object
on a graphic in the Primary Pane or Secondary Pane.
 A graphic in the Primary Pane or Secondary Pane has an object in an off
normal state and the associated Status and Commands window has
automatically displayed.
 From System Browser, the Primary Pane, or the Secondary Pane, you have
selected the object you want to command.
1. From the Status and Commands window, navigate the property you want to
command. If there are more than four properties displayed in the window, you
may have to scroll to locate the property.
 The system displays a list of the object’s properties, their current state,
value, status, and all commands available to you for this object, based on
your system privileges and the configuration settings for the object.
35
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
2. Complete the required fields and click on the associated command button that
displays the command you want to execute.
 Depending on the command type, the command is sent, updated, or
acknowledged and the status displays.
3. Observe the status of the command.
3.6.10
Editing a Graphic
You want to edit an existing graphic. You have a graphic open in the primary pane.
1. From the Graphics toolbar, click Edit
.
 The Graphics Editor opens and displays in the Work Area
2. Make modifications to the graphic as needed.
3. From the Graphics Toolbar, click Save As
.
 The Save As dialog box displays.
4. Navigate to the appropriate folder where you want to save your graphic and
type the new graphic File Name and from the Save as Type field, select the
appropriate file type.
5. Click Save.
 The graphic is saved.
3.6.11
Enabling Point Centered Mode
 You have a graphic open and would like to place a point object in Point
Centered Mode.
1. Select the point object.
2. Click Point Centered Mode
.
 The Point Centered mode context menu displays. The default mode is set
to None.
3. Click one of the following options:
-
Point – Point Centered Mode is enabled for the point object to display in the
center of the pane or canvas.
-
Group – Point Centered Mode is enabled for point objects to display in the
center of the pane or canvas.
 A checkmark displays next to the selected mode and the Point Centered mode
is set on the canvas.
3.6.12
Navigating to a Linked Element
If configured, an element on a graphic can be used as direct navigation to an
internal or external link.
 You have an element on a graphic that if selected links you to an internal or
external
1. (Optional) Move your cursor over the element to display the tooltip and view the
linked path and descriptive text, if any, about the linked element.
2. Either single click or double click the element.
36
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
3
 If the link is an internal Desigo CC link, the linked item becomes the primary
selection and displays in either the primary or secondary pane.
 If the link is external, the document, Webs site, or application opens and
displays.
3.6.13
Navigating to the Graphics Library Browser from System
Browser
You can view the Graphics Library Browser in the primary or secondary pane from
System Browser in Operating Mode.
1. In System Browser, navigate to the Management View > Project > System
Settings > Libraries.
2. Navigate to and click on any of your graphic Symbol folders.
 The Graphics Library Browser displays in the Primary pane.
3.6.14
Printing from the Graphics Viewer
 You are in the Graphics Viewer, in Operating mode, and have a graphic
displayed in the primary or secondary pane that you want to print.

You can do a quick print using the current printer settings or you can configure
the print settings prior to printing. Do one of the following:
-
To print using the current print settings - From the Graphics Viewer toolbar,
click the Print icon
-
. The Print dialog box displays. Select Print.
To configure the print settings before printing - From the Graphics Viewer
toolbar, click on the Page Setup icon
. The Page Setup window displays.
Configure the settings as necessary. For more information, see Page Setup
View [➙ 216]. From Page Setup, click Print, when you are done.
 The graphic is printed as configured.
3.6.15
Selecting Objects from System Browser
1. From System Browser, navigate to the graphic object you want to view.
2. Click the graphic object.
 Graphics Viewer displays the graphic object. Associated properties display in
Property Viewer. Related links display in Related Items. To select objects
within Graphics Viewer, see Selecting Objects within Graphics Viewer [ ➙37].
3.6.16
Selecting Objects within Graphics Viewer
 You have a graphic open, and you would like to view the properties of an object
on the graphic.

Do one of the following:
-
Click and drag until the object is enclosed in the rubber band, and then
release the mouse button. You can also select multiple objects by
enclosing more than one object in the rubber band.
37
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Tasks
-
Click directly on the object. You can also select multiple objects by holding
down the CTRL key while clicking on more than one object.
The object becomes the focus, and the object properties display in Property
Viewer.
NOTE: When you select a graphics object from System Browser, the Graphics
Viewer displays the representative graphic. The selected object is considered the
primary selection. The object also displays in the Property Viewer.
If you click on another object in the graphic, that object becomes the secondary
selection. As a result, Property Viewer changes its display to correspond to the
new selection. System Browser, however, still displays the original, primary
selection to show your starting point.
Double-clicking another object on the graphic makes that object the new primary
selection in the Graphics Viewer and System Browser, while the object remains the
secondary selection in the Property Viewer.
3.6.17
Using the Depths Navigation View
 You have a graphic open in the Primary pane of the Graphics Viewer. You
want to view a specific depth associated with the graphic, and, optionally, filter
the view of the depth by its associated layers.
1. From the Graphics Viewer toolbar, select DepthsNavigation View
.
2. From the depth selection drop-down menu, select the depth you want to view.
 The graphic and the Navigation View display a list of <All> layers
associated with the depth.
3. Optional. Select the Discipline radial button, and from the drop-down menu
select a discipline, or select <All> to view all layers.
-
The graphic updates and only displays the layers associated with the
selected discipline.
-
The list of layers in the Navigation View is grayed-out, and only the layers
associated with the selected depth are check-marked.
4. Optional. Select the Layers radial button, and from the list of layers check-mark
each layer you want to include in the graphic view, or uncheck a layer to
remove it from view. As you make your selections the graphic view is
automatically updated.
 The graphic is updated to display the depth and layers as selected.
3.6.18
Working with the Aerial View
 You have a graphic open and would like to display the Aerial View on the
canvas.
1. From the Graphics Toolbar, click on the Aerial View icon
-
.
The Aerial View displays in the primary pane.
2. Within the Aerial View, do one of the following:
-
Click on a specific area – the graphic view is now adjusted so that the
clicked area is the center.
38
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Appendix
-
3
Click and drag the mouse - to draw a rectangle around the specific area of
the graphic you want to have the focus.
 The graphic is resized and refocused around the area you clicked or drew.
3.6.19
Zooming in the Graphics Viewer
A zoom factor of a graphic can be changed using one of the following methods
from the Graphics Viewer toolbar:
 You have a graphic open.

From the Graphics Viewer toolbar in the primary pane, you have the following
zoom options available to you:
-
Click Default View100%
to display the active graphic at 100%
magnification.
-
Click Scale to Fit
so that the entire graphic and all the objects on the
graphic are visible.
-
Click Zoom In (+20)
or Zoom Out (-20) to zoom in or out, accordingly,
by a factor of 20% with each click of the icon.
-
Click Zoom View
, and from the Zoom View pane, click and drag the
Zoom Slider to either increase or decrease magnification of the active
element(s).
3.7
-
Click Zoom
-
Click Zoom Real
to select from a list of pre-defined zoom factors.
to zoom in and out, using your mouse wheel.
Graphics Viewer Appendix
You can use a set of keyboard and mouse button-wheel shortcuts to view the
active graphic in the Graphics Viewer.
Before applying any of the shortcuts to a graphic, be sure the appropriate graphic
is active by clicking on it.
3.7.1
Keyboard Shortcuts
Below is a list of available keyboard shortcuts you can apply to the active graphic
or one of its children. A graphic is made active by clicking on the graphic in the
primary or secondary pane.
Press...
To …
CTRL+A
Select all elements
HOME
Scroll to the left
END
Scroll to the right
CTRL+HOME
Scroll to the top
CTRL+END
Scroll to the bottom
PAGE UP
Scroll up
PAGE DOWN
Scroll down
UP, LEFT, DOWN, RIGHT ARROWS
If not in panning mode: Move selected elements
39
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
3
Overview of Graphics Viewer
Graphics Viewer Appendix
by 1 pixel.
If in panning mode: Pan the view by 1 pixel.
If modifying a line/polyline node: Move the node
by 1 pixel.
3.7.2
CTRL+UP, CTRL+LEFT, CTRL+DOWN,
CTRL+RIGHT ARROWS
If not in panning mode: Move selected elements
by the grid pixels.
If in panning mode: Pan the view by the grid
pixels.
If modifying a line/polyline node: Move the node
by the grid pixels.
CTRL+0
Zoom = 100%
SPACEBAR
Activate quick panning mode. The previous tool
mode is restored when the key is released.
MINUS SIGN
Zoom out (-20%)
PLUS SIGN
Zoom In (+20%)
Z-key
Activates quick zoom mode (Insert Icon) and
changes the cursor to a magnifying glass and
allows you to draw a viewport directly on the
active graphic. The previous tool mode is restored
when the key is released.
F5
Refresh. All views are refreshed. All open
graphics are reloaded.
F12
Toggle the Aerial View On/Off
Mouse Functions
The following mouse functions are available in the active graphic once you have
activated Zoom mode, either by clicking one of the zoom buttons on the toolbar or
by pressing the Z-Key.
Click...
To …
CTRL+MOUSE WHEEL
Zoom in and out (+ or - 20%)
LEFT MOUSE BUTTON
Zoom in (+20%)
RIGHT MOUSE BUTTON
Zoom out (-20%)
40
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Library Browser
Library Browser (System Browser)
4
4 Overview of Graphics Library Browser
The Graphics Library Browser allows you toggle between a view that displays all
the available Symbols and Graphic Template objects in your project libraries.
Additionally, the Graphics Library Browser allows you to do the following:

Select from a thumbnail view or list view of all available Symbols or graphic
templates.

Move the pointer over the graphic object to view its associated Library name,
where it is stored, the graphic object’s name, and its dimensions.

Filter through project the graphic object by name. As text is entered into the
filter field, the relevant Symbol(s) or graphic template(s) display in the view’s
preview pane.

Sort available Symbols or graphic templates by Library from a filter drop-down
menu.

Drag-and-drop or single-click on a Symbol or graphic template to add it to the
active canvas. This creates an instance of the Symbol and template.

Double-click on a Symbol to add it to the active graphic
Select a graphic object to open, edit, or copy the references onto the clipboard.
Select multiple graphic objects to drag-and-drop onto a graphic or to open on in
the Work Area.



Replace or delete a Symbol or graphic template from the Library Browser view.

Copy the Symbol or graphic template reference information and paste the
information onto a property or expression field.
NOTE:
Deleting the Symbol or graphic template from the Graphics Library Browser only
deletes it from the Library Browser view in the Graphics Editor and does not
delete or remove it from the Library Browser in System Browser.
4.1
Library Browser (System Browser)
41
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
4
Overview of Graphics Library Browser
Library Browser (System Browser)
Library Browser View (Thumbnail View)
Item
Name
Description
1
Library Browser Toolbar
Menu
Allows you to do the following with the selected
Symbol.
Allows you to edit the Symbol. In the Graphics
Editor
Allows you to zoom-in on the Symbol
42
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Library Browser
Graphics Library BrowserTasks
4
Allows you to zoom-out of the Symbol.
2
Folder Name
Displays the name of the folder whose Symbols are
currently displayed in the Library Browser display
window. When you hover over the folder name with
your mouse, a tooltip displays the full path of the
folder.
3
Thumbnail\List View Toggle
Allows you to toggle between a thumbnail or List
view of the graphic objects in the Library Browser
pane.
4
Search Filter
Allows you to search the Symbol and Graphic
Templates libraries and limit the objects displayed.
5
Library Browser display
pane.
Displays available Symbols and graphic templates
depending on category or search criteria.
6
Graphic Icons
Thumbnails of available Symbol(s) or graphic
templates, depending on which mode you have
selected. The selected Symbol or Graphic Template
is highlighted.
7
4.2
4.2.1
Allows you to move the slider with your mouse to
increase and decrease the magnification of the
selected Symbol icon for viewing within the Symbol
Browser view. The magnification value displays as
you move the slider and has a minimum
magnification of 30% and a maximum of 300%.
The slider displays only when you have toggled to
the Thumbnail view.
Graphics Library BrowserTasks
Accessing the Library Browser
You can access the Library Browser by navigating to a Symbol or Graphic
Template folder in any of the Libraries folders.

Navigate to Management View > Project > Management View > System
Settings > Libraries, and then click on either the Symbols folder or the Graphics
Template folder.
 The Library Browser displays in the primary pane.
4.2.2
Creating a Symbol Folder in Your Library
 You want to add a Symbol folder, (a library block) to an existing library (library
object) in your project that does not already have a Symbol folder. Once you
add the folder, you can import Symbols into the folder.
1. Navigate to Management View > Project > System Settings > Libraries.
2. Navigate to and click on the library block where you want to add a Symbol
folder.
3. From the Library Configurator tab, click Add new object
, and then select
New Child of Type Library Object.
 The New library – GMS_Library_Object displays.
4. Complete the fields in the Library Configurator General settings section. You
must complete the Discipline, System, Type and Version fields.
43
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
4
Overview of Graphics Library Browser
Graphics Library BrowserTasks
5. Click the Save Data
icon.
6. The Save Object As dialog box displays.
-
From the drop-down list box, select the View you want to save the object
to.
-
In the Name field, type a name for the new node or keep it as is.
-
In the Description, type a description for the object or keep the text as is.
Click the flag icon, and repeat for the available languages. Click Ok when
you are done.
7. Click OK.
 The new child graphic node is created and displays in the designated library in
System Browser. You can now Import Symbols into the Symbol folder you just
created.
4.2.3
Creating a Symbol from the Library Browser
 You are in the Symbols Library Browser and want to create a new Symbol.
 System Manager is set to Engineering Mode.
1. From the Graphics toolbar, click the Edit button
 The Graphics Editor displays in the Primary pane.
2. From the Graphics toolbar, click Create New
, and select New Symbol.
 An untitled and tabbed Symbol template displays in the Graphics Editor
work area.
3. Draw, design, and assign evaluations and mappings to the Symbol as
necessary.
4. From the Graphics toolbar, click the Save
icon.
 The Save dialog box displays.
5. From the Project folder, navigate to the appropriate library and click on the
associated Symbols folder.
6. Enter a name in the Name field, and click Save.
 The Symbol is saved in the designated Symbols folder in two file formats: PNG
and .CCS. The Symbol can be previewed in the Graphics Library Browser.
4.2.4
Editing a Symbol from the Library Browser
You can initiate the editing of a Symbol or Graphic from the System Browser's
Library Browser.
1. From the Library Browser pane, click on the Symbol that you want to edit.
 The Symbol background color is now shaded in a light orange.
2. Right-click on the selected Symbol, and from the context menu, select Edit.
 The Graphics Editor is spawned, and the Symbol is displayed on the active
canvas.
3. Make your edits to the Symbol. When you are finished, from the toolbar menu
click on one of the following:
-
To save the Symbol with the same name and to the same location.
44
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Library Browser
Graphics Library BrowserTasks
-
4
To rename the Symbol and\or save it to another library location. The
Save As dialog box displays. Enter the new Name for your Symbol and
navigate to the new location for the Symbol, and then click Save.
4. From the Toolbar menu, select Home
, to return to the Library Browser.
45
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Modes
5 Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview
Graphics Editor is the component of the System Manager application used to
create and handle large graphics representing equipment, floors, buildings,
facilities, and entire campuses. These graphical representations can contain
dynamic elements to represent devices or values you want to monitor or control.
The Graphics Editor is accessible from the Graphics Viewer and from the Symbols
and Graphic Templates stored in the Graphics Library Browser. Graphics,
Symbols, and Graphic Templates are created in the Graphics Editor. The Function
Editor allows you to associate Symbols to data types and object-type properties.
The Graphics application loads and saves the proprietary Desigo CC CC XMLbased files, used to define the elements contained within a graphic which results in
a corresponding object being created by the graphics processor via a serialization
operation. The serialization process includes loading and parsing the xml file,
converting it into the appropriate object model suitable for the Graphic Engine to
configure, view, and save configuration details of graphics, views, and symbols.
Graphics Editor Features
The Graphics Editor allows you to perform the following:
5.1

Create, configure, edit, and manage dynamic color and animated graphics and
templates.

Store, organize, and compare all graphics, templates, and Symbols in a
Graphics Library Browser.

Associate multiple layers, depths, and graphic pages for in-depth detailed
views for monitoring and commanding purposes.

Navigate graphic layers and depths by using the zooming, panning, and
filtering controls

Import and edit .CCG, .CCS, .CCT, XPS, DWFX, and AutoCAD files

Create, customize, and associate BACnet FLN Device, or TEC graphics

Specify Access Rights for creating and editing graphics.
Graphics Editor Modes
Modes are a group of settings that provide different capabilities for designing and
testing graphics. The Graphics Editor provides three mutually exclusive modes—
Design, Test, and Runtime that allow you to design, edit, and test a graphic.
You can test a graphic with simulated values by using the Value Simulator. Or, you
can use a fourth mode, Online mode, in conjunction with Test and Runtime modes,
which allows you to access all your actual data point values for real time testing.
Design Mode
Allows you to design and edit graphics, where all static design values apply.
Test Mode
Allows you to design and edit graphics, and test simulated values using the Value
Simulator. If Online mode is also enabled, you can access and test all your data
point values from an actual online environment.
46
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Views and the Dock Panel
5
Runtime Mode
Allows you to select and command elements. Design and editing capabilities are
disabled. If Online mode is also enabled, you can access and test all your data
point values from an actual online environment.
Online Mode
If enabled, displays real time data point values from an actual online environment.
This mode is used in conjunction with Test and Runtime modes.
5.2
Overview of Views and the Dock Panel
Views are mini-windows with specific functionality that allow you to display, create,
test, or edit elements, graphics, and Symbols. Views, when selected from the
ribbon, are displayed within the dock panel; a frame below the ribbon, that hosts
the views and allows you to choose where and how a view displays.
A view can be docked into a specific position, you can click-and-drag the view and
place it anywhere in the Graphics Editor, or you can snap it into five different
locations around the inner perimeter of the Graphics Editor.
List of Views
The Graphics Editor includes the following views:










Aerial
Brush Editor
Depths
Element Tree
Evaluation Editor
Find and Replace
Library Browser
Properties
Status Bar
Value Simulator
For more information, see Display Views Group [ ➙ 59].
Hiding, Restoring, and Closing Views
You can hide a view to conceal its content and create more space for other views,
and then use the Thumbnail icon
to reveal content when you need it. You can
also close a view by clicking the Close icon
. When you close a view, you
remove it from the dock panel. To return the view to the dock panel, you re-select it
from the ribbon’s Display Views group on the View tab.
Moving, Docking, Saving, and Resetting Views
You can customize your workspace by moving views from one area of the dock
panel to another. When you click and drag a view, as you move the view around
the dock panel a series of position anchors display and if you hover over one of the
positions a blue shaded area indicates where the view would dock and display
upon releasing the mouse button. If you like the current layout of your views in the
dock panel, you can save the current workspace definition, and reset both the
current and factory workspaces through the ribbon’s Layout group command on
the Options tab.
47
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
Floating Views
You can drag views to other locations of your monitor(s) so that they float
separately from the Graphics Editor snap-in and th application panes. This is
especially useful if you use two monitors since you can then expand the floating
view to accommodate more information and eliminate excessive scrolling. Floating
a view also frees up real estate for the remaining views in the main window.
NOTE: You can float a view on an installed client; however, the Web Server and
Remote Server clients do not support floating windows.
5.3
Graphics Editor Workspace
The Graphics Editor window consists of a tabbed ribbon, a quick access toolbar, a
status bar, multiple views for both viewing information and completing specific
tasks, and a work area that contains tabbed drawing board panes that house the
canvas upon which graphics are drawn and edited. Additional tools and
components available in the Graphics Editor include right-mouse click context
menus, vertical and horizontal scroll bars, navigational tools, and keyboard
shortcuts.
Graphics Editor User Interface
Item
Description
1
Status Toolbar
48
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
2
Dock Panel with Views
3
Graphics Editor Engineering toolbar
5
NOTE: In Operation mode the Graphics Viewer toolbar displays.
5.3.1
4
Quick Access Toolbar
5
Ribbon
6
Work area
Scrollbars
The Graphics Editors displays the vertical and horizontal scrollbars when the
graphic or Symbol is larger than the canvas area. The Scrollbars are visible in all
modes. The scrollbars allow you to navigate left or right, up or down in the current
drawing board.
5.3.2
Graphics Editor Toolbar
Graphics Viewer Toolbar Engineering Mode
Icon
Name
Description
Edit Graphics
Toggle between the Graphics
Editor and the Graphics Viewer.
Create New
Display a context menu that
allows you either create a new
graphic or create a new folder.
Save
Open the Save As dialog box
that allows you to save and
close the active graphic.
Save As
Open a Save As dialog box that
allows you to type a file name for
the graphic and then to save the
active graphic as a XAML file.
Delete Graphics
Delete graphics and graphic
folders. The selection deleted is
always listed in the primary
selection shown in the Graphics
Viewer.
Zoom In (+20%)
Zoom in by + 20% on the active
graphic with each mouse click.
Zoom Out (-20%)
Zoom out by - 20% on the active
graphic with each mouse click.
100%
Display the active graphic at
100% magnification.
Zoom
Select a pre-defined zoom level.
Scale to Fit
Scale the graphic in the
workspace of the Graphics
Editor.
Point Centered Display Mode
Move the selected point to the
center of the graphic.
Page Setup
Display the Page Setup view for
the current graphic.
Print
Display the Print dialog to print
the current graphic displayed in
the Graphics Editor.
49
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5.3.3
Ribbon
A ribbon is a command bar that provides you with three tabs—Home, View, and
Options—that enable you to customize your workspace, and create, edit, and
format your graphic images.
Along the ribbon, you will find the File menu button, and then the ribbon tabs and
groups. In the example below, the customizable Quick Access toolbar is above the
ribbon, but, can also be displayed below the ribbon.
Ribbon
5.3.4
Item
Name
Description
1
Tabs and Groups
Tabbed menu bar that enables you to customize your
workspace, and create, edit, and format your graphic
images. The three tabs include the Home, View, and
Options.
Each tab includes a series of selectable task buttons
organized into groups.
2
File Menu
Lists a number of frequently used tasks having to do
with creating new graphics or Symbols, saving, printing,
troubleshooting, and converting AutoCAD files.
3
Quick Access Toolbar
A customizable menu that allows you quick access to
any tasks that have been added to the menu.
Work Area
Every time you open or create a new graphic, Graphic Template, or Symbol in the
Graphics Editor, a new untitled tabbed pane, housing the drawing board which
contains the graphic or blank canvas, is added in the work area. The work area of
the Graphics Editor is where the open graphics are tabbed, displayed, and edited.
The canvas is the white space where elements and graphic objects are placed,
drawn, and edited and the outside perimeter around the canvas is the drawing
board the canvas resides on. Any elements or objects placed outside the canvas
on the drawing board are not displayed in the Graphics Viewer.
5.3.5
File Menu
The following commands are available from the File menu.
File Menu
50
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
Menu Item
New Graphic
New Symbol
New Graphic
5
Description
Add a new blank tabbed graphic canvas in the work area.
Add a new blank tabbed Symbol canvas in the work area.
Add a new blank tabbed graphic canvas template in the work area.
Template
Open
Close
Open the Save dialog box to save and close the active graphic.
Close All
Open the Save dialog box to save and close the active graphic. The
Save As dialog box re-launches until all the open graphics are
closed.
Save
Open the Save dialog box the first time you save a graphic. After
the initial Save, the graphic is automatically saved and the Save
dialog box does not display.
Save All
Open a File dialog box to select a file name to save the active
graphic as a XAML file. The File dialog box is re-launched until all
graphics have been saved or closed
Save As
Open a Save As dialog box to select a file name to save the active
graphic as a XAML file
Page Setup
Preview
Print
5.3.6
Open the Open dialog box to browse to select a XAML file that
opens a new tab in the work area.
Open the Page Setup view to set your printing parameters.
Open the Print Preview pane and display the current document as it
will print.
Open the Print dialog box to print your current document.
About
Display the current version number of the Graphics Editor.
Update graphics
When selected, the Consistency Checker program displays and
runs the File Conversion task to check and resolve dependency
issues after having upgraded Symbols (from a custom library) from
the old format to the new format .
Consistency
Checker
Open the Inconsistency Checker pane to view and troubleshoot any
inconsistencies in the open graphics related to invalid references to
either a missing data point or a missing graphic file.
Home Tab
The Home tab allows you to select tasks and commands associated with formatting
and editing elements on a canvas. You can also switch between Design, Test,
Runtime, and Online modes to view your graphics in different mode.
The Home tab contains the following groups:





Edit Group [ ➙ 52]
Elements Group [ ➙ 52]
Viewports Group [ ➙ 53]
Selection Group [ ➙ 54]
Brushes Group [ ➙ 55]
51
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5.3.6.1

Format Group [ ➙ 56]


Stroke Group [ ➙ 57]
Zoom Group [ ➙ 57]

Printing Group [ ➙ 58]

Modes Group [ ➙ 58]
Edit Group
The Edit group options allow you to work within the active canvas to cut, copy,
paste, and format graphic elements, as well as undo, redo, and repeat actions on
the canvas
Edit Group
Icon
5.3.6.2
Name
Description
Paste
Insert the clipboard contents onto the active
canvas.
Cut
Remove the selection from the active canvas and
put it on the clipboard.
Copy
Copy the selection to the Clipboard.
Copy XML
Copy the selected element as an XML string for
the clipboard.
Copy Format
Copy property formatting to an element on the
active canvas.
Paste Format
Apply property formatting to an element on the
active canvas.
Delete
Remove the selection from the active canvas.
Undo
Undo an action from a list of the most recent
actions.
Redo
Redo an action from a list of the most recent
actions.
Repeat
Repeat the last action performed.
Elements Group
The Elements group options allows you to create and work with graphic elements
on the canvas, as well as insert images, animation objects, XAML files, and
AutoCAD files.
52
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5
Elements Group
Icon
5.3.6.3
Name
Description
Select Objects
View when the select objects cursor mode is
active. When the select objects cursor mode is
active, the button background color is yellow.
Freeze
Draw a selected element repeatedly without
having to reselect the element. The Freeze
command can be selected directly, or each time
you click on the same element consecutively, the
Freeze command for that element is toggled on
and off.
Text
Create a text block on the canvas.
Rectangle
Create rectangles and squares.
Ellipse
Create ellipses, arcs, and pie shapes.
Line
Create a geometric line between two distinct
points.
Path
Create a series of line segments and curves.
Polygon
Create a polygon.
Animation
Insert a configurable animation object on the
canvas.
Import Image File
Navigate to and insert a image, for example,
.BMP, .GIF, .JPG, TIF.
Import AutoCAD
and XML Image
Files
Navigate to and insert XAML, XPS, and convert
AutoCAD files using the AutoCAD Importer.
Viewports Group
Paging Group
The Paging Group options allow you to enable the Manual Page mode and draw a
manual page on the active graphic.
Viewports Group
Icon
Name
Description
53
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5.3.6.4
Viewport Mode
Enable the Manual Viewport mode. All existing
viewports in the active graphic display and the Manual
Viewport Mode icon is active.
Manual Page
Manually draw a graphic viewport on the active canvas.
Selection Group
The Selection Group options allow you to arrange, group, combine, and align
elements on the canvas.
The following options are available from the Selections Group:

Order

Group

Combine
Alignment

Selection Group
Order Options
The Order options allow you to arrange overlapping graphical elements in a stacking order.
Icon
Name
Description
Bring to Front
Move the graphical element to the front of the
stack.
Send to Back
Move the graphical element to the back of the
stack.
Bring Forward
Move the graphical element forward one level in
the stacking order.
Send Backward
Move the graphical element backward one level
in the stacking order.
Group Options
The Group options allow you to combine multiple graphic elements into groups or separate
individual graphic elements from groups.
Icon
Name
Description
Group
Combine multiple graphic elements into a group
so that when one element is repositioned, all the
other elements move with it.
Ungroup
Separate individual graphic elements from a
group so that they can be repositioned
independently.
Join Group
Add one or more graphic elements to an existing
group.
Leave Group
Remove one or more graphic elements from a
group.
Combine Options
The Combine options allow you to combine or exclude areas of overlapping graphical
54
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5
shapes.
Icon
Name
Description
Union
Combine all parts of two elements into one path
element.
Intersection
Create a new path element shaped by the
overlapping portions of two elements.
Exclude Overlap
Combine two elements to create a new path
element. Any overlapping portions are excluded.
The excluded portion is transparent.
Subtraction
Create a new path element that is based on the
first selected element minus the overlapping
portions of the two elements and the second
selected element.
Alignment Options
The Alignment options allow you to set the placement of multiple elements on the canvas.
Icon
5.3.6.5
Name
Description
Left
Align the selected elements with the left edge of
the element farthest to the left.
Center
Align the selected elements along a vertical plane
based on the average distance between the
element farthest to the left and the element
farthest to the right among all the selected
elements.
Right
Align the selected elements with the right edge of
the element farthest to the right.
Top
Align the selected elements with the top edge of
the element farthest to the top.
Middle
Align the selected elements along a horizontal
plane based on the average distance between
the element farthest to the top and the element
farthest to the bottom among the selected
elements.
Bottom
Align the selected elements with the bottom edge
of the element farthest to the bottom.
Horizontal
Space the elements evenly along a horizontal
plane (the x-axis).
Vertical
Space the elements evenly along a vertical plane
(the y-axis).
Align Wrapped
Align the selected elements on the canvas in a
row from left to right and the rows from top to
bottom.
When you drag-and-drop multiple elements onto
the canvas, they are by default Align wrapped.
Snap Now
Snap the top-left corner (or anchor) of an element
(or Symbol) to the nearest grid intersection.
Brushes Group
The Brushes Group allows you to select a color from the drop-down menu for the
fill, stroke, and background colors of the currently selected element on the canvas.
55
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
Brushes Group
Icon
5.3.6.6
Name
Description
Fill
Set the color apply to the Fill (interior) property of the
selected element(s).
Stroke
Set the color that is applied to the Stroke property or the
font color of the selected element(s).
Background
Set the color that is applied to the Background property
of the selected element on the canvas.
Format Group
The Format Group options allow you to adjust the font styles and formatting of
textual graphic elements.
Format Group
Icon
Name
Description
Font Family
Allows you to select a font type from the drop-down
menu.
Font Size
Allows you to specify a font size from the drop-down
menu.
Increase Font Size
Allows you to increase the font size to a pre-determined
default.
Decrease Font Size
Allows you to decrease the font size to a predetermined default.
Horizontal Text
Alignment
Allows you to set the horizontal position of the text
contained within the element’s bounding rectangle.
Choose from: Right, Center, Left, and Justify.
Vertical Text
Alignment
Allows you to set the vertical position of the text
contained within the element’s bounding rectangle.
Choose from: Top, Center, and Bottom.
Bold
Allows you to apply bold formatting to the selected text.
Italic
Allows you to apply italic formatting to the selected text.
Underline
Allows you to apply underline formatting to the selected
text.
Strikethrough
Allows you to apply strikethrough formatting to the
selected text.
Resize Fonts
Allows you to toggle between enabling the Font Size
property of an active element to automatically update
according to any resizing done on the canvas. If
inactive, the font size of the selected element remains
as initially set in the Property View.
56
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5.3.6.7
5
Stroke Group
The Stroke group options allow you to format an element’s outline by choosing
options from a set of stroke-related drop-down menus. You can select the overall
type and thickness of the stroke; and you can choose a flat, round, square, or
triangle for the starting and ending edge of line of figure. If the active element has
unconnected lines you have the option of setting the end caps for each segment.
Stroke Group
Icon
Name
Description
Stroke Dash Array
Select the stroke type from the drop-down menu.
Stroke Thickness
Select the stroke thickness from the drop-down
menu. The thickness is measured in pixels.
Stroke Start Line
Set how the start edge of the stroke line is drawn.
Options are flat, round, square or triangle edge.
Stroke End Line
Set how the start edge of the stroke line is drawn.
Options are flat, round, square or triangle edge.
Stroke Line Join
Set how the corners are drawn. Options are
pointed, flat, or rounded corners
Stroke Dash Cap
Select a style for the end if the line
.
5.3.6.8
Zoom Group
The Zoom group options allow you to pan, or zoom in or out of a graphic image.
Zoom Group
Icon
Name
Description
57
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5.3.6.9
Zoom Indicator
Display the current scale factor of the active
canvas and allows you to either select a predefined magnification from the drop-down menu
or type a magnification value.
100% button
Display the active graphic at 100% magnification
when the button is clicked on.
Fit Size
Scale the graphic so that all the elements and
contents on the canvas are visible
Free Zoom
Draw a zoom rectangle directly on the canvas.
Repeat as needed.
Tip: You can use the Z-Key for a quick zoom.
Pan
Move the graphics viewing area up, down, or
sideways to display other areas which, at the
current viewing zoom factor, lie outside the
viewing area.
Zoom Slider
Zoom in on the active canvas by adjusting the
slider.
Printing Group
Printing Group
Icon
5.3.6.10
Name
Description
Page Setup
Open and display the print Page Setup view.
Preview
Open the Print Preview pane and displays the
currently selected graphic.
Print
Display the Print dialog box to print the current
graphic\document.
Modes Group
Modes Group
The Modes group options allow you to toggle between Design, Test, or Runtime
mode.
Modes Group
Icon
Name
Description
58
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5.3.7
5
Design
Design and edit graphics and apply static values
only.
Test
Design, edit graphics and simulate data point
values. You can use online subscriptions if the
Online Mode is enabled, or you can use
subscriptions from the Value Simulator.
Runtime
Test a graphic to see how it will display in the
Graphics Viewer, by simulating data point values
using online subscriptions, if the Online mode is
enabled, or using subscriptions from the Value
Simulator. Runtime mode does not allow you to
design or editing a graphic.
Online
Allows you to subscribe to COVs in an actual
online environment. If disabled, data point values
can be simulated with the Value Simulator.
View Tab
The View tab allows you to make selections that determine which views to display,
and how the grid and guidelines are displayed on the canvas, as well as how to
display units, and layers in the active graphic.
The View tab contains the following groups:

Display Views

View
Workspace

5.3.7.1
Display Views Group
Display Views Group
The Displayed Views group option allows you to select which views to display or
hide in the dock panel.
Display Views Group
Name
Description
Aerial View
Show or remove the Aerial View from the workspace.
Brush Editor
Show or remove the Brush Editor from the workspace.
Element Tree
Show or remove the Element Tree the workspace.
Value Simulator
Show or remove the Value Simulator View from the
59
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
workspace.
5.3.7.2
Depths
Show or remove the Depths View from the workspace.
Properties
Show or remove the Property View from the workspace.
Evaluation Editor
Show or remove the Evaluation Editor from the workspace.
Library Browser
Show or remove the Library Browser from the workspace.
Find and Replace
Show or remove the Find and Replace view from the
workspace.
Status Bar
Show or remove the Status Bar at the bottom of the
workspace.
View Group
View Group
The View Group options allow you to view logical or physical units of properties
placed on the canvas, enable layer visibility range, so that if you zoom in or out, the
visible layers will depend on the current zoom factor.
View Group
Icon
5.3.7.3
Name
Description
Show Logical Units
Toggle between displaying the logical or physical units
of a property
Disable Layer Visibility Range
Toggle between enabling and disabling the layer
visibility range in the active graphic.
Workspace Group
Grid and Guidelines Group
The Workspace group options allow you to hide or display grids and guidelines, as
well as attach graphic elements to guidelines.
Workspace Group
Name
Description
Snap
Attach elements to the nearest guideline to make it easier to
create an accurate graphic.
Display Grid
Display or hide a pattern of equally spaced horizontal and vertical
lines on a graphic to help you align elements symmetrically and
precisely.
Display Guidelines
Display or hide horizontal or vertical guidelines lines dragged onto
60
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5
a graphic to help you align elements symmetrically and precisely.
5.3.8
Options Tab
Options Tab
The Options tab provides you with special editing and layout options. The Bitmap
Transparency group allows you to create transparent bitmap files.
5.3.8.1
Bitmap Transparency Group
The Bitmap Transparency group allows you edit a bitmap image by enabling the
bitmap transparency feature.
Bitmap Transparency Group
5.3.8.2
Name
Description
Enable
Enable or disable the Transparency Color feature
for editing a bitmap image.
Color Field
Set the Transparent Color by entering a
hexadecimal color code or the name of a color, or
selecting a color from the Brush Editor view.
Layout Group
Layout Group
The Layout group options allow you to customize the views and dock panel
settings or restore them back to the original configuration. The configuration you
choose becomes active when you re-enter the application.
61
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
Layout Group
Icon
5.3.8.3
Name
Description
Save as Default
Save your current dock panel layout and any user
settings or preferences selected in each of the Views as
your default settings.
Restore Default
Restore the configuration to the original default settings.
Control Group
Control Group
The Control group options allow you to work with locked elements on the canvas
and refresh any open views.
Printing Group
Icon
5.3.8.4
Name
Description
Break Lock
Select a locked element on the canvas with the
rubberband or keyboard function. This allows you
to temporarily work with locked elements in
Design mode.
Refresh
Reload all open views. Any unsaved settings will
be lost.
Symbol Options
The options in the Symbol Options group provide tasks to use in conjunction with
Symbols that will be added to the active graphic.
Symbol Options Group
Icon
Name
Description
Symbol Style Filter
This option allows you to select a Style to apply to the
ensuing Symbol(s) you insert onto the active canvas.
You can also apply the filter to selected Symbols
already on the canvas.
62
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5
Selecting a Style from the drop-down menu, displays
the default Symbol associated with that Style depending
on the data point and Function the Symbol is
associated with.
The default option Any, displays the default Symbol
associated with the Style group None. Also, if a default
Symbol does not exist for the selected Style, then the
default None Symbol is displayed..
Used in conjunction with the Replace Symbol Instances
option off of the Graphics context menu, this feature
allows you to display associated Symbols from the
Function or/and the Object Model.
Function Filter
Cleared = Display assigned Function Symbols (if
available; assigned Object Model Symbols are
displayed in the event that no Function Symbols exist).
Checked = Display the associated Symbols from both
Function and Object Model.
5.3.9
Quick Access Toolbar
The customizable Quick Access toolbar allows you to store shortcuts for tasks and
features you need quick access to. You can select where to position the toolbar,
and from the Quick Access toolbar, you can also minimize and maximize the
ribbon.
The Quick Access Toolbar context menu allows you to move the mouse over the
ribbon command buttons to add a task to the Quick Access toolbar or to mouseover command buttons on the Quick Access toolbar to remove tasks. Depending
on your settings, the Quick Access toolbar is located above or below the ribbon.
5.3.10
Views
Views are mini-windows with specific functionality that allow you to display, create,
test, or edit elements, graphics, and Symbols. The table below provides a
description of each view in the Graphics Editor.
View
Description
Aerial View
View the entire drawing area and active graphic at all times, while giving
you the ability to zoom in on a specific area of the graphic.
Brush Editor
Modify your drawing elements with options such as colors, gradients, light
angles, and other special effects to achieve a truly custom look.
Depths
Create, delete, rename, and change the properties of a depth, view a list of
depths and layers and move them up or down the list to order them,
associate depths to layers and display the size and Symbol scale factor.
Element Tree
Display, add, and delete layers associated with the active graphic or
63
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
Symbol. All the drawing elements associated with the layers are also
displayed in the Element Tree View. Elements within a layer can be ordered
using the positioning arrows at the bottom of the View. Within the Element
Tree you can also decide which layers, depths, or elements to display in
Runtime or Design mode.
Evaluation Editor
Set and edit element properties of the active graphic or Symbol.
Find and Replace
Customize a search and replace (optional) for specific text, strings, values,
and properties in all open graphics or all the graphics in your project.
Properties
View, set, and edit the properties of the selected element(s) on the canvas.
Library Browser
Preview, sort, select, and edit existing Symbols and their names. You can
also resize a Symbol within the Library Browser.
Comparison Browser
Open another instance of the Library Browser to compare Symbols and
graphic Templates from other libraries.
Value Simulator
Select, view, and adjust the settings for simulating property values to test
how configured graphic settings will be applied in Runtime mode.
Status Bar
5.3.10.1
View Menu Bar
The following menu bar displays at the top of all views.
Views Menu Bar
Item
Name
Description
1
Window Position Menu
Click on the icon to choose from the following
options from the windows position menu:
 Floating: Udock the view, and then click and
drag anywhere on your workspace.
 Dockable: Click, drag, and snap a view to
one of five (right, left, top, bottom, and
center) set anchor locations in the workspace
to dock the panel.
 Auto-Hide: Hide the views dock panel from
your workspace. Click on the Views text
button to slide the Views panel back into
view. This option is only available when the
panel is docked.
 Hide: Close the view during your current
Graphics Editor session. When you close out
of a session, and then return to start a new
session, the view will redisplay in the docking
panel.
2
Auto-Hide
Hide the views the entire dock panel from your
workspace. Click on the views text button to slide
the Views panel back into view. This option is
64
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
5
only available when the panel is docked.
3
Close
Close the View and remove it from the docking
panel.
See also

5.3.10.2
Aerial View [➙ 93]
Library Browser View
Depending on which view you are in, Symbols or graphic templates, the Library
Browser view provides you with a thumbnail preview of the available graphic
objects.
Library Browser View (Thumbnail View)
Item
Name
Description
1
Library Browser display pane.
Display available Symbols and graphic
templates depending on category or search
criteria.
2
Filter by Library
Display all the Symbols or graphic templates in
your project libraries or just display the graphic
objects from the library selected in the dropdown menu.
3
Symbols\Graphic Templates
Toggle
Switch between displaying and viewing
Symbols
or graphic template
library
objects in the view.
4
Thumbnail\List View Toggle
Toggle between a thumbnail or List view of the
graphic objects in the Library Browser pane.
5
Search Filter
Search the Symbol and Graphic Templates
65
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Workspace
libraries and limit the objects displayed.
6
Graphic Icons
Display thumbnails of available Symbol(s) or
graphic templates, depending on which mode
you have selected.
7
Move the slider with your mouse to increase
and decrease the magnification of the selected
Symbol icon for viewing within the Symbol
Browser view. The magnification value displays
as you move the slider and has a minimum
magnification of 30% and a maximum of 300%.
The slider displays only when you have toggled
to the Symbol Thumbnail view.
In the Library Browser’s List view, the Symbols and graphic templates are listed by
Name, Library, and File. A thumbnail preview is not displayed.
Library Browser View (List View Fields)
5.3.10.3
Name
Description
Name
Display the Symbol or graphic template file names.
Library
Display the library name where the Symbol or graphic
template is stored.
File
Display the full path of the Symbol or graphic template’s
location.
Status Toolbar
The status toolbar, when enabled, is located at the bottom of the Graphics Editor
screen. The status toolbar displays current information about the version of the
Graphics Editor being used, the position of the mouse, and the name of the object
on the graphic canvas that is active and has the focus.
Status Bar
Item
Description
1
Graphics Editor Version - Displays the current Graphics Editor version.
1b
Error Message Display – Displays error message related to actions in the
view.
2
Mouse Position - Displays the current mouse position
66
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Workspace Configuration
5.3.11
Open Dialog Box
Item
5.4
5.4.1
5
Name
Description
1
Project List
Displays an expandable list of all the libraries related to
the project.
2
Library Content
Displays a list of all the graphics in the selected folder.
3
Splitter
Allows you to Show or Hide the preview pane and change
its size.
4
Preview Pane
Displays a thumbnail view of the selected graphic in the
folder.
5
Name
Displays name of the graphic
6
Open
Click to open the graphic
7
Cancel
Click to close the dialog box.
Workspace Configuration
Saving the Layout Configuration
 You have adjusted the dock panel layout and the views with the default settings
you want displayed when the Graphics Editor opens.

On the Options tab, in the Layout group, click
.
 The current dock panel layout configuration and view settings are saved as
your default layout settings.
67
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Workspace Configuration
5.4.2
Restoring the Default Layout Configuration
You can restore the Graphics Editor dock panel layout to the last saved default
layout.

On the Options tab, from the Layout group, click Restore Default
.
 The dock panel layout and vews settings are restored to the last saved default
configuration.
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
Working with Modes
Changing Modes
1. On the Home tab, select the Modes group.
2. Select the mode you want to switch to.
 The Graphics Editor now switches the mode you are in.
5.4.4
5.4.4.1
Working with the Ribbon
Adding and Removing Items to the Quick Access Toolbar
You can add and remove ribbon task button commands from the Quick Access
toolbar by using the Quick Access Context menu:
 To Add a Command to the Quick Access toolbar – Right-click on the Ribbon
button command you want to add to the Quick Access toolbar, and select Add
to Quick Access Toolbar. The button command is added to the Quick Access
toolbar.

5.4.4.2
To Remove a Button from the Quick Access Toolbar - Right-click on the button
command on the Quick Access toolbar you want to remove. The button
command is removed from the Quick Access toolbar.
Minimizing the Ribbon
You can minimize the ribbon, so that only the tab names display and not the
associated task groups. When working with the minimized Ribbon, once you have
navigated to a task and it has been selected, the ribbon minimizes again.
1. Navigate to the Quick Access Toolbar.
2. Click the drop-down arrow
.
 The Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu displays.
3. Select Minimize the Ribbon.
 A check mark displays to let you know this option is enabled, and the ribbon is
minimized, so that only the tab names display. If you want to disable this
feature, simply click on the option again. The check mark no longer displays,
and the entire ribbon area is visible.
68
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Workspace Configuration
5.4.4.3
5
Positioning the Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access toolbar can be positioned to display above or below the ribbon.
If the toolbar is currently displayed above the ribbon, you can choose to display it
below the ribbon. Conversely, if the toolbar is currently below the ribbon, you can
choose to display it above the ribbon.
NOTE: The Customize Quick Access toolbar menu is also available when you
right-click anywhere on the Ribbon.
1. Navigate to the Quick Access Toolbar.
2. Click the drop-down arrow
.
 The Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu displays.
3. Select the one of the following options:
-
Show Below the Ribbon, to display the toolbar below the ribbon.
-
Show Above the Ribbon, to display the toolbar above the ribbon.
 The Quick Access Toolbar displays as selected.
5.4.5
Working with the Views and the Dock Panel
The dock panel is the area below the Ribbon that allows you to display and
configure how to display your working views in the Graphics Editor.
5.4.5.1
Displaying and Closing Views
You can decide which views to display in the dock panel frame of the Graphics
Editor.
1. On the View tab, in the Display Views group, check the checkbox next to the
views you want open in the dock panel. If a view checkbox is not selected, it
will not display in the dock panel.
 The selected views display in the dock panel frame.
 NOTE: By default, the Find and Replace view is set to float and does not
automatically dock when checked.
2. To close a view, click on the
Close icon.
 The view is removed from the dock panel frame and unchecked in the Display
Views group.
5.4.5.2
Docking a View
All views displayed in the dock panel are by default set to Dockable. This means
you can click, drag, and reposition a view. When you move the view around the
dock panel, available docking anchors display, allowing you to determine where to
dock your view.
NOTE:
The Find and Replace view and the Page Setup pane are not dockable by
default.
69
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Workspace Configuration
 The view is displayed in the dock panel below the ribbon.
1. If the view is not already in the dockable state, right-click on the view’s title bar
and from the context menu, select Dockable.
2. Click on the title bar of the view panel and start to drag the panel.
 When you drag the view panel, the available position anchors display.
3. Hover over the anchor position where you want to display the view panel.
-
A blue-shaded area displays showing you the target position for that
position anchor.
4. Release the mouse button when you have found the appropriate position.
 The view panel docks itself to position of the anchor.
 Example below, docking position anchors are active while moving the view
panels around the docking panel. The blue-shaded area represents the target
position of the current anchor.
5.4.5.3
Floating a View
A view can be set to float, which means you can click and drag the view panel to
any position on your monitor(s) without being confined to the perimeters of the
Graphics Editor.
NOTE: You can float a view on an installed client, however, the Web Server and
Remote Server clients do not support floating windows.
 The view is displayed in the docking panel.
70
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Custom Library Updates after an Upgrade Installation
5
1. Right-click on the title bar of the views and from the context menu, select
Floating.
 The views panel undocks itself from the docking panel.
2. Click on the title bar of the view and drag it to the desired location on your
monitor’s screen.
5.4.5.4
Auto-Hiding Views
You can use the auto-hide feature to slide a view in and out of sight. This allows
more space in the dock panel for the view(s) you are actively working in.
 The view is displayed in the dock panel below the ribbon.
1. From the view title bar, select the Auto-hide
icon.
 The view slides into the nearest edge of the Graphics Editor and displays a
tab with the view’s name.
2. When you want to display the hidden view, hover over the view’s tab with your
mouse.
 The view is fully visible in the dock panel and the auto-hide icon is in the
enabled position
. When you move the mouse outside of the view area,
the view slides back into the auto-hide position.
3. To undo the auto-hide feature, so that the view is always visible in the dock
panel, click on the Auto-Hide (enabled) icon
.
 The view is now docked in the dock panel, the auto-hide is disabled, and the
Auto-Hide (disabled) icon
5.5
displays.
Custom Library Updates after an Upgrade
Installation
If you are upgrading from Desigo CC 1.1 to Desigo CC 2.0, you must convert your
Symbols from any custom libraries in your project, to a newer and more efficient file
format. Symbols from the HQ libraries are automatically upgraded and converted
during the upgrade installation, however, any custom library Symbols in your
project must be converted manually after the upgrade.
Conversion of the Symbols to the new file format is multi-step process that involves
updating the Symbols, updating internal dependencies, manually changing hardcoded Symbol object references, and then updating any graphics with
dependencies to the updated Symbols. The three-step process is mostly executed
from the Graphics Editor Consistency Checker:
1. Run the Consistency Checker File Conversion task to check and update
all your custom libraries containing Symbols, Sample Graphics, and Template
Graphics. See Updating Custom Symbols from a Custom Library [ ➙72]
2. Run the Update Symbol Dependency task on the custom library to make
sure that the internal dependencies between the custom Symbols are up-todate. Make sure that the paths to the Symbols, graphic templates, and sample
graphics point to the custom library. See Updating Custom Symbols from a
Custom Library [➙ 72]
3. If you have any Graphic Templates that have hard-coded object references to
data points, you have to manually update the object references to reflect the
71
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Custom Library Updates after an Upgrade Installation
new syntax introduced with Desigo CC 2.0. See table of Syntax differences
below. For instructions on updating the object reference syntax in your Symbol
Instances and your Graphic Templates, see Manually Updating 1.1 Symbol
References to 2.0 Symbol References [ ➙ 74].
4. Once you have converted the old Symbols in your custom libraries to the new
file format, you must then update your graphics to resolve any dependencies
they may have with the old Symbols. If you do not update your graphics, the
object references will be work and your graphics will not work properly. See
Updating Graphics with Updated Symbols [ ➙75]
Object Reference Syntax Changes from Desigo CC 1.1 to Desigo CC
2.0
5.5.1
Old Syntax
Desigo CC 1.1 Example
"::" replaced with ";"
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode::
"!!" replaced with
"@"
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode::.!! CM
Desigo CC 2.0 Example
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyN
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode::.Prese ode;
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyN
nt_Value
ode;.Present_Value
D
In this example, CMD represents a
command.
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyN
ode;@CMD
Updating Custom Symbols from a Custom Library
 You have upgraded from Desigo CC 1.0 or 1.1 to Desigo CC 2.0 and have
custom libraries containing Symbols, Sample Graphics, and\or Template
Graphics.
1. From the File menu, click Consistency Checker.
 The Consistency Checker displays.
2. Click
to refresh the Tasks pane.
 The Tasks windows is updated and displays a list of available tasks to run.
3. Make sure the File Conversion task is the only task checked. It is imperative
that you only run one task at a time. Therefore, all other tasks should be
unchecked.
4. Select the File conversion task in the Tasks pane, and then click
in the
upper right-hand corner of the Consistency Checker pane.
 The Properties of Task: File conversion pane displays on the right,
revealing all the properties of the selected task.
5. Highlight and right-click on Path Graphics. From the context menu, click Delete.
 The Path Graphics property is deleted and will not run when the Update
Symbol Dependencies task is executed.
6. Highlight the Path Symbols key, and in the path field below, type the name of
custom library location.
-
When entering the name for you custom library, you can use the relative
folder name: libraries\PROJ_MyLibrary_Project_0\*.css or the
actual folder name:
C:\GMSProjects\MyProject\PROJ_MyLibrary_Project_0\Symbo
ls\*.ccs
72
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Custom Library Updates after an Upgrade Installation
7. After you have entered the Path Symbols library name, click
5
to apply the
changes. Repeat for each path you need to update.
8. Highlight the Force Conversion property, type True in the Value field, and then
press ENTER on the keyboard.
9. The following defaults are kept:
-
Conversion Method - ToBin
-
Verify - False
10. Checkmark the AutoFix checkbox.
11. Click the Check button to run the file conversion.
 The File Conversion task runs.
12. You are now ready to update your custom library Symbol dependencies,
please refer to: Updating Symbol Dependencies [ ➙73]
5.5.2
Updating Symbol Dependencies
 You have upgraded from Desigo CC 1.0 or 1.1 to Desigo CC 2.0 and have
custom libraries containing Symbols, Sample Graphics, and\or Template
Graphics.
1. From the File menu, click Consistency Checker.
 The Consistency Checker displays.
2. Click
to refresh the Tasks pane.
 The Tasks windows is updated and displays a list of available tasks to run.
3. Make sure the Update Symbol Dependencies task is the only task checked. It
is imperative that you only run one task at a time. Therefore, all other tasks
should not be unchecked.
4. Select the Update Symbol Dependencies task in the Tasks pane, and then
click
in the upper right-hand corner of the Consistency Checker pane.
 The Properties of Task: Update Symbol Dependencies pane displays on
the right, revealing all the properties of the selected task.
5. Highlight and right-click on Path Graphics. From the context menu, click Delete.
 The Path Graphics property is deleted and will not run when the Update
Symbol Dependencies task is executed.
6. Highlight the Path Symbols key, and in the path field below, type the name of
custom library location.
-
When entering the name for you custom library, you can use the relative
folder name: libraries\PROJ_MyLibrary_Project_0\*.css or the
actual folder name:
C:\GMSProjects\MyProject\PROJ_MyLibrary_Project_0\Symbo
ls\*.ccs
7. After you have entered the Path Symbols library name, click
to apply the
changes. Repeat for each path you need to update.
8. Click the Check button to run the file conversion.
 The File Conversion task runs.
73
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Custom Library Updates after an Upgrade Installation
9. You are now ready to manually update your Desigo CC 1.1 custom library
object references with the new Desigo CC 2.0 syntax. Refer to Manually
Updating 1.1 Symbol References to 2.0 Symbol References [ ➙74]
5.5.3
Manually Updating 1.1 Symbol References to 2.0 Symbol
References
You are upgrading a custom library from Desigo CC 1.1 to Desigo CC 2.0 and
have run the Consistency Checker File Conversion and Update Symbol
Dependency task on all your custom libraries. In this step, you must manually
update all the object references in the Symbol Instances and your Graphic
Templates. This is step three of four, in updating your custom libraries to reflect the
new Desigo CC 2.0 syntax and file updates.
 You are in Engineering mode.
1. In System Browser > Application View, navigate to your Graphics libraries.
2. Select the graphic you want to open.
 The graphic opens in the Graphics Editor.
3. From the displayed graphic, select a Symbol Instance on the canvas.
 The SymbolInstance properties display in the Properties view.
4. Start to locate properties that use object references for that particular Symbol
Instance:
-
Substitutions - Many properties use object references
-
Symbol Instance - Object Reference, Symbol Reference
-
Advanced - Selection Reference,
-
Command and Navigation - Navigation Target
5. For each object reference, make the following changes:
-
!! with @ for example @CMD
-
.!! with @ for example @CMD
- :: with ; for example MyNode;.PresentValue
6. After you have updated all the affected object reference syntax instances, click
to save the updates to your graphic.
7. Repeat the procedure for each Symbol Instance on your graphic, and for each
graphic in your library.
8. To update all your Graphic Templates and the object and command references
in the Expression fields, navigate to your Graphic Template libraries.
9. Select the Graphic Template you want to check and modify.
 The Graphic Template opens in the Graphics Editor.
10. For each Symbol Instance or expression property associated with a specific
function in the Graphics Template, navigate to the Evaluation Editor, and for
each Expression change the following :
-
!! with @ for example @CMD
-
.!! with @ for example @CMD
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode;@Cmd
74
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
11. After you have updated all the affected object reference syntax instances, click
to save the updates to your Graphic Template.
12. You have now completed all the steps to update your custom libraries for 2.0,
you can proceed to the final step: Updating Graphics with Updated Symbols [ ➙
75]
5.5.4
Updating Graphics with Updated Symbols
 You have just completed the steps for updating your pre-Desigo CC 2.0
Symbols from your project's custom libraries, Updating Custom Symbols from a
Custom Library [➙ 72]. Now you are ready to check and update any of your
graphics that may have dependencies of the updated Symbols.
1. From the File menu, click Update Graphics
 The Consistency Checker displays and automatically runs the File
Conversion task on your graphics.
2. When the Consistency Checker has finished running the task, the graphics that
were converted display in the Findings pane.
3. Close the Consistency Checker.
 Your graphics dependencies have been resolved to reflect the updated
Symbols.
5.6
5.6.1
Working with a Graphic
Overview of Graphic Components and Types
Graphic
A graphic is a visual representation of a piece of equipment, floors, buildings, a
plant, or an entire campus engineered for a specific project. The graphic is a .CCG
file that contains drawing elements and images and is saved to a project’s
Graphics folder.
Viewport
A defined area within a graphic or a sub-component of a data point representing
the parent graphic page. There are two types of graphic viewports: Manual and
Automatic. Automatic viewports are calculated whenever a graphic is saved to the
graphics folder; and Manual viewports are drawn on a graphic by a user.
A graphic viewport is a defined rectangular sub-section of a graphic that can be
viewed independently of the main graphic; it is a zoomed-in view of a larger graphic
that allows you to see specific detail related to the graphics depth. Viewports are
stored as children of their parent graphic and displayed in System Browser >
Graphics folder.
There are two types of graphic viewports: automatic and manual.
Automatic viewports are automatically generated when a graphic contains one or
more data point objects. The data point object is automatically linked and mapped
to that view of the graphic and stored in the Related Items pane. During runtime, if
the object is selected from System Browser, the part of the graphic that hosts that
object, its viewport, displays in the graphics viewer.
75
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
Manual viewports are created by a user. Manual viewports are drawn on a graphic
in the Graphics Editor, and then data point objects from System Browser are
associated with them.
Symbol
A reusable XAML file that represents a piece of equipment, floor, or any
component or entity. They are saved as .CCS files and stored in a library and are
typically used to display system object values. A Symbol does not have a data
point type associated with it.
Graphic Template
The Desigo CC software package provides you with standard BACnet device
graphics for various applications The graphic contains placeholders to data points
using expression references, for example RoomControllerRef. Graphic Templates
are saved as .CCT files and display the runtime values of mapped system objects.
A template graphic does not have an associated data point type reference.
Graphic templates only use Star-Substitutions. No named substitutions.
Sample Graphic
A graphic page that does not have a corresponding graphics data point, since it is
not in the stored in the project’s graphics folder.
5.6.1.1
Supported Graphics
Graphics are computer-generated raster or vector images consisting of a
combination of drawing elements such as dots, lines, text, and buttons used to
represent equipment, a facility, or a campus in a building control system. A graphic
has the following additional attributes:

A graphic is created is created and edited in the Graphics application.

A graphic has a name and is saved as a .CCG file.
Raster Image

A raster image is a computer image that is stored and displayed as a series of
dots in a rectangular grid. The following applies to raster images in the
Graphics Editor.

The following raster images are supported: BMP, JPG, GIF, TIF, TIFF, and
PNG.

They are stored as a stream inside a graphic page (XAML).

They can be stretched and clipped.
NOTE:
The performance of a graphic may be severely impacted if it contains one or more
raster images with active values in the Rotation Speed property of the Layout
group property. Raster images supported by the Graphics Editor include: BMP,
JPG, GIF, TIF, TIFF, and PNG.
76
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
Vector
A computer image, stored and displayed as geometrical primitives such as points,
lines, curves, and other shapes, and based on mathematical equations to
represent a graphic. Vector images can be proportionally scaled.
XAML
eXtensible Application Markup Language. A user interface markup language based
on the eXtensible Markup Language (XML) and used to define user interface
elements. XAML supports features such as 3D and controls.
XPS
XML Paper Specification. A XAML-based specification for a page description
language and a fixed-document format that supports device and resolution
independence and vector-graphic elements in documents.
AutoCAD
You can view, import, and modify any valid AutoCAD file created with the Autodesk
software. You do this in the Autodesk DWG TrueView application, AutoDesk
Design Review, or the AutoCAD importer tool all installed with the Desigo Control
Center software. Which tool you use to import or convert, depends on the AutoCAD
file type, or the method used to access them. For more information see, Working
with AutoCAD Images [ ➙ 101].
5.6.1.2
Scaling
The Graphics Editor allows you to set the overall scale of a graphic and any
graphical objects deposited on it. Scaling allows you to maintain a consistent size
ratio of all elements on a graphic. Setting the scaling is done by associating a pixel
unit with a logical unit of measurement. For example, one pixel can be set to equal
302 kilometers or miles. Logical measurements are set in the Graphics properties
in the Properties view.
Graphic Property Interdependencies
There are five Graphic properties that allow you to specify the height and width of a
graphic, unit type, and logical scale, width and height.
The table below shows the interdependency of Graphic properties when they are
modified. An “x” means that if there is a change in one property value, the
associated property value also changes.
Height
Height
Width
Width
Logical Scale
Factor
Logical Width
x
Logical Height
x
x
x
Logical
Scale
Factor
x
x
x
Logical
Width
x
x
x
Logical
Height
x
x
x
77
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5.6.2
Bitmap Images
Raster images, also known as bitmap files, can be viewed and modified on the
graphic canvas. There are a number of rules related to working with Raster images
in the Graphics Editor.
NOTE:
The performance of a graphic may be severely impacted if it contains one or more
raster images with active values in the Rotation Speed property of the Layout
group property. Raster images supported by the Graphics Editor include: BMP,
JPG, GIF, TIF, TIFF, and PNG.
Copying Bitmap Images from the Canvas
When you copy a bitmap image element from the canvas using the CTRL+C keys
or selecting Copy from the right-click context menu, the following rules apply to
bitmap images:

The clipboard always contains the XAML string and the bitmap image.

The clipboard retains the original size of an inserted image. Any resizing of a
bitmap image on the canvas does not affect the clipboard image. If you paste a
bitmap onto the canvas, resize it, and then copy it to the clipboard, the original
size of the image is maintained.

If more than one bitmap image is selected for copying, only the main image is
copied onto the clipboard.
If you are copying a bitmap image with transparent pixels, one of the following
occurs:
– The Bitmap Transparency feature is disabled; the full transparent pixels of
the image in the clipboard are replaced by black pixels on the canvas.

–
The Bitmap Transparency feature is enabled; the full transparent pixels are
replaced by the set Bitmap Transparency color and are viewable in an
external graphics software. NOTE: in order to be visible, the transparency
color should be set to a color which is not already used in the bitmap
image.
Pasting and Inserting Bitmap Images onto the Canvas
You can paste a bitmap image onto the canvas or replace a selected image
element on the canvas. The following apply:

If no elements are selected on the canvas, a new image is created on the
canvas.

The image of the selected element(s) is replaced by the bitmap image from the
clipboard; however, the image properties, for example, shadow, angle,
evaluations, etc., remain as initially set.

The pasted bitmap image takes any resizing-factors applied to the image it
replaced.

Bitmap pixels can be set for transparency using the Bitmap Transparency
feature.

When you insert a bitmap file onto the canvas it is stored as a stream inside a
graphic page (XAML).
78
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5.6.3
5.6.3.1
5
About Graphic Viewports
Graphic Viewports
A graphic viewport is a defined rectangular sub-section of a graphic that can be
viewed independently of the main graphic; it is a zoomed in view of a larger graphic
that allows you to see specific detail related to the graphics depth.
The relationship between a graphic and a graphic viewport is that of a parent-child
relationship. The main graphic is the parent, and the graphic viewport(s) are the
children. A graphic’s viewports are listed as its children in the Graphic folder in
System Browser.
There are two methods for creating viewports: automatic and manual.
Automatic Viewports
Automatic viewports are automatically created and calculated by the Graphics
Editor based on existing system object references in the elements and Symbols.
When you save a graphic, each data point, Symbol, or system object referenced on
that graphic, generates its own graphic viewport. The graphic viewports size is
defined by the associated depth that contains the system object reference. An
element or Symbol instance can have system object references or data points. All
the references are used for the automatic view calculation.
For more information on how automatic views are calculated, see Automatic
Viewports [➙ 79].
Manual Viewports
You can manually draw one or more viewports on the active graphic in the work
area. These viewports, when saved, are then saved as the children of the parent
graphic. Manual pages can are viewed in the Graphics Viewer. You can associated
data point objects from System Browser with manually created viewports.
In order to create a manual page, you must activate the viewport from the
Viewports group on the Home tab.
Viewport Mode
Manual viewports can be viewed when you activate the Viewport button while you
are in Design or Test mode. When you are in Viewport Mode, all existing manual
viewports display on the canvas with the associated viewport name and a blue
background. When a viewport is active it is encompassed in red brackets. While
you are in Viewport Mode you cannot add any elements to the canvas and all
existing elements on the canvas are visible, but locked and cannot be edited.
5.6.3.2
Automatic Viewports
When you save a graphic, the Graphics Editor automatically generates a viewport
and for every system object referenced in the graphic the depth of a graphic is
used to help define the size of the viewport.
For every reference to a system object in a graphic you save, the following occurs:

The depth associated to the layer where the system object is referenced is
chosen.

The depth is stored with the automatically calculated viewport. Therefore, when
the viewport is displayed in the Graphics Viewer, it reads the depth and
displays all the layers belonging to the associated depth.

If the referenced system object has no siblings:
79
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
–

– The referenced system object is placed in the center of the viewport.
If the referenced system object has siblings, meaning that there are other
system objects that have the same parent node (or graphic):
–
–
5.6.4
5.6.4.1
The display size of the page defaults to the displayed zoom factor of its
associated depth.
The viewport size is adjusted so that all siblings are visible in the graphic
page.
The viewport centers the referenced system object, group of siblings, in the
middle of the viewport.
Working with Graphic Viewports
Associating Objects with Viewports
 In the Graphics Editor, you have a graphic open that contains a viewport you
want to associate with an object in System Browser.
1. On the graphic, click on the viewport you want to associate with the object.
 The Property View displays the Viewport properties.
2. In System Browser navigate to the object(s) you want to associate with the
viewport.
3. Drag-and-drop that data point object to the Graphic Editor’s Viewport
Properties > Advanced > Link References property.
 The object is now associated with the active viewport.
5.6.4.2
Creating Manual Viewports
You can create graphic sub-views, known as viewports, and then manually
associate them to individual data points or system objects. The viewports are
displayed as children of their parent graphic in System Browser.
To create a Manual Viewport:
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. From the Viewports group, click the Viewport Mode icon
.
 The Viewport Mode is now enabled and the icon background changes to a
darker shade of blue. In the Element Tree a Layer (Manual Viewports) item
is added.
NOTE: In the Viewport mode, you can only modify manual viewports; all
other elements on the graphic are visible but not active for editing.
2. From the Viewports group, click the Manual Viewport icon
.
 The mouse pointer turns to a crosshair on the canvas and the background
color of the Manual Viewport icon background color turns orange.
3. On the graphic, click and draw the viewport want to create. Release the mouse
button when you are finished.
 The viewport displays enclosed in the frame, as Viewport 1.
 The Properties view changes to Viewport Properties and displays the
properties for the new viewport.
80
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
 The Element Tree view, displays the new viewport with a default viewport
name under the associated layer
4. To name the new viewport, navigate to the Viewport Properties view, expand
General property. In the Description field, type a name for the viewport.
NOTE: Each viewport must have a name and must be unique from all other
graphic viewports associated with the same graphic. All printable characters
are allowed, including special characters for example, spaces, dots,
semicolons, brackets, etc.
 The name of the viewport displays on the graphic within the viewport
brackets and in the Elements view the name displays next to the viewport.
5. In the Viewport Properties view, you can also modify the Layout [➙ 239]
properties of the viewport and the Advanced [ ➙ 236]properties that display for
viewports. If you associate a Depth with the viewport, then the Display size of
the selected viewport is used when when viewing the viewport.
6. Save the graphic.
 In System Browser, the manual viewport displays under the associated graphic
node as a child.
You are now ready to associate data points or objects to the graphic viewport.
5.6.4.3
Deleting Manual Viewports
 You are in Engineering mode, and have a graphic with viewports open.
1. From the, Viewports group, click Viewport Mode
.
 Viewport Mode is now enabled and existing viewports are visible.
2. On the canvas, right-click on the graphic viewport you want to delete.
 Red brackets display around the viewports.
3. From the context menu, select Delete.
 The graphic viewport is deleted from the graphic.
5.6.4.4
Modifying Manual Viewports
Manual viewports are edited in the Graphics Editor.
 You have a graphic with viewports open.
1. On the Home tab, from the Viewports group, click Viewport Mode
.
 The Manual viewport mode is now enabled.
2. Do one or more of the following:
-
Move the Manual Viewport - Click and drag on the manual viewport to
move it to the desired location on the canvas.
-
Resize the Manual Viewport – Move your cursor over one of the red border
markings surrounding the viewport. The resize cursor displays. Click the
border marking and drag until you have reached the desired size. Or, in the
Properties view, you can change the X, Y, Width, Height, and Description
properties located under the Layout andGeneral categories. The
Description property can be left blank and does not need to be unique.
Additionally, manual viewports can overlap one another.
81
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
-
Delete the Manual Viewport - Right-click on the manual viewport and select
Delete from the context menu.
-
Add Manual Viewport – From the Viewports group, click Manual Viewport
. The mouse pointer turns to a crosshair on the canvas. Click and draw
the new page on the canvas. The new viewport is added to the canvas and
the Element Tree view.
-
Add System Objects – Drag and drop data point objects from System
Browser to the Properties View > Advanced > Linked Reference property
field.
3. Save the graphic to ensure you do not lose any changes.
5.6.5
5.6.5.1
Working with Graphics
Creating a Complex Graphic – Workflow
You can create complex graphics that represent your facility, a building, or piece of
equipment for monitoring and commanding with the Graphics application.
The following workflow guides you through creating and integrating layers, depths,
and automatic or manual views; depositing system objects or data points and
Symbols onto your graphic; and setting property values, and evaluations to
animate your graphics so that you can view the runtime values of your graphic.
1. Create a graphic- initiate in Graphics Viewer or Graphics Editor.
2. Open the Graphics Editor and set the Graphic properties.
3. Configure a background layer by importing XAML, CAD, image files or
drawings.
4. Define the foreground layer(s).
5. Define the first depth.
6. Configure the foreground layer by dragging and dropping points from the
Symbol Browser the appropriate graphics.
7. Create a new Symbol, or select Symbols from the Symbol Library and add
them to the graphic.
8. Create manual pages.
9. Define the graphic and element property settings, values, and Evaluation
sequences.
10. Test the Evaluations.
11. Save the graphic.
5.6.5.2
Creating a Graphic
You want to create a graphic.
1. If you are already in the Graphics Editor, skip this step and start with step 3.
Select System Browser > Application View > Graphics.
2. In the Primary pane, click the Operating button to switch to Engineering mode.
82
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
3. Do one of the following:
-
From the Graphics toolbar, click CreateNew
, and select New Template
Graphic.
-
From the Application button menu, click New Graphic.
A blank, tabbed graphic template displays in the Graphics Editor work area.
4. Create and design the graphic as necessary.
5. From the Graphics toolbar, click Save As
 The Save As dialog box displays.
.
6. In the Save As dialog box, click to expand the Project folder, and then navigate
to Graphics folder, or one of its sub-folders.
7. In the Name, type the file name, and then click Save.
 The graphic is saved as a .CCG file, and a .PNG file.
5.6.5.3
Drag-and-Drop from System Browser
The Graphics application supports the drag-and-drop of nodes and their properties
from System Browser, the Graphics Viewer, and the Contextual pane to the canvas
and various fields in the Graphics Editor views. After a drag-and-drop, the name
and the address of the data point reference display in the target field.
NOTE: In order to drag-and-drop a node or object properties to the Graphics
Editor, you must have the proper licensing or user access.
Drag Source
All object nodes from any of the System Browser applications, regardless of where
they exist within the folder’s hierarchy, are drag sources that can be dropped on to
a receiving field, a drop target. In the case of the Graphics Viewer, the properties of
any object that has a valid reference to an object, such as a selection reference,
expression, or evaluation associated with it, is a valid drag source. These
properties can be dragged over to the Graphics Editor or onto another application
pane or view that accepts drag source.
In the Graphics Editor, you can drag an item from the canvas or one of the views
when you are in Runtime mode.
Drop Target
All text or field boxes in the Graphics Editor are valid drop targets for the data point
reference nodes. Generally, the data point references are dropped into the
Expression field of the Evaluation Editor or used in the Animation Symbol for a
substitution.
When you drop a node, the full path or hierarchy of the name display in the
fieldname, separated with the separator from the hierarchy. For example,
“User1:\Campus1\Building1\Floor1”.
Drag Data
The drag data depends on the type of reference associated with the element or
object when the drag was initiated.
 Evaluation – Data point I.D. of all unique referenced objects from all
expressions.

Selection Reference – Data point of the Selection Reference property.

Symbol – datapoint of the Object Reference, the associated object.
83
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
Drag-and-Drop Multiple Objects from System Browser
You can drag-and-drop multiple objects from System Browser to the Graphics
Editor. When you drag-and-drop multiple object over, the objects display in the
alignment wrapped mode when dropped on the canvas. This means the objects
display side-by-side in a row, and wrap to the next row as needed. When you
initially drop the objects on the canvas and release the mouse button, the objects
remain selected, if you would rather thee objects are “cascaded,” on the canvas,
then click
from the ribbon, and the objects instead display in a cascaded format
on your canvas.
Tips on Using Drag-and-Drop
5.6.5.4

When you drag-and-drop a node from the System Browser or the Graphics
Viewer to the Graphics Editor, the full name of the data point reference in the
Graphics Editor only consists of text and numbers. No characters are included
from the node, even if they are visible in the System Browser. For example, a
node titled, “Floor#1” in the System Browser, is displayed as “Floor1” after it
has been dragged-and-dropped in the Graphics Editor. The # sign is not
carried over.

While, some nodes might belong to a hidden or another hierarchy, the structure
should match the System Browser structure.
Drag-and-Drop Cursor Image
You can drag any item displayed in the Symbol Browser , Graphics Viewer, and
Contextual pan --including a search result—to the Graphics Editor, if you have the
application and licensing right to the Graphics Editor. Objects in the Graphics
Viewer are always a drag source, and the Graphics Editor is a drag source and
drag-target. Both support selecting both single and multiple items. The cursor
image changes (see the following table) depending on whether or not the view
accepts drops. You can cancel dragging by pressing the ESC key or by moving the
cursor outside the boundary of the Graphics Editor window.
Cursor Image
Accepts Drop
Does Not accept Drops
5.6.6
5.6.6.1
Working with Linked Graphics
Creating a Graphic Link within a Graphic
A graphic in the Graphics Viewer can contain a link to another graphic. When you
click on the link, the graphic associated with the link displays.
 You are in the Graphics Editor and want to configure your graphic to contain a
link to another graphic in your current graphic.
84
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
1. On the canvas, draw an element or insert an image to us as the visual for your
link.
2. Click on the element created for the link.
3. In the Properties view, select Advanced > Selection Reference property.
4. From System Browser, navigate to the graphic you want the link to display, and
then drag-and-drag the graphic to the Selection Reference property in the
Graphics Editor.
5. If the Disable Selection property is checked, click on the checkbox to disable it.
6. Save your graphic.
 The graphic now contains a link to another graphic.
5.6.6.2
Deleting Graphic Links
A graphic in the Graphics Viewer can contain a link to another graphic. When you
click on the link, the graphic associated with the link displays.
 You have a graphic that contains a graphic link to another graphic, and you
want to delete or edit the graphic link.
 You are in the Graphics Editor and have the graphic with the link open.
1. In the Properties view, navigate to and expand the Advanced property section.
2. Right-click on the Selection Reference property field and select Cut from the
context menu.
 The link is removed from the field.
3. (Optional) Drag-and-drop another graphic file to the Selection Reference field.
4. Save the graphic.
 You have deleted the original link and, optionally, replaced the deleted link with
another graphic link.
5.6.7
Working with Bitmap Transparency
Your can insert a bitmap image into your graphic and set a color within the image
to transparency.
 You have imported a bitmap on the canvas and you want a color within the
bitmap to be transparent.
 NOTE: If the Bitmap transparency feature is enabled and the Transparency
Color is already set to a color in the bitmap image, the transparency
automatically takes effect upon inserting the bitmap image into the canvas.
1. On the Options tab, in the Bitmap Transparency group, click the Enabled check
box.

2.
The bitmap transparency feature is enabled.
Click on the Transparent Color field and do one of the following to set the
transparency:
-
From the Base Color chart, select the color you want to use as the
transparency color.
85
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
-
From the RGB colors, use the sliders or enter a hexadecimal color code in
the # field to set the transparency, red, green, and blue values of the color
you want to use as the transparency color.
-
Select the Color Eyedropper tool, and then drag the eyedropper to the color
on the bitmap image that has the color you want to use as the transparency
color. Release the mouse button.
 The fill is applied to the Transparency Color field.
3. Delete the bitmap image on the canvas.
4. To re-insert the deleted image, from the Home > Elements group, click Import
Image
.
 The Open dialog box displays.
5. Navigate to and then select the original bitmap image you had imported.
 The bitmap image displays on the canvas, and the transparency takes affect.
The color set to transparency on the bitmap is no longer visible, and instead
the area is completely transparent.
5.6.8
Overview of the Consistency Checker
The Consistency Checker is an engineering, diagnostic tool that is used to check
and attempt to fix the Desigo CC software for errors that may exist between the
graphics stored in the project folder and System Browser. The tool uses a specific
task file(s) (.DLL) that you load and unload, to determine the tasks (or checks) that
the Consistency Checker performs on your system.
The Consistency Checker also allows you to convert all graphics files in a project
or library to any of the Siemens graphic file formats. A HQ librarian can use this
tool to convert all Symbols to the current Siemens graphic file formats.
The task files must be located in the GMSMainProject > BIN folder in order for the
Consistency Checker tool to load them.
Task File
NOTE:
You should always run a backup of your graphic libraries before running any of
the task files. Additionally, you should only run one task at a time.
The Desigo CC software provides the following default file that is loaded into the
Consistency Checker:
Siemens.Gms.ConsistencyCheckerTask.Graphics.dll
The default file contains the following checks and tasks:
 Check *.CCG and *.CCT files against System Browser nodes
This task checks to see that a node exists in the System Browser for every
graphic (.CCG and .CCT) that is located in the Graphics project folder. If there
is no existing node in the System Browser, the missing node is added.

Check System Browser nodes against *.CCG and *.CCT files
This task checks all graphic nodes in the System Browser against the graphic
files (.CCG and .CCT) in your graphics project folders. If you have an orphan
node—a node that does not have an equivalent graphic—the orphan node is
deleted from System Browser.

Check the Related Items of each System Browser node
This task checks that all System Browser nodes have valid links to any
graphics that have been associated with the node. If a graphic no longer exists-
86
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
-the link is invalid-- the invalid link is removed from the node’s Related Items
display.

Check thumbnails (*.PNG files) for Symbols and Graphic Templates
This task checks whether all graphic files have a thumbnail (.PNG) and
whether it is current. The task can be used to update all missing or old
thumbnails.

File Conversion
This task is used when you are upgrading graphic specific project data from
library from Desigo CC 1.1 or earlier to Desigo CC 2.0. The Consistency
Checker checks all the graphics, Symbols, templates, and sample graphics in
the specified folder and library and updates them as needed. This is part one of
a two step process to update Symbols and then update the subsequent
graphics with the Symbols from the custom libraries.
The following are the properties of this task, that you can optionally use to
control which files are being converted during the task execution.
Key
Value
Function
Conversion Method
To Bin (Default)
Type one of the desired file format for
the conversion:
ToBin -Converts file to binary format
To ZIP - Converts files to ZIP file
ToXml - Converts files to XML
ToSvg - Converts files to SVG
Path Graphics
-Symbols
-GraphicTemplates
-SampleGraphics
Graphics\*ccg
Libraries\*.ccs
Libraries\*.cct
Libraries\*.ccg
For each path, type path of the location
of the files.
Force Conversion
False (Default) \ True
Checks if the actual file format matches
the one you want to convert to, for
example, Binary.
False - If match found, then not saved.
True - Match or no match, all files are
re-saved.

Symbol Statistics
This task allows you to generate a report displaying statistical information about
selected Symbols. The result of the task is saved to a
SymbolStatistics.CSV file in the Local \TEMP directory. Statistics include:
number of elements, latest version, usage information, etc.

Update Symbol Dependencies
This task checks to see that any graphic or Symbol containing embedded
Symbols has the most current version of the embedded Symbols(s). If any of
the embedded files are out of sync, the Fix, resaves the dependencies among
them, thereby maintaining the integrity of the database and allowing for the
rendering of the files to be optimized. The following are the properties of this
task. It is recommended that you leave them at their default value.
Key
Value
Function
Path Graphics
-Symbols
-GraphicTemplates
-SampleGraphics
Graphics\*ccg
Libraries\*.ccs
Libraries\*.cct
Libraries\*.ccg
For each path, type path of the location
of the files.
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
87
Siemens
Building Technologies
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5.6.9
Consistency Checker Workspace
The Consistency Checker is an engineering, diagnostic tool that is accessible from
the File menu in the Graphics Editor.
Consistenty Checker
Field
Description
Check
Clears any existing error messages and run any check marked
tasks.
Auto Fix
Automatically fixes any errors found after a task has been run.
Fix
Manually initiate a fix on any selected errors.
Display or hides the Properties of Task section in the Tasks tab.
NOTE: Only displays when the Tasks tab is selected.
Load all tasks from all task files.
Progress Bar
Displays a green moving bar when tasks are executed. You can
Pause
or Stop All
a task, as needed.
Task Tab
Task Section
Field
Description
Enabled
Enables the task.
State
Displays the current state of the task.
 Checking
 Fixing
 None
Result
Displays the result of the task.
- Completed Successfully
- Completed with Findings
88
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5
- Completed with Errors
- Canceled
- Failed
Description
Displays a brief description of the task.
Progress
When a task is active, displays the progress of the task.
- Pause task
- Resume task
Assembly Name
Displays the name of the task file (.DLL)
Version
Displays the version of the task assembly:
Siemens.Gms.ConsistencyTask.Graphics
Findings Section
Field
Description
Solved
Displays a checkmark if the issue is resolved.
Task Description
Displays the Name and Description of the task.
Reason
Displays the reason why the issue was added.
Solution
Displays what the solution is to fix the issue.
Property of Task Section: Description varies according to task selected
Field
Description
Key
Displays the property path.
Value
Displays the property value.
Input fields
Allows you to enter text to add a new Key or Value, respectively. Or, modify
an already selected task property.
When you enter a name of a new property, it must be a unique name.
Applies the changes made to the Key and Value fields or adds the new
property.
Restores the Key and Value fields to their default settings.
Displays a description of the highlighted property.
89
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
Settings Tab
Field
Description
Watch File System
When checked, the Consistency Checker watches the Task Directory for
newly added task .DLL’s, upon detection, the .DLL is then automatically
loaded.
Save Exceptions (Save Exceptions are written and saved in the Export log file.
to File)
Log Tab
Field
Description
DateTime
Display the date and time the log entry was noted.
Task
Display the Name and Description of the task.
Message
Display any status or error messages associated with the task.
NOTE: In the event of an error message, placing the mouse over the
message may display additional information about the issue.
Clear
Clear the log of all text.
Save to file
Save the log content to a text file.
Errors
Display the number of errors found and allows you to use the arrow buttons
to scroll through the error messages.
90
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5.6.10
5.6.10.1
5
Working with the Consistency Checker
Loading a Custom Task File
 You are in the Graphics Editor and want to load a customized task file (.DLL)
into the Consistency Checker tool and it is not loading when you click on the
refresh icon. You can manually add a .DLL file to the tool, by doing the
following:
1. From the File menu, select Consistency Checker.
 The Consistency Checker tool displays.
2. Right-click anywhere in the Tasks Tab > Tasks section, and select Load.
 The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select GMSProjects > GMSMain Project > Bin directory, and select the
required task file (.DLL). For example:
Siemens.Gms.ConsistencyCheckerTask.Graphics.dll
 The task file is loaded into the Consistency Checker.
4. If the Task list is empty or has not updated with the new tasks, click Refresh
and the task list is updated to display all loaded tasks.
5.6.10.2
Unloading a Task File
 You are in the Consistency Checker tool in the Graphics Editor and want to
unload a task file (.DLL) so that those task no longer run or display.

On the Task tab, right-click anywhere in the Task section, and then select
Unload.
 The task file (.dll) is no longer loaded and the Consistency Checker is
cleared of all tasks.
5.6.10.3
Configuring the Consistency Checker
 You are in the Graphics Editor and want to load a task file (.DLL) into the
Consistency Checker tool.
1. From the File menu, select Consistency Checker.
 The Consistency Checker tool displays.
2. From the Settings tab, enable the following check boxes, as needed:

Watch in File System – Click this checkbox to enable the Consistency Checker
to 1) recognize when a task file has been added to the directory, and 2)
automatically add load the task file.

Save Exceptions (Save to log) - Click this check box to always write exceptions
into the export log file.
91
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with a Graphic
5.6.10.4
Running a Task in the Consistency Checker
 You have loaded one or more tasks and you want to run the tasks to check and
synchronize your graphic files in your project folder against the graphic files
listed in System Browser.
 You have a backup of your current graphic libraries.
 You should only run one task at a time.
NOTICE
NOTE:
When you run the Update Symbol Dependencies task, you must use the Fix or
Auto Fix options, rather than to fix them manually.
1. From the Tasks tab, in the Tasks section, select the Enabled check box for
each task you want to execute.
2. If a task has additional properties and you want to adjust or view those
properties, in the Tasks pane click on the task whose properties you want to
view, and then click
to display the Properties of Task pane. The properties
associated with the highlighted task display.
3. In the Properties of Task pane, make the necessary changes to the properties,
if any.
-
To make changes to a Key or Value – Select the property you want to
modify. The Key and Value data displays in the two fields below. For more
information on what your options are with each property, hover over the
to see a tooltip with the property description.
-
To apply changes to the Key and Value fields, click
-
To restore the properties to the default settings, click
.
4. (Optional) If you want the Consistency Checker to automatically fix any
discrepancies or issues found, select the Auto Fix check box.
5. Click the Check button to run the Consistency Checker and execute the
enabled tasks.
 The Consistency Checker starts to execute each task. The progress of
each task is noted by the icon in the State and the Progress field. If
needed, click the Pause, Stop, and Start buttons accordingly for each task.
6. (Optional) To save the Consistency Checker log file, navigate to the Log tab,
and click Save to File.
 The Save As dialog box displays.
7. Navigate to the appropriate file location and click Save.
 The file is saved as a CCLog_[Year]-[Month}-[Date].txt file.
8. To fix the errors generated by running the tasks, you can do one of the
following:
92
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Viewing a Graphic
5.7
5.7.1
5
-
Click on the Fix button at the top of the Consistency Checker – this will fix
all the errors.
-
Right-click on an individual error, and select Fix from the context menu.
Viewing a Graphic
Aerial View
The Aerial view allows you to view the drawing board and the canvas at all times.
You can zoom in and out of a specific area and pan around the drawing area with
the viewport.
Aerial View
5.7.2
Item
Name
Description
1
Viewport Rectangle
View graphics in part or as a
whole.
Working with the Aerial View Viewport Rectangle
 You have a graphic open and would like to zoom in/out or pan to a specific
area of the graphic.
1. Do one of the following:
-
Navigate to the docked Aerial view.
-
Add it to the dock panel. From the View tab, on the Display Views group,
check the Aerial View box to display the view.
2. In the Aerial view, do one of the following:
-
To pan the viewport rectangle, click anywhere within the viewport rectangle
and drag the viewport to the desired location
93
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Viewing a Graphic
-
5.7.3
To resize and zoom in or out using the viewport rectangle, click anywhere
on the green viewport border, and with the double-headed arrow drag the
border to resize the viewport.
About Zooming and Panning
The Graphics Editor supports zooming and panning within the active canvas.
Zooming allows you to magnify the canvas image, and panning allows you to move
the center of the canvas view. The Zoom and Pan commands are accessed from
the Home tab in the Zoom group. The panning or zooming modes are
automatically deactivated when you select a new drawing object or when a new or
existing graphic page is opened.
You can use the features from the Ribbon’s Zoom group or, you can use the
keyboard and mouse buttons to zoom and pan in, out, and around your graphics.
5.7.4
5.7.5
Working with Zooming and Panning
Using the Pan Mode
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the Home tab, in the Zoom group, click Pan
.
 The mouse pointer changes to the four-arrow cursor
displays.
2. You can do one of the following to pan in or out of the drawing board and
canvas:
-
Right-click on the canvas and drag the canvas in the direction you want to
view.
-
Select the left, right, up and down arrow keys on the keyboard pad to
navigate in the direction you want to view.
3. When you are finished zooming, click Pan
to change the cursor back to the
normal cursor..
5.7.6
Using the Zoom Group Functions
A zoom factor of a graphic can be changed using one of the following methods
from the Zoom group:
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.

On the Home tab, in the Zoom group, you have the following zooming options
available to you:
-
Click 100%
to display the active graphic at 100% magnification.
-
Click Fit Size
to scale the graphic so that the entire graphic and all the
elements on the graphic are visible.
-
Click Free Zoom
to draw a zoom rectangle directly on the canvas; the
magnification is adjusted as you increase and decrease the size of the
zoom rectangle magnifies. Repeat as needed.
94
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Searching for Graphic Files
-
Click and drag the Zoom Slider
5
either increase or
decrease magnification of the active element(s).
 Repeat as needed.
5.8
5.8.1
Searching for Graphic Files
Find and Replace Overview
The Find and Replace view, enabled from the Ribbon’s View tab, allows you to
search, display results, and replace existing text, string, and property values. This
is useful for making changes to multiple graphics, that share related information, for
example, changing substitutions and data point references in Sample graphics.
Search Options
The Find and Replace view allows you to search and replace data or values. A
search is automatically conducted as you enter text, strings, wildcards, or
expressions. If the search entry is found, the Replace, Replace All, and Find Next
fields are enabled. You can also use the Property Toolbox, to insert specific
property values for non-textual property types, such as brushes, colors,
enumerations, etc.
You can also select where you would like the search to be conducted. You can
select the active graphic, all open graphics in the Graphics Editor, or you can
specify the entire project. In the case of searching the entire project, the Find
Results Controls section displays, allowing you to see the status of a search. A
refresh button is also available in this section.
The standard Match case and Match whole word search filters are also supported.
Text, Wildcards and Regular Expressions
Text, values, or strings entered into the Find what field can be recognized as 1)
straightforward data, 2) containing wildcards or 3) regular expressions making your
search more targeted.
The Text option searches for the text or string exactly as entered into the field,
without any wildcards. For example, “b*” matches “ab*123” but doesn’t match “ab”
and “abcde”. Compare this example, with the example for wildcards below.
The two wildcard characters available are:

? - Allows you to add one character to your search. For example, "ab?"
matches and displays "abc" but doesn't match or display "ab" and "abcde".

* - Allows you to add zero or more characters to your search criteria. For
example, "b*" matches and displays, “b”, "bc", "bcd" and "bcde".
When you select the Regular Expression option, the text and any symbols entered
in the Find what field are recognized regular expressions. Note: The option "Match
whole word" will be ignored.

Example 1: "[12]00" matches "100", "200" and "77100777".

Example 2: "^a.*z$" matches strings of any length, which start with an 'a' and
end with a 'z'.
Bring to View
When you perform a search or a search and replace, any matching results are
displayed in the Find Results section of the view. To work with a specific result, by
double-clicking on the associated row the element is brought to view by first
opening the associated graphic, if it is not already open, and then making the
95
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Searching for Graphic Files
element active on the canvas, the Element Tree, and in the Property View or
Evaluation Editor, depending on whether it is an expression, substitution, or an
element.
Replace Options in the Find Results
Once you have conducted a search and the results are displayed in the Find
Results section of the view, you have several options for working with results. You
can choose to go item by item, by clicking the Find Next button or you can directly
double-click on an item in the Find Result list. Or, you can conduct a Replace or
Replace All task. You can replace one match at a time, or you can use the
standard, Replace All option. The replacement is done only once per item. An item
can either stay or disappear after a replace.
Working with Symbols and Symbol Instances
Since Symbol instances are linked to Symbols, a Symbol instance cannot be
modified directly. The Find Result view displays all children Symbol Instances as
grayed-out and italicized, but, the associated element name displays the Symbols
path.
For example, Element “Sym2\Sym1\Ellipse” means that the Symbol, named
“Sym1” contains the ellipse, and that the Symbol named “Sym2” contains an
instance of “Sym1” and the actual graphic contains an instance of “Sym2”.
The Find Next button selects the Symbol instance of the graphic (“Sym2” in the
example above), but, the actual element property or evaluation is not selected.
96
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Searching for Graphic Files
5.8.2
5
Find and Replace View
NOTE:
The Find and Replace view is not part of the dock panel and is therefore not
dockable. The Find and Replace window is either open or closed.
Find and Replace View
Field
Description
Find what
Type the text, string, or data you want to search for.
Replace with
Type the text, string, or data you want to replace to replace what is
in the Find what field.
Expand to display the Property Toolbox fields when selected. Allows
you to insert specific property values for non-textual properties, such
as brush type, color, enumerations, etc.


Property: From the drop-down menu, select a property search
or replace.
Value: Enter the specific value for the selected property you
97
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Searching for Graphic Files

want to search or replace.
Insert: Insert the Property and Value information into either the
Find what or Replace with field, depending on where the cursor
was active.
Collapses the Property Toolbox fields.
Replace
If nothing is selected in the Find Result pane, the first item is
replaced and a Find Next is performed.
If one or more items are selected in the Find Result pane, all
selected items are replaced and then a Find Next is performed.
Replace All
Replace all instances of the search criteria listed in the Find Results
section.
Find Next
Find the next instance of the search criteria listed in the Find Results
section and brings it into view.
Search Options Section
Allows you to specify your search options for the Find What field. Select from the options
listed below:
Match Case
Conduct a case-sensitive search based on the text entered.
Match whole word
Conduct a search based on finding the entire text string as entered
in the Find what field.
NOTE: If the Regular Expression feature is selected for the search,
this feature is bypassed.
Text
Conduct a text search without any wildcards. This is the default
setting for the Find and Replace view.
Wildcards
Conduct a search using the following wildcards.
 Type “?” to find any single character. Example: h?t finds hat,
hot, hit, and hut.
 Type “*” to find any string of multiple characters. Example: t*n
finds torn, town, and train, etc.
Regular Expression
Recognizes your search to find regular expressions. For information
on regular expressions, click on the Expression Help
.
NOTE: When this option is selected, the Match Whole Word option
is grayed out and inactive.
Filter Section
Look In
Select where the search will take place: the Current Document or
active graphic, All Open Documents, or the Entire Project.
Type
Select a field type to further filter your search.
NOTE: This is disabled if you have chosen to look in the Current
Document.
Name
Enter a graphic, symbol, or template graphic name to further filter
your search. The filter conducts the search based on text or a name
entered. If the field is left blank, all “documents” are found and
displayed in the Find Results window.
NOTE: This is disabled if you have chosen to look in the Current
Document.
All Fields
(Everywhere)
Search all fields, including expressions, substitutions, conditions,
and properties.
Selected Fields
Select a field type to further filter your search.
 Expression – Search through existing expressions.
 Substitution – Search through existing substitutions, including
the Selection Reference and Object Reference properties..
 Condition – Search through evaluations of existing conditions
98
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Searching for Graphic Files

Only Invalid
References
5
associated with the property selected from the drop-down menu.
Property – Searches through values associated with the
property selected from the drop-down menu.
Search for incorrect syntactical usage for data point references
found in all project:
 Selection Reference properties
 Evaluations conditions associated with the Selection Reference
property.
 Object Reference properties
 All expressions
Find Results Section
Displays the Find what results.
The Refresh Results icon displays when a search or a replace is
selected on the Entire Project from the Look In section. The icon
allows you to restart a search.
While the search is being refreshed, a status bar displays showing
you the progress of the refresh. For larger projects, the refresh can
take a few minutes.
The Cancel
icon allows you to cancel the refresh process.
NOTE: When you cancel a Replace All operation in the Entire
Project, any replacements made, will not be rolled back.
For item found, the following columns information displays:
5.8.3
5.8.3.1
Field Type
Displays the items field type: Expression, Substitution, Condition, or
Property.
Field
Display the name of the item, depending on the field type:
 Expression: Displays the property name and expression index
 Substitution: Displays the substitution name.
 Condition: Displays the property name and condition index.
 Property: Displays the property name.
Match
Display the entire string of the field and highlights the matching
pattern.
NOTE: Only the highlighted string will be replaced by the Replace
function.
Element
Display the element name and description, along with additional
element properties such as the Position and Size.
Example: Ellipse (My Ellipse) [16/31 48X48]
If the element is a child of a Symbol instance, then the full path of
the Symbol instance is prefixed.
Example: Symbol1\Nexted Symbol\ Ellipse (My Ellipse)
[16/31 48X48]
Type
Display the document type.
Name
Display the documents name.
Working with the Find and Replace View
Displaying the Find and Replace View
 You want to display the Find and Replace view.

From the View > Display Views group, click the Find and Replace check box.
 The Find and Replace View displays.
99
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Searching for Graphic Files
5.8.3.2
Conducting a Search
 The Find and Replace view is displayed, and you want to conduct a search for
specific text, values, or properties.
1. With the cursor in the Find what field, do one of the following:
-
To search for text – Type the text you want to search for, and when you are
done, click anywhere outside the field.
-
To search for properties and values – Click Expander
to display the
Property Toolbox fields, select a property from the drop-down menu, and
enter a value (number, text, color) for the property. Click on the Insert
button to add the selections to the Find what field.
 Any matches found automatically display in the Find Results section. By
default, the search is conducted in the current active graphic.
2. In the Search Options section, make the appropriate selections to further filter
your search. As you make your choices, the matches to your search and filter
are automatically updated in the Find Results section and the matching text is
now highlighted.
 NOTE: If you selected Entire Project, the search automatic update is not
conducted.
3. In the Filter section, narrow your search by selecting where to look. For more
information on each field, see the descriptions in the topic, Find and Replace
View [➙ 97]
-
If you select Current Document or All Open Documents – The results are
automatically updated in the Find Results window.
-
If you select Entire Project – The Find Results Controls section displays
and a status bar indicates the search is active.
 The Find Results section is updated and you can now work with the results.
5.8.3.3
Finding and Replacing Text and Property Values
 You have entered the text, string, or value to search for in the Find what field of
the Find and Replace view and you want to enter the replacement information
in the Replace with field.
1. With the cursor in the Replace with field, do one of the following:
-
To replace text – Type the text you want to use for the replacer, and click
anywhere outside the field when you are done.
-
To search for properties and values – Click on the expander icon on the
right to display the Property Toolbox fields, select a property from the dropdown menu, and enter a value (number, text, color) for the property. Click
on the Insert button to add the selections to the Replace with field.
2. At this point, you can do one of the following:
-
Replace all items in the Find Result list – Click Replace All. All items in the
Find Result list are replaced.
100
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with AutoCAD Images
5
-
Replace specific items in the Find Result list – With the mouse, select one
or more items in the Find Result list and click Replace. The selected items
are replaced.
-
Replace item by item – Click Find Next until the item you want to replace is
selected. Click Replace. The item is replaced and automatically goes to the
next item in the list. Continue with either Find Next or Replace to go
through all items.
3. In the Search Options section, make the appropriate selections to further filter
your search. As you make your choices, the matches to your search and filter
are automatically updated in the Find Results section and the matching text is
now highlighted.
4. In the Look In section, select which graphics and fields should be searched the
text.
-
If you select Current Document or All Open Documents – The results are
automatically updated in the Find Results Window.
-
If you select Entire Project – The Find Results Controls section displays
and a status bar indicates the search is active.
 The Find Results section is updated and you can now work with results.
5.8.3.4
Displaying Find and Replace Results
 You have conducted a search and have one or more results displayed in the
Find Results section of the Find and Replace view. You wish to view the view
the results.

To view an item from the results list, double-click on the appropriate row.
 The following occurs for each item selected:
5.9
5.9.1
-
If the graphic is not already opened, the graphic opens in the Graphic
Editor
-
The associated element becomes active on the canvas, in the Element
Tree, and in the Property View or the Evaluation Editor, if it is a condition or
expression.
Working with AutoCAD Images
AutoCAD Files Overview
The Graphics Editor allows you to import any valid DWG and DXF AutoCAD files
for viewing and using with a graphic. When you import an AutoCAD file into the
Graphics Editor, it is first converted to a DWFx AutoCAD file format and then
imported or placed on the active graphic as an XPS element. Modification of an
XPS file is limited to the size and position of the image, and the overall stroke
thickness factor for the entire drawing.
The behind-the-scenes conversion occurs in the AutoCAD Importer application,
which opens once you select a DWG or DXF AutoCAD file to import or convert.
DWFx files do not need to be converted; therefore, when you either drag-and-drop
or insert the file onto the canvas, it will not go through the AutoCAD conversion
process, and instead will display directly on the canvas as an XPS element.
101
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with AutoCAD Images
AutoCAD File Types
The following is an overview of AutoCAD file types that must be converted prior to
importing into the Graphics Editor:

DWG (Drawing) - a binary file format for CAD data. It’s the Autodesk native
format.
DXF (Drawing Exchange Format) - a CAD data file format developed by
Autodesk to enable data interoperability between AutoCAD and other
programs.
AutoCAD file extension that does not require a conversion, prior to adding it to a
graphic:

DWFX - a file format developed by Autodesk for CAD data and is based on the
XML Paper Specification (XPS) from Microsoft.
Our software supports Read support of .DWG and .DXF files created using
Autodesk AutoCAD 2.5 through AutoCAD 2012, and Write support for DWG\DXF
files created in AutoCAD 12 through AutoCAD 2012.

Importing .DWFx Files
You can import a .DWFx AutoCAD file three ways—through the Context menu
when you right-click on the canvas, through the Home tab (Elements group), or by
dragging and dropping the converted AutoCAD file over any part of the canvas.
Once you have imported the graphic, it displays as an XPS element on the canvas,
which can then be saved as part of a Desigo CC graphic.
In the AutoCAD Importer application, using the Change Units dialog box, you can
specify the height and width of the drawing, as well as the unit type—for example,
centimeters, inches, or micro inches. You can also choose to apply the current
measurement units of the AutoCAD drawing to the graphic that the drawing is
inserted into.
When you are in the AutoCAD Importer application, and open a DWG or DXF file,
you will see check boxes for drawing layers. These check boxes let you specify
which layers of the drawing you want to make visible. However, if you want to
preview each level before selecting it, you can select the Hover check box, and
then move your cursor over each layer to temporarily reveal the layer.
NOTE:
AutoCAD conversion is only possible on installed clients, i.e., conversion is not
possible from the Desigo CC Web Server and Remote Server clients.
5.9.2
AutoCAD Importer
The AutoCAD Importer allows you to view supported AutoCAD files (DWG, DXF,
and DWFx), and then import the files into a graphic as an XPS element of a Desigo
CC graphic.
102
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with AutoCAD Images
5
AutoCAD Importer
5.9.3
Item
Description
1
Drawing Preview Area
Display an AutoCAD image based on DWG, DWFx, or DXF file types.
2
Size (Width/Height)
Display the dimension settings of the image in their proprietary units:
width and height.
3
Measurement Units
Display the type of measurement assigned to the image. Choices
include metric and English units.
4
Change Units Button
Open the Unit Settings dialog box, where you can select the type of
measurement (metric, English, etc.) for the image, and adjust its width
and height settings.
5
Apply Units To Graphic
Apply the selected units to the graphic image.
6
Hover
Review layer content before selecting it.
7
Layers Options
Select the layers in the image you want to display.
Working with the AutoCAD Importer
You can use AutoCAD Importer to convert your .DWG, DXF, and DWFx AutoCAD
files into a XPS element that is then automatically imported into the active graphic.
In this case, a separate .DWFx file is not created and saved. Instead, an XPS
element created and directly added to your graphic.
5.9.3.1
Converting AutoCAD Files
NOTE:
AutoCAD conversion is only possible on installed clients, i.e., conversion is not
possible from the Desigo CC Web Server and Remote Server clients.
103
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with AutoCAD Images
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you would like to convert an AutoCAD file
to an XPS element that you can import into a graphic.
1. Select Home > Elements group, and then click Import AutoCAD and XML
Image File
.
2. In the Open dialog box, select the file you want to convert.
3. Click Open.
 The AutoCAD file opens in the AutoCAD Importer.
4. (Optional) To make unit changes, do the following:
-
Check the Apply Units To Graphic box, and then click Change Units button.
The Unit Settings dialog box displays.
-
From the Select the units for image menu, select the unit of measurement
to apply. Manually enter the desired Width and Height values in the
respective fields.
-
Click OK. The Unit Settings dialog box closes.
5. From the Layers section, check the All checkbox or select the individual layers
you want to display.
6. Click OK.
7. If you made any Unit changes to the file, the Apply Units dialog box displays.
Click Yes to apply the changes.
 The file is converted and an XPS element is inserted into the active graphic.
NOTE:
If your drawing has non-Latin alphabet characters, for example Chinese
characters, after conversion those characters may display as “?” or boxes. If this
is the case, convert the files manually to a DWFx file format with the TrueView or
Design Review software. For more information, please refer to Troubleshooting
AutoCAD Conversion [ ➙ 247]
5.9.3.2
Importing a DWFx AutoCAD File
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Do one of the following:
-
Select Home > Elements group, and then click Import AutoCAD and XML
Image File
. The Open dialog box displays. Proceed to Step 2.
-
Right-click on the canvas and select Import > XAML. The Open dialog box
displays. Proceed to Step 2.
-
Drag-and-drop the DWFx file over an open graphic or canvas. The
AutoCAD file displays as an XPS element on the canvas.
2. From the Open dialog box, select the file you want to import, and click Open.
 The file is imported and displays as an XPS element on the canvas.
104
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
5.10
5.10.1
5
About Symbols
About Symbols
A graphics Symbol is a reusable graphic image that represents a piece of
equipment, floor, or any component or entity. They are stored in a library and are
typically used to display system object values. Symbols can be associated with one
or more object types in the Models & Functions application and bound to object
type properties to create substitutions in your graphics that provide a dynamic,
visual representation of changing values from the Desigo CC system.
In its simplest form, a Symbol is a graphic made up of drawing elements on the
graphic canvas in the Graphics Editor. Each drawing element has a series of
associated properties. These are the properties can be used to create
substitutions. Symbols can be associated with an object type
An object type is associated with a Symbol in the Models & Functions application.
When you drag-and-drop the Symbol onto a graphic, the Symbol displays the
system object values in runtime mode and in the Graphics Viewer. Animation is
supported through a series of graphics. Pre-defined symbols are stored in the
Management View’s library folders. These Symbols are visible and editable from
the Graphics Library Browser. Advanced users can create their own Symbols.
NOTE:
You can only create, edit, and delete Symbols in the Graphics application if you
have Create level access for the Graphics Library Browser. Create level access is
defined in the Security application.
Symbols and Object Types
The Symbol is manually associated to an object type in the Models & Functions
application and the properties of that object type are then associated to the
Symbol.
Symbols are not required to have object type associations or substitutions. A static
Symbol, for example, is not associated with an object type, nor does it have any
substitutions. The value of the static Symbol cannot change. Typically, this type of
Symbol is used for representing Symbols and used in multiple graphics. You can
nest a static Symbol within another Symbol. In the animation element, however, the
substitution default value is always used.
When you bind a Symbol to an object type in Models & Functions application each
Symbol property is associated to the address of the object type node and the
property identification number. This address is used in Runtime mode to view the
current property values for a Symbol instance.
Symbol Instances
When you drag and drop a Symbol onto a graphic canvas in the Graphics Editor,
you are placing an “instance” or a copy of all the elements and substitution
properties associated with the Symbol onto the graphic. When you save a graphic
that has a Symbol associated with it, only the referenced Symbol and the
associated properties are stored. That means, if a change is made to the Symbol,
then that change will ripple through to the graphic in Runtime mode.
Within a graphic, a selected Symbol instance can be resized, repositioned, and
rotated via the context menu. These changes only affect the Symbol instance on
105
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
the graphic, but not the actual Symbol stored in the Graphics Library Browser. The
Symbol stored in the browser is sized according to the elements it consists of.
You can replace a Symbol of an existing Symbol instance with another Symbol by
simply selecting the Symbol instance on a graphic and replacing it with a selected
Symbol from the Symbol Library. The object type and substitution associations will
be kept. For example, you can replace a fan Symbol with a pump Symbol on a
graphic and not lose any of the values you wish to view. A Symbol associated with
a Function type, can be associated with a specific Style, so that when that Style is
selected in the Symbol Style Filter, the default Symbol associated with that Style
type, displays on the canvas.
Symbol and Symbol Instance Attributes
Graphic Symbols have the following attributes:
 Are initiated, evaluated, and edited in the Graphics Editor.

Associated to object types in the Models & Functions application and support
property substitutions.

Composed of drawing elements and images.

Have names and are stored as XAML streams
Have layers.
Saved and archived for retrieval from the Graphics Library Browser.


Cannot be resized; a Symbol Instance, however, can be resized.
 Have a background color, but, a Symbol instances has no background color.
A Symbol instance is a Symbol that has been added to and displays in a graphic. It
is essentially a copy of the originating Symbol--a graphic page and all the elements
associated with it. The exception is that any layers in the original Symbol are
removed from the Symbol instance.

Symbol versus Symbol Instance
Symbols, when deposited onto a graphic, become Symbol instances. To
understand some of the attribute differences between the two, see the following
table:
Symbol
Symbol Instance
Composed of drawing elements and images.
Occurrences of an existing Symbol.
Has a name and is stored as a XAML stream.
Supports background color.
Transparent by default; color background not supported.
Can have layers.
Have no layers. Removes any existing layers.
Can’t be resized
Resizable.
Can contain other Symbols (nested).
Table of Symbol and Symbol Attributes
5.10.2
Generic Symbol
A generic Symbol is a concept that allows you to create one type of Symbol that
can support an object that has 1, 2, or more properties with changing values.
Depending on the object, the Symbol will not display the elements of the graphic
that do not have a data point associated them.
For example, you want to create one Symbol that you can associate with either a
1-stage pump or a 2-stage pump. A Symbol is created for the 2-stage pump.
106
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
5
This is done by extending the expression syntax with the use of the question mark
in the expression. For each property, you create,, you add another
<data pointRef> | <Value> (‘?’[<DefaultValue> | <Alternatedata pointRef>])*
The Generic Symbol Extended Substitutions table below, is an example of using
the “?” in an expression applied to a text element.
Generic Symbol Substitution Syntax Examples
Expression in a Text
Element
Substitution if First
Reference Exists
System1:Test_AI_1_1
System1:Test_AI_1_1?
System1:Test_AI_1_1 ?
3.14
Substitution if First Reference
does not Exist
#ENG
Value of
System1:Test_AI_1_1
Hides text element
3.14
System1:Test_AI_1_1?”T
rue”
True
System1:Test_AI_1_1 ?
False
False
System1:Test_AI_1_1
?System1:Test_AI_1_2
Value of System1:Test_AI_1_2
System1:Test_AI_1_1?
System1:Test_AI_1_2?5.7
Value of System1:Test_AI_1_2, if
it exists. If it doesn’t exist, -5.7
Notes on Extended Syntax:
 The question mark “?” can be used 0..n times, where the default value or
alternate data point reference is optional.
5.10.3

Spaces are allowed to the left or to the right around the ”?” .

The expression uses either the default value (to the left of the “?”) or the
alternate data point reference, following the “?”, when the default value doesn’t
exist.

The element is hidden when the default value (to the left of the “?”) doesn’t
exist and there is nothing after the question mark. The element is hidden when
this applies to any one of the expressions in any evaluation type that is used.
This includes the Multiple evaluations which can have many expressions.

The existence of the references is evaluated from left to right. For performance
reasons, the alternate data point reference (value after the “?”) is evaluated
only when the left part doesn’t exist. This means that it takes more time when
the left part doesn’t exist. For an expression like “data point1?data point2?data
point3?” it can take up to 3 sequential, round trips until the element is finally
hidden when none of the data points exist.
Object Referencing and Symbols
Symbols are associated with objects from within System Browser, so that when
you drag-and-drop a Symbol onto a graphic, the Symbol Instance displays the
system object values in runtime mode and in the Graphics Viewer.
Object referencing for a Symbol Instance is viewable and can be manually
referenced in the SymbolInstance Properties of an active instance on your canvas.
Navigate to the Symbol Instance properties and in the Object Reference field, view
or type the desired reference. See below to understand or properly enter object
referencing:
107
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
Association to an Object
The Syntax for a Symbol Instance associated to an Object:
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode;
Association to an Object with a Specific Model Property
The Syntax for a Symbol Instance associated to an object with a specific Model
property:
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode;.Present_Value
Associated to an Object with a specific Function Property
The Syntax for a Symbol Instance associated to an object with a specific Function
property:
MySystem.MyView:MyTree.MyNode;@Cmd
5.10.4
Symbols Styles and Function
When you create a graphic and add a data point object to the graphic, the Symbol
that has been designated as the Default Symbol associated with the data point
object is placed on the graphic.
Symbols associated with a data point object's Function, can have a Style assigned
to them and also have an assigned default Symbol for the Style. A Style can be a
way to assign all 2-dimensional Symbols to the 2D Style or a 3-dimentional
Symbol to a 3D Style, for example. The Style assigned to the Symbol, however, is
only valid for the particular Function of the object.
Each Style can have one default Symbol per Function. And, a Symbol can only
belong to one Style at a time. For example, if a Symbol is the default Symbol the
style 2D, and then you change the assignment of that Symbol to style 3D. Now the
Symbol is assigned to the 3D style, and no longer assigned to the 2D style. If there
are other Symbols associated with the style 2D, one of those remaining Symbols
become the default Symbol for style 2D.
Assigning and Creating Style
Symbol Styles are created and assigned in the Model & Functions application.
When you are in the Models & Functions tab for a particular data point's Object
Model, the Symbols browser for the object displays all the assigned Symbols. If
you right-click on a Symbol, you have the option of setting the Symbol as the
objects Default Symbol, or, you can select a Style that the selected Symbol should
belong to. For more information on assigning Symbols and Styles, please refer to
Assigning Symbols Using the Library Browser.
You set the Default Symbol for a Style in the Models and Functions application.
When you right-click on a Symbol, in the Object Model or Functions Symbol
Library, and click Set as Default, that Symbol becomes the Default Symbol for the
Style in that library and the Default icon
displays on it.
The context menu that displays when you right-click on a Symbol in the Symbols
browser, is where you can also create a new style for the Symbols. When naming a
new Style, you cannot use the name "Any," nor can you use the following
characters in the Style name: \ / : ? * ^ " < > | .
Clearing a Style
Styles are automatically removed from the context menu if there are no Symbols in
any of the Functions that use the particular Style.
108
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
5
When a Symbol belongs to a Style the right-click context menu displays the option
to Clear Style. When this option is selected, the Symbol is removed from that Style.
If the Symbol was the Default Symbol for that Style, another Symbol with the same
Style becomes the default Symbol for the Style and the Default Item icon displays
on that Symbol.
Selecting a Default Style Symbol to Display on a Graphic
You can select a Symbol Style within the Graphics Editor so that the subsequent
drag and drop of objects will use the selected style. From the Ribbon's Options tab,
the Symbol Options group allows you to select a Symbol Style from a drop-down
menu so that the Symbol(s) associated with the subsequent drag and drop of the
object, will display the assigned Symbol to the selected Style. So, if you are
creating a 3 dimensional representation of something, you will want to apply the 3D
Style, so that all the objects you drag and drop onto the canvas will represent the
associated 3 dimensional version of that objects Symbol.
When a Symbol instance or object from System Browser is dropped on the canvas,
the default Symbol corresponding to that Style group displays on the canvas. If
there is no Symbol related to that Style, then the default Symbol from another Style
group is displayed. If Any is selected from Symbol Style filter, then the default
Symbol which does not have a Style is displayed. If all Symbols belong to a Style,
then the default of Symbol of another group is displayed.
"Replace" Symbol Context Menu Option
You can replace a Symbol on the canvas with another Symbol from the Functions
Symbol library or the Object Model Symbol library associated with the object. From
the Symbol Style menu, select the Symbol Style you want to view and use to
replace the current Symbol. When you right-click on a Symbol instance on the
graphic, the Symbol Instance > Replace option displays in the context menu if
there are Symbols that belong to the same Style in the Object Model or Function as
the Symbol on the graphic. If the Filter is enabled (grey background), the Replace
option displays the Style and Symbol options from both the Object Model and
Function Libraries. If the Filter is not enabled, then only the Function Symbols
display, however, if there are no Symbols in the Functions library, then, the Object
Model library displays. When you click on a Symbol from the library that displays,
the Symbol on the canvas is automatically replaced by the selected Symbol.
5.10.5
Symbol Property Substitution

Symbol property substitutions are placeholders for the element properties that
must be different for each instance of a particular symbol.

Substitution values are stored per Symbol Instance, rather than per Symbol.

Substitutions allow you define what a Symbol displays on the graphic and are
visible in the Property View.

Element property substitution enables animation for that element.

The substitution name and writable value display in the Property View under
the Substitutions category.
Substitution Syntax
A substitution is created by adding curly brackets, “{...}” into a properties evaluation
of a graphic element within a Symbol.
The syntax for property substitution is as follows:
Property Prefix {[*] [Substitution Name] [=SubstitutionDefaultValue]} PropertyPostFix (?)
109
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
Substitution Parameters

Each Symbol property and its attributes or only some of the attributes can have
a substitution
Star Substitution
Star substitution is used as the connection between the drag-and-drop source
reference and the internal Symbol substitution mapping.
When you drag-and-drop a data point instance (e.g. “AI_1”) to the Graphics Editor,
an associated Symbol instance is placed on the canvas, and Symbol instance
property “Object Reference” is set to the source reference, “AI_1” in this case.
NOTE: The “Object Reference” property can also be manually changed.
The object reference property automatically copies the value to and updates all star
substitutions. This resolves all Symbol expressions in the final object references.
The references can be seen in the Value Simulator View.

A substitution becomes a star-substitution when the name is empty or starts
with a “*”.

The empty substitution “{ }” is equivalent to “{*}”.





A Symbol can have more than one star-substitution. They are all linked to the
object reference property and are all read-only.
Examples for star-substitutions: { }, {*}, {*Obj}
Star-substitutions are read-only. The value can only be modified by changing
the “Object Reference” property.
Name
– Each substitution has an optional name
– The name is displayed between the curly brackets {Substitution Name}
– The syntax name is not case-sensitive.
Default Value
– A substitution can only have one default value. and an optional default
value.
NOTE: If a Symbol property contains the same substitution more than once,
but with different default values, the last non-empty default value is used.

The following characters are not allowed within the substitution brackets: “-“
and “}”
Substitution Examples
Substitution
Substitution Name
Substitution Default Value
{Offset}
“Offset“
(none)
{offset}
“Offset“
(none)
{Value Offset }
“Value Offset“
(none)
{Value Offset = }
“Value Offset“
(none)
{Value Offset =4}
“Value Offset“
“4“
{Value Offset =4 }
“Value Offset“
“4“
{Value Offset }
“Value Offset“
“ “ (one space)
{a=b =6}
“a“
“b=6”
{obj=1} {obj}
“obj”
“1”
{obj=1} {obj=2}
“obj”
“2”
{}
*
(none)
110
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
{*}
*
(none)
{*Alarm}
*Alarm
(none)
5
Resolved Expression
If a child element of a Symbol instance is selected, the Evaluation Editor displays
the original expression along with the resolved expression.
5.10.5.1
Multiple Substitutions
An expression can contain many substitutions.
The expression {Object}.{Property} creates two substitutions: “Object” and
“Property”
A substitution can only have one default value. If a Symbol contains the same
substitution more than once, but with different default values, the last non-empty
default value is used.
The expression {obj=3}{Obj}.{Prop} created the substitutions obj with default
value of “3” and Prop with no default value.
5.10.5.2
Substitution Direction

Each Symbol Instance has its own set of Substitutions properties, which can be
viewed in the Properties view, when the Symbol Instance is selected.
Direction
The Direction substitution property allows you to change the direction of the active
Symbol Instance on the canvas while you are in Test mode. To use the Direction
property on an active Symbol Instance, press the left-mouse, and then also press
the right-mouse button, the Symbol Instance direction moves by one increment each right-mouse click changes the direction of the instance on the canvas by one
increment. The incremental values cycle from the values of 0 to 4.
5.10.6
5.10.6.1
Working with Symbols
Symbol Configuration Workflow
You can add objects and Symbols to your graphic. There are a number You have a
graphic open in the Graphics Editor and want to add an object or a Symbol to your
graphic.
1. Create a Symbol in the Graphics Editor.
2. Add elements and configure the Symbol properties as needed. Configure the
Symbol for substitutions and animation in the Evaluation View.
3. Save the Symbol to the appropriate project library in the Graphics Editor.
111
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
5.10.6.2
Associating a Symbol with an Object Type
 You want to associate a Symbol with an object model, so that any instance of
that object model on a graphic, will display the associated Symbol.
 You are in System Browser, have selected ManagementView > System
Settings > Libraries.
 You are in Engineering mode.
1. Navigate to and expand the system library that the object model is associated
with, for example, BA,
2. The associated library objects display.
3. Expand the Specific Devices objects tree and then select the appropriate
system library block.
4. Expand the Object Models folder.
5. Click on the object model you want to associate a Symbol to.
6. From the Models & Functions tab, expand the Symbols section.
7. Do one of the following:
-
Open a second instance of Desigo CC by clicking Summary Bar’s Activate
System Manager
. From the second instance of the software, select
System Browser > Management View > System Settings >Libraries folder,
and then navigate to the appropriate Symbols folder.
-
Open an instance of Microsoft Windows Explorer and navigate to the
appropriate Symbols library in the \\GMSProjects\Project\Libraries folder.
8. Click on the Symbol you want to associate with the object model, and then
drag-and-drop the Symbol to the Models & Functions Symbols section.
 The Symbol displays in the Symbols section.
9. To make the Symbol the default Symbol, right-click on the Symbol and select
Set as Default.
 The Symbol is now the default Symbol that will display when this object type is
used on a graphic.
5.10.6.3
Creating a Symbol
NOTE: You must have Graphic Editor Application rights to create, edit, or delete a
Symbol. Graphic Editor level access is defined by the Security application.
 You want to create a new Symbol.
1. In the System Browser > Application View > Graphics.
2. In the Primary pane, click the Operating button to switch to Engineering mode.
3. From the File menu, select New Symbol
 A blank, tabbed Symbol template displays in the Graphics Editor work area.
112
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
5
4. Draw, design, and assign evaluations and mappings to the Symbol as
necessary.
5. From the Graphics toolbar, click Save
.
 The Save dialog box displays.
6. From the Project folder, navigate to the appropriate library and click on the
associated Symbols folder.
7. Enter a name in the Name field, and click Save.
 The Symbol is saved in the designated Symbols folder in two file formats: PNG
and .CCS. The Symbol can be previewed in the Graphics Library Browser.
5.10.6.4
Deleting a Symbol
 A Symbol can only be removed from a project by deleting it from the
[CustomerProjects] folder.
If there are existing Symbol instances with references to the deleted Symbol, the
Symbol instance displays the following Reference Error icon:
1. Navigate to the x:\yyyyyCustomerProjects folder, until you locate the Symbols
folder that contains the Symbol(s) you want to delete.
2. Right-click on the Symbol you want to delete, and select Delete from the
context menu. You can also use the SHIFT key to delete multiple Symbols.
 The Symbol is deleted from the project completely.
5.10.6.5
Assigning a Data Point to a Symbol Instance on a Graphic
NOTE: You must have Graphic Editor Application rights to create, edit, or delete a
Symbol. Graphic Editor level access is defined by the Security application.
data points are assigned to Symbol instances on a graphic in order to display realtime values.
 In the Graphics Editor, you are in Design mode and have a graphic open that
contains one or more Symbol instances.
 You have selected the Symbol instance you want to assign the data point to.
1.
In System Browser > Management View > Project > Field Networks >
Hardware navigate to the data point you want you assign to the Symbol
instance.
2. Drag-and-drop the data point over the Symbol instance on your graphic.
 In the Properties View, the Symbol Instance > Object Reference property is
highlighted and the data point address displays.
113
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
3. Optional. Update the Symbol Instance > Precision and Unit properties, as
needed.
4. Optional. From the Home tab, in the Modes group, click Test
to switch
modes and verify that you can see the live values from the data point on the
graphic.
 The Symbol instance displays the current value of the data point.
5. Repeat with each Symbol Instance as needed.
5.10.6.6
Modifying an Existing Symbol
NOTE: You must have Graphic Editor Application rights to create, edit, or delete a
Symbol. Graphic Editor level access is defined by the Security application. Of you
do not have the appropriate access rights, the Symbol will open in Read-Only
mode .

The Graphics Editor it open and you have an existing Symbol and you want to
modify.
1. To modify an existing Symbol do one of the following:
-
In the Graphics Editor, navigate to the Graphics Library Browser, and rightclick on the Symbol you want to edit. Click Edit from the context menu.
-
Navigate to the appropriate Symbol instance on an open graphic and rightclick on the instance. Click Edit from the context menu.
 In all cases, the Symbol opens in the Graphics Editor workspace and is
available for editing.
2. Make any modifications to the Symbol.
3. When you are finished, from the Ribbon, click
, and then click Yes from the
Reload dialog window.
4. The Symbol is updated in the Graphics Library Browser and all changes are
saved.
5.10.6.7
Saving a Graphic or Symbol
 You have a graphic or Symbol open in the Graphics Editor and would like to
save your changes.

From the File menu, click one of the following:
-
Save: Saves the active graphic or Symbol with the current name.
-
Save As: Displays the Save As dialog box. Enter a Name for the graphic or
Symbol and navigate to the directory you where you want to store the
graphic.
-
Save All: Saves all the open graphics and Symbols with their current
names and storage locations.
114
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Symbols
5.10.6.8
5
Using a Symbol Instance
 You want to modify the originating Symbol of a Symbol Instance.
1. Navigate to the Symbol Instance on the graphic canvas you want to modify.
2. Right-click on the Symbol Instance.
 The context menu displays.
3. Select Symbol Instance and then Edit.
 The originating Symbol opens and displays as a tabbed graphic in the work
pane.
5.10.6.9
Using the Symbol Style Filter
The Symbol Style Filter allows you to select a Symbol Style to use for the ensuing
Symbol(s) instances you drag from System Browser and drop on to the canvas.
When you select a Style, the Symbol associated with that style in the function
associated with the data point displays. If that Style Symbol doesn't exist, then, the
next similar Style is taken. For more information on Style and Symbol selection,
see Symbols Styles and Function [ ➙108]
1. From the Options tab, Symbol Options group, select one of the Symbol Style
Filter options from the drop-down menu. The available options are projectspecific.
 The style chosen displays in the Style menu.
2. Drag the object or Symbol from System Browser or from the Library Browser
and drop it on the active canvas.
 The correct Symbol associated with the Style you selected for the objects
Function displays on the canvas.
5.10.6.10
Replacing Symbol Instances
When you right-click on a Symbol instance on the canvas, you can view and
replace the selected Symbol instance with a Symbol from the same Object Model
or Function library. Using the Ribbon's Symbol Style Filter you can determine
which Symbols will be displayed for you to choose from.

You have a Symbol instance on the canvas and you want to replace it with
another Symbol from the same Object Model or Functions library.
1. From the Ribbon's Option tab > Symbol Options group, click on the arrow of
the drop-down menu to select a Style for the Symbols you want to view.
2. (Optional) Click the Symbol Filter so that it is enabled (icon background is gray)
to display the Symbols from both the Object Model and the Function libraries. If
unselected, only the Symbols from the Function library display. If however,
there are no associated Symbols in the Function libary, only then will the
Symbols from the Object Model display.
3. Right-click on the Symbol instance on the canvas that you want to replace.
 The context menu displays.
4. With your mouse, hover over Symbol Instance, and then hover over Replace.
 The Symbol library with the associated Symbols display.
115
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Graphics Templates
5. Click on the Symbol in the library you want to replace the Symbol on the
canvas with.
 The Symbol on the canvas is updated and replaced with the selected Symbol
from the library.
5.10.7
Troubleshooting Symbols Error Messages
Symbol error messages display when there is either a communication issue or
engineering (configuration) issue. These error messages display on a graphic in
the Graphics Viewer, or in the Graphics Editor Test or Runtime modes.

# COM (Communication Fault) - The data point exists; however, COVs are not
coming through.

#ENG (Configuration Fault) The issue is related to how the data point was
configured or engineered; it is either invalid or does not exist.
Multiple expressions
Valid data points still animate the corresponding element properties even when the
element shows the error grid.
Example: An ellipse animates the angle with a valid data point and the Fill color
with an invalid data point. In the Graphics Viewer the ellipse displays as rotated
with the error grid.
Selection
An element with the #ENG error grid is still selectable but only the valid data points
are used for the secondary selection (or primary selection from a double-click).
Additional Notes


5.11
5.11.1
If one of the expressions has no read-access – the entire element is hidden.
The Graphics Viewer selection behavior can also be tested in the editor
Runtime mode.
About Graphics Templates
About Graphic Templates
Overview
Desigo CC provides you with standard BACnet TEC graphics for various
applications. You can also create template graphics for TEC applications.
In Desigo CC, the applications are stored in the following area: Management View
> Project > System Settings > Libraries.
Viewing Graphic Templates in the Library Browser
You can view graphic templates in the Library Browser, accessed from either the
System Browser or the Graphics Editor.
In System Browser, clicking on a graphic template library folder displays the Library
Browser in either the primary or secondary pane, where you can view and browse
all the graphic templates for a particular library in either a thumbnail view or a list
view.
116
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Graphics Templates
5
If you click on a Graphic Templates folder, the associated graphic templates
display in the Default pane (Operation mode) or the Graphics pane (Engineering
mode).
However, in System Browser, if you click on a specific graphic template and you
are in:

Operating mode, the graphic template displays in the primary or secondary
pane.

Engineering mode, the graphic displays in the work area of the Graphics Editor.
Mapping Functions to a Graphic Template
Graphic templates are used to map to data points so that you can see the data
point COV values representing a piece of equipment or an object.
5.11.2
5.11.2.1
Working with Graphic Templates
Creating a Graphic Template
 You have created the GraphicTemplates library folder in your project
directory.
1. Select System Browser, Management View > System Settings directory, and
click on the Libraries folder.
 The Libraries sub-folders display.
2. Navigate to the desired library folder where you want to add your new graphic
template, and click on its graphictemplates folder .
3. In the Primary pane, click the Graphics tab.
 The Graphics toolbar and the Library Browser display.
4. From the Graphics toolbar, click Edit
.
 The Graphics Editor displays in the Primary pane.
5. From the Graphics toolbar, click the CreateNew button, and click Create New
and select New Graphic Template.
NOTE: If you choose to create a new graphic template using either the File
menu or the Quick Access toolbar, the template will not automatically be saved
to the GraphicTemplates directory. Instead, when you save the graphic
template, you will have to navigate to the graphic template directory.
 A blank, tabbed graphic template displays in the Graphics Editor work area.
6. Create and design the graphic template as necessary.
7. From the Graphics toolbar, click the Save As button.
 The graphic template is saved to the graphic template folder in System
Browser, and the Library Browser, and automatically reloads a modified
thumbnail. Additionally, the following are created in the GraphicTemplates
library when you save a graphic template: a .CCT file, and a .PNG file.
See also
 Creating a Graphic Template Library [ ➙118]
117
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Graphics Templates
5.11.2.2
Creating a Graphic Template Library
 You want to create a Graphic Template library in an existing project library and
you are in Engineering mode.
1. Select System Browser >Management View > Project > System Settings >
Libraries.
2. Navigate to the appropriate project library folder and then click on the Library
object where you want to add the new graphic template library folder.
3. From the Library Configurator tab, click Add New Object
.
4. Select New child of the type Graphics Template Folder.
 The New library block pane displays.
5. Enter the Version number, Revision, Date, and Notes information, as needed.
6. Click Save Data
.
7. The Create New Object dialog box displays, with Graphic Templates as the
default Description.
8. (Optional) In the Description field, highlight Graphic Templates and type a new
name for the folder.
9. Click OK.
 In System Browser, the GraphicTemplates folder now displays in the root
folder of your selected project library. When you click on the folder and switch
to Operating mode, the Graphics Templates Library Browser displays in the
Primary pane.
5.11.2.3
Deleting a Graphic Template
A graphic template can be permanently deleted from the Graphics Editor Library
Browser view or you can manually navigate to the file location in your Windows
Explorer and delete the template from there. To delete the graphic template from
the Library Browser, do the following:
 You are in the Graphics Editor, in Engineering mode, and the Library Browser
is displayed.
1. In the Library Browser view, from the Filter by Graphic type drop-down menu,
select Graphic Template
2.
.
Navigate to the graphic template library that contains the file you want to
delete.
3. Right-click on the graphic template you want to delete and select Delete.
 The graphic template is deleted from the entire project.
5.11.2.4
Deleting a Graphic Template Library
 You want to delete a Graphic Template library from your project. You are in
Engineering mode.
1. Select System Browser > Management View > System Settings > Libraries.
2. Select the graphic template node you want to delete.
118
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Graphics Templates
3. From the Library Configurator tab, click Delete
5
.
4. Click Yes, when you are prompted to confirm you want to delete the selected
node and all its children.
 The library node and any children graphic templates are deleted.
5.11.2.5
Graphic Templates Browser
Graphic Templates Browser (Thumbnail View)
Item
Name
Description
2
Thumbnail\List View Toggle
Toggle between a thumbnail or List view of the
graphic template objects library.
3
Search Filter
Search the Graphic Templates libraries and limit
the objects displayed.
6
Library Browser display pane. Display available Symbols and graphic templates
depending on category or search criteria.
7
Graphic Icons
Display Thumbnails of available Symbol(s) or
graphic templates, depending on which mode you
have selected.
8
Move the slider with your mouse to increase and
decrease the magnification of the selected
graphic template icon for viewing within the
Graphic Templates Browser view. The magnified
value displays as you move the slider and has a
minimum magnification of 30% and a maximum
of 300%.
The slider displays only when you are in the
Thumbnail view.
In the Graphic Templates Browser’s List View, the graphic templates are listed by
Name, Library, and File. A thumbnail preview is not displayed.
Graphic Templates Browser (List View Fields)
Name
Description
Name
Display the graphic template file names.
Library
Display the library name where the graphic template is
stored.
File
Display the full path of the graphic template’s location.
119
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Graphics Library Browser
5.11.2.6
Opening an Existing Graphic Template
You can open a graphic template in several different ways, depending on where
you are in the Desigo CC software. The list below describes how you can access
or open an existing template graphic from the following locations:
System Browser

Navigate to Management View > System Settings > Libraries and then locate
the graphic templates library from the appropriate library. When you select the
graphic template folder, the graphic templates display in the primary pane. To
edit the template, from the toolbar, click
. The graphic template opens in
the Graphics Editor.

Drag-and-drop a graphic template from a graphic templates library over the
Graphics Editor Ribbon. The associated template graphic displays in the
tabbed work area of the Graphics Editor.

Drag-and-drop a data point node over the Graphics Editor Ribbon. The
associated template graphic displays in the tabbed work area of the Graphics
Editor.

Drag-and-drop a data point with a mapped graphic template over the Graphic
Editor Ribbon. All related graphics and graphic templates open and display in
the tabbed work area of the Graphics Editor.
Graphics Editor
5.11.2.7

File menu – Click Open and navigate to the graphic template directory.

Library Browser view – Right-click on a graphic template thumbnail, and select
Edit.

Library Browser view - Drag-and-drop a graphic file template from the Library
Browser. The graphic displays in the tabbed work area.
Testing Graphic Templates
You can test a graphic template by dragging a data point instance from System
Browser, into the Value Simulator view.
 You have a graphic template open in the work area of the Graphic Editor.
1. From the Home tab, in the Modes group, click Test mode
.
2. From the Value Simulator view, expand the Automatic section, and check the
Run Value Simulator check box.
3. Expand the Graphic Template section.
4. From System Browser, navigate to your data point and drag-and-drop the data
point onto the Value Simulator’s Object Reference field.
5. Click the Assign button.
 Any elements that have evaluations associated with them, now display the
COV values of the data point instance.
5.12
The Graphics Library Browser
120
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Graphics Library Browser
5.12.1
5
Library Browser (Graphics Editor)
Depending on which view you are in, Symbols or graphic templates, the Library
Browser view provides you with a thumbnail preview of the available graphic
objects.
Library Browser View (Thumbnail View)
Item
Name
Description
1
Library Browser display pane.
Displays available Symbols and graphic
templates depending on category or search
criteria.
2
Filter by Library
Allows you to display all the Symbols or graphic
templates in your project libraries or just display
the graphic objects from the library selected in
the drop-down menu.
3
Symbols\Graphic Templates
Toggle
Allows you to switch between displaying and
121
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Graphics Library Browser
viewing Symbols
or graphic template
library objects in the view.
4
Thumbnail\List View Toggle
Allows you to toggle between a thumbnail or
List view of the graphic objects in the Library
Browser pane.
5
Search Filter
Allows you to search the Symbol and Graphic
Templates libraries and limit the objects
displayed.
6
Graphic Icons
Thumbnails of available Symbol(s) or graphic
templates, depending on which mode you have
selected. The selected Symbol or Graphic
Template is highlighted..
7
Allows you to move the slider with your mouse
to increase and decrease the magnification of
the selected Symbol icon for viewing within the
Symbol Browser view. The magnification value
displays as you move the slider and has a
minimum magnification of 30% and a maximum
of 300%.
The slider displays only when you have toggled
to the Symbol Thumbnail view.
In the Library Browser’s List view, the Symbols and graphic templates are listed by
Name, Library, and File. A thumbnail preview is not displayed.
Library Browser View (List View Fields)
Name
Description
Name
Displays the Symbol or graphic template file names.
Library
Displays the library name where the Symbol or graphic
template is stored.
File
Displays the full path of the Symbol or graphic
template’s location.
Style
Displays the default style associated with the Symbol
122
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Graphics Library Browser
5.12.2
5.12.2.1
5
Working with the Library Browser
Toggling Between Thumbnail and List View
 The Library Browser allows you to view your library objects in either a
thumbnail view or in a list view. You can toggle between the two modes.

Navigate to the Library Browser, and click Toggle
.
 The Library Browser changes the displayed view of the library objects.
5.12.2.2
Adding a Symbol to a Graphic
Existing project Symbols are added to a graphic from the Library Browser.
 You have a graphic open and you want to insert one or more Symbols on the
graphic in the work area view.
1. In the Library Browser, from the Filter Type drop-down menu, click Symbol
.
 A list of all available Symbols display in the Library Browser view.
2. (Optional). To change the display from either List or Thumbnail mode, click
Thumbnail\List toggle
.
 The Symbols display view in the Library Browser is updated.
3. In the Type to Filter field, type the name of a specific Symbol
4. From the Filter by Library drop-down menu, select a library to search. You can
also select <All> to search through all available libraries in your project.
 The Symbol matches automatically display in the view as you enter the
text.
5. Do one of the following to add a Symbol(s) to a graphic:
-
Right click on the Symbol(s) and click Insert from the context menu. The
Symbol(s) are added to the graphic. To select multiple Symbols, press the
CTRL key and click the Symbols you want to add from the Symbol Browser
display.
-
Click on the Symbol (s) and drag it to the active graphic.
 All the Symbols on the graphic are listed in the Element Tree as a
SymbolInstance; the child elements are listed below the Symbol Instance. If
you click on a Symbol on the graphic, the Properties view displays the
SymbolInstance properties.
5.12.2.3
Filtering in the Library Browser View
The Library Browser displays the available Symbols and graphic templates from
the libraries in your project. There are two filter fields for you to use when searching
for the files. The first filter allows you to enter text to search by name, and the
second filter allows you to select a specific library to search in, or, you can select
<All> to search in all the libraries.
123
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Graphics Library Browser
Symbol Names
The naming of the Symbols follows the convention of:
Type_Style_Description1_Description2_Description_3, etc. In the Library Browser,
you can type your search for Symbols by name, using the “*” in place of the “_”
found in the actual Symbol name.
For example, to search for the Symbol, DYN_3D_Damper_Air_Analog
Invert_Vertical_001, in the name filter, you type “DYN*3D*Damper*Air…” as you
type the text in the filter field, the Symbols will automatically filter themselves and
only display the matching Symbols.
Below is a table displaying the Type and Style terms used in naming Symbols. The
list of description words is just a sampling, as the descriptive naming options are
too many to display.
Filter Search Words for Symbol Names
5.12.2.4
Field
Options Samples
Type
DYN – Dynamic
STA – Static
SAM – Sample Graphic
Style
2D
2D/3D
3D
Description
Analog
Axial
Binary
Cooling
Chiller
Damper
Duct
Energy
Fan
Filter
Heating
Humidifier
Mixing
Pipe
Sensor
Services
Roof
Deleting a Symbol or Graphic Template
Symbols and graphic templates can be deleted from the project libraries in the
Graphics Editor Library Browser.
1. From the Library Browser, filter and then navigate to the Symbol or graphic
template you want to delete in the Library Browser pane.
2. Right-click on the Symbol or graphic template you want to delete.
 The Library Browser context menu displays.
3. Select Delete.
124
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
 The file is removed from the Library Browser and the project files permanently.
5.12.2.5
Inserting Symbols on a Graphic
 You have a graphic open and you want to insert one or more Symbols on the
graphic in the Work Area view.
 You have selected the Symbol library and or used the filter to display the
relevant Symbols.
 NOTE: To select multiple Symbols, press the CTRL key and with your mouse,
click on the Symbols you want to add.

Right-click on the Symbol and click Insert from the context menu.
 The Symbol is added to the graphic, and all the properties, including
substitutions, if any, are listed in the Symbol Instance Properties view, under
Substitutions
5.13
5.13.1
Overview of Elements
About Elements
The Graphics Editor provides you with a set of drawing elements that let you create
shapes, complex graphics, templates, and Symbols or import image, .XML, and
AutoCAD files. Elements can be formatted, they have properties that are
configured in the Properties view, and you can display a descriptive tooltips when
you move your mouse over them on the canvas.
List of Drawing and Import Elements
The following drawing elements are available:

Animation

Ellipse

Line

Path

Rectangle

Polygon

Text
The following elements are available for importing graphic files:

Import Raster Image File

Import AutoCAD and XML File

Start AutoDesk Application for AutoCAD File Conversion
Element Properties
Elements have properties associated with them that are configured in the
Properties view. Each property belongs to a category of properties. You can move
125
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
your mouse over a property listed in the Properties view, to display a brief
description of the property, or for a more detailed description of the property,
including property type, allowable input values, and the default value, click Show
Property Detail
.
Every element property can be animated. The animation is implemented by
creating evaluations for a property. The evaluation value is always added to the
design value.
Element Tooltips
You can create a tooltip to display over an element on a graphic in the Graphics
Viewer. The tooltips are created in the Graphics Editor, in the Properties view via
the General > Tooltip property. The text box contains any descriptive text entered
into the Tooltip property.
Active Elements
When an element is active, the handles that surround the element are visible on
the canvas. These handles are used for rotating and resizing. The line and path
elements, also display start and end handles for editing purposes
Selecting Elements
An element can be selected from either the Element Tree view, when Show all
Elements
is enabled, or from the canvas by clicking the element. To select
multiple elements you press CTRL key, and click on each element you want to
select. From the canvas, you can also use the rubber band, a tool that allows you
to click and drag your mouse to enclose element(s) in the blue, bounding rectangle
created by the movement of the mouse. Upon release of the mouse, all elements in
the bounding rectangle are selected and active.
Moving Elements
Elements or guidelines can be moved around the graphic canvas in Design mode
using the mouse to click-and-drag the element. A grayed-clone of the element
remains in the original spot on the canvas, with the original attributes applied, until
you release the mouse button. During a click-and-drag move, you can press the
ESC button if you change your mind about the move.
Copying and Formatting Elements
There are a number of ways to apply and re-use formatting from one drawing
element to another on an active canvas.

Re-Use Format – Allows you to apply formatting of a selected element to the
next drawn element on the canvas. This is done by clicking on an element on
the canvas so that the handles are visible, and then selecting a drawing
element from the ribbon to draw. The newly drawn element will take on the
126
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
formatting of the selected element. For example, if you have just used the
Ellipse element to draw an ellipse on your graphic, and you would like to add a
rectangle with the same shading and formatting as the ellipse element, simply
click on the ellipse on the graphic so that the handles and adorners display,
and then select the Rectangle element from the canvas. The Rectangle
element takes on the color formatting of the Ellipse.

Copy Format – You can select the Copy Format
an element, and then click Paste Format
to copy the formatting of
icon to paste the formatting on one
or more elements on the canvas.
5.13.1.1
Element Angle Center
The angle center is the axis around which an element rotates in Runtime or Test
mode. The angle center is determined by the Angle Center X and Angle Center
coordinates in the Layout Properties of the Properties View.
When no values are set for the angle center, the angle center
is not visible on
the canvas.
5.13.1.2
Locking and Unlocking Elements
You can Lock an element, so that it cannot be selected, moved, or resized
inadvertently on the graphic canvas while working with other unlocked elements.
Elements are locked from the Element Tree view or from the graphic canvas via a
context menu that displays when you right-click on the element. An element,
however, is only Unlocked from the Element Tree view.
Locked elements have the following functionality:
 They are Locked from the Element Tree view or from the graphic canvas via a
context menu that displays when you right-click on an element.
5.13.2

They are only Unlocked from the Element Tree view.

A Locked element cannot be selected elected from within the Element Tree
view, can be moved, or resized on the graphic canvas.
About Element Handles
Element handles are control points attached to a vector drawing graphic that allow
you to control the size, shape, rotation, and position of the graphical element.
Handles are visible in Design and Test mode only, and they always appear over a
graphical element.
When you move elements, only the bounding rectangle handles of each element
are visible. When you rotate elements, both the rotating and moving handles are
visible.
In select and multi-select mode, only resize and rotation handles are visible. They
are also visible if the element width or height, or both, is zero. The size of a handle
does not change when you zoom in or out of a graphic.
127
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
Selection and Resizing Handles
All elements are surrounded by eight white selection and resizing handles: one in
each corner and an intermediate handle between the corners. When the Selection
handles display, the element(s) are considered active. You can also click and drag
each handle until the required size is reached. The Ellipse element below, shows
the eight selection and resizing handles. The top center selection handle is
attached to the green Rotational handle.
Start and End Nodes
Any element drawn on the canvas that has an open path, has a Start
and End
handle attached to it. Element examples include a line, or a rectangle. The Line
element below shows the green Start handle at the top of the line and the red End
handle at the bottom.
Cornering Radius Handles
The Rectangle element has a pair of cornering radius handles attached to it. These
handles allow you to curve the corners of the rectangle element. The Rectangle
element below shows the Corner Radius handles in the top, left corner of the
element. These handles control the rounding of all four corners simultaneously.
128
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
Rotational Handles
All elements have the green Rotational handle attached to a center selection
handle. The Rotational handle is displayed at the top of the polygon element
below.
5.13.3
Element Handle Table
Element Handles
Icon
Name
Function
Start Handle
Marks the beginning of a path.
End Handle
Marks the end of a path.
Cornering Radius Handle
Rounds the corners of a rectangle element.
Sizing Handle
Allows you to select an element(s) on the
canvas and click-and-drag to resize the
selected element(s). Each element is
surrounded by eight selection handles.
Rotational Handle
Rotates the element.
Angle Center
The axis around which an element rotates.
NOTE: This handle only displays on the
canvas when the Layout Properties, Angle X
and Angle Y, have values associated with
them.
Segment Handle
Separates two segments of a path.
Bezier Handle
Changes the curvature of a Bezier shape:
- Cubic Bezier Handle
- Quadratic Bezier Handle
Mid-Segment Handle
Each path segment has a start and an end
handle, by moving the Mid-Segment handle
you are moving both the Start and End
handles of that segment.
129
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.4
About Grids
Grids are patterns of equally spaced, non-printing, horizontal, vertical, and angular
lines or markers used to divide a graphic into equal sections. They help you align
your elements symmetrically, precisely, and angled for a 3D-like representation.
The grid lines include X-, Y-, and Z- lines. X sets the horizontal lines, Y sets the
vertical lines, and the Z- line, if Enable 3D Axis selected, sets the angular lines on
the grid.
When you adjust the grid and guideline settings for a graphic, the settings are
automatically stored for you, and will be applied to future graphics or Symbols you
create or work with.
Snap
You can force the elements to line up with the grid using the snap feature. With the
snap feature, your drawing elements are attracted, and attach themselves, to the
nearest gridline intersection—much like metal objects are drawn toward a magnet.
Snap makes it easier to create an accurate graphic.
The top left corner of a drawing element snaps to the gridline. When you select
more than one drawing element, only the main drawing element (the one under the
mouse) snaps into position. In the case of Symbol Instances that have an anchor
associated with them, then the anchor is snapped into position rather than the top
left corner of the Symbol.
By pressing and holding the SHIFT key while the snap feature is enabled, you can
drag a drawing element near or over a gridline without activating snap, which gives
you additional positioning choices on the canvas.
The Snap Now feature, enabled when you right-click on an element on the graphic,
automatically snaps all the selected elements and Symbol Instances to the nearest
grid intersection.
Pitch
On a grid, you can adjust three different pitch settings. The Pitch X and Pitch Y
settings allow you to adjust the distance between the gridlines. The Pitch Angle
setting determines the number of degrees an element on a graphic rotates before it
snaps into its next position. For example, if you set the Pitch Angle to 90 for a line
element you draw straight up and down on the canvas, and then rotate the
element, the line element will snap into position every 90 degrees as it revolves
around its center axis.
Offset
The origin of the grids is the top left corner of the canvas. Sometimes, however,
you might want to make the grid start from a particular spot on the canvas—for
example, a margin boundary. You can do this by adjusting the Offset X and Offset
Y settings, which control the distance from the starting point. You can use the
Offset Angle setting in unison with the Pitch Angle setting to determine the number
of degrees of rotation of a graphical element on the canvas.
Color
You can change the color of the grid by changing the value of the Stroke Color
using a hexadecimal color code, such as FFFF0000 (red), or by entering the name
of a color from the list of HTML Literal Word Colors [➙ 246]. Additionally, you can
reference a state text color defined in the corresponding Text Group of the
associated data point, using the following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value].
The syntax is case sensitive.
130
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
Styles
Grid styles refers to the look you can assign to your grid—either Lines or Markers.
When you select Lines, the grid pattern is more pronounced since more dots are
used to define the pattern. When you select Markers, the grid pattern is less
pronounced, though still visible, because fewer dots are used to define the pattern.
Additional Grid Information

Gridlines are not affected by mouse events.

Grids float over the elements on a graphic.
Grid settings are saved with the graphic.
Grid settings are unique for every graphic.




5.13.5
Grids are visible only in Design and Test modes.
Gridline stroke, or thickness, does not change with different zoom factors.
About Guidelines
Guidelines are horizontal or vertical, non-printing lines dragged onto a graphic and
used to position or align elements precisely and symmetrically. Guidelines are
similar to gridlines in that they appear at certain intervals, but they also differ
because you can place them anywhere you want on the canvas.
Snap
As with gridlines, the snap feature works with guidelines. With snap, your drawing
elements are attracted, and attach themselves, to the nearest guideline you drag
them toward—much like metal objects are drawn toward a magnet. This makes it
easier to create an accurate graphic.
If snap is enabled, only the top left corner of the drawing element snaps to the
guideline. If snap is disabled, all four corners are active, and any one of them will
snap to a guideline.
By pressing and holding the SHIFT key while the snap feature is enabled, you can
drag a drawing element near or over a guideline without activating snap, which
gives you additional positioning choices on the canvas.
Layout
To precisely position the guidelines on the selected graphic, you can enter a
numeric value for the X and Y axis. You can also choose to hide or display the
guidelines, as well as lock or unlock them. Locking a guideline anchors it in its
current position so that you don’t accidentally drag it when moving other elements
on the canvas.
Colors
You can change the color of the guideline by entering a hexadecimal color code,
such as FFFF0000 (red), or by entering the name of a color from the list of HTML
Literal Word Colors [ ➙ 246]. Additionally, you can reference a state text color
defined in the corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the
following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]. The syntax is case sensitive.
TextGroups are found in the Libraries folders and configured in the Text Group
Editor.
Stroke
Two additional settings are available to allow you to customize the appearance of
the guidelines—Stroke Thickness and Stroke Dash Array. Stroke Thickness refers
131
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
to the width of the guideline, and Stroke Dash Array refers to the length of the dash
and the space between the dashes (the gap) that comprise the guideline.
Additional Guideline Features

Guideline settings are saved with the graphic.

Guideline settings are unique for every graphic.

Guidelines are visible only in Design and Test modes.

Guidelines can be added, moved and deleted.
Guideline colors are customizable.
Guideline stroke and thickness does not change with different zoom factors.


5.13.6
About Linking Elements
Elements can be configured so that when a graphic is open you can click on an
element and quickly navigate to an internal Desigo CC link (data point object or
application) and make it the new primary selection in either the primary or
secondary pane. Or, you can configure the element to navigate to an external link
such as another application, a website (URL), or document (for example, .doc, .txt,
.PDF, etc.)
Navigation via an element is configured in the Properties view, from the element’s
Navigation properties. From the Navigation properties there are several properties
that allow you to enter the path and\or name of the link, select how to trigger the
navigation (single click or double click) from the element, and enter a brief
descriptive text to add to the element’s tooltip.
Internal Links
The Navigation Target property allows you to enter a data point reference, an
application name and\or file name, or a Web address. When the property is a data
point reference, it is an internal Desigo CC link. The data point or object reference
can be either a full name or the object identifier. The Navigation Parameter
property supports a data point target, where you can specify a data point
reference, such as a viewport, graphic, or value, that is sent as context to the new
primary selection.
External Links
If the targeted link is an external link, they are handled as follows:
NOTE:
Desigo CC always assumes the path is from the local machine the software is
installed on, unless otherwise indicated in the Navigation Target path.


Application name with arguments - The application name is the left part of the
link reference followed by a space, and then the file name. If the application
name or argument contains spaces, they must both be enclosed in double
quotes. For example,
–
–
Winword mydoc.doc
Winword.exe mydoc.doc
–
“[local drive]:\Program Files\Winword.exe” “my doc.doc”
File Name - If the link reference contains only a file name, the default
application for that file type is started. For example, if you specify a .txt file, the
Notepad application opens. If the file name contains spaces, it has to be
enclosed in double quotes. For example,
132
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements

–
mydoc.doc
–
–
“C:\Data Files\Readme.txt”
“\\MyServer\MyShare\SubFolder\Read me.pdf
5
Web Link – If the link is a web address, the address must be preceded by the
protocol (http, https, ftp, etc.) For example: https//www.google.com
See also
 Navigation [➙ 240]
5.13.7
Grouping and Ungrouping Elements
The four Group options allow you to group or ungroup elements, or have elements
join or leave existing groups.
Creating Groups
One reason to create a group is to combine multiple graphic elements so that when
one element is repositioned, all other elements move with it. Another reason is to
modify several elements at the same time. For example, if you want all the
elements in a group of three elements to appear wider by the same amount, you
can simply select the group, and then modify the width property in the Graphic
Properties view. You can also select individual elements within a group by using
the Element Tree view to modify the element accordingly. If you change the size of
an element and the element boundary exceeds the group boundary, the group is
adjusted automatically. This also applies if an inner element reduces the size of the
group boundary. To ensure that no elements reach beyond the group boundary,
you can specify a value of 0 (zero) for the following group properties: Clip Left, Clip
Top, Clip Right, and Clip Bottom.
The Group function becomes active only when you select two or more elements
from the same layer or group. If you select a group, and then press the DELETE
key, all elements in the group are removed. If you would like to add or remove one
or more elements from a group while retaining the group itself, see the sections
Joining a Group and Leaving a Group in this topic.
You can group multiple elements of any type within the same layer or group with
the Group option. When you add a new group element, it is inserted at the same zorder position as the selected element with the highest z-order (the top-most
selected element). The z-order within all selected elements remains in the newly
created group, regardless of the order of the selection.
Ungrouping Elements
For various reasons, you might want to ungroup elements as well. For instance,
you might want to re-arrange the elements within a group, in which case, you
would need to ungroup them first. Or, you might want to modify an element
separate from the group to see how it will look on its own before you decide
whether or not it should stay in the group. The Ungroup function becomes active
only when at least one of the selected elements is a group.
The Ungroup option only removes the Group element. It does not physically
separate the grouping of elements. In practical terms, what this means is that
selecting Ungroup simply unlocks the group and allows you to modify individual
elements. All elements in the group are moved to the parent of the group that was
removed, based on the Z-order of the group. The Z-order of the inner elements
remains the same. Additionally, the position and angle of every removed element is
recalculated so that the element doesn’t visually change in the graphic or Symbol.
133
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
Joining a Group
The Join Group option allows you to add one or more graphic elements to an
existing group by using the drag and drop feature in the Element Tree view. The
option is enabled only when you select two or more elements and the element
selected last is a group. In terms of the Z-order, elements that are added are
unpredictable, though elements with the same parent retain their Z-order in that
parent. The position and angle of every added element is recalculated so that the
element doesn’t visually change in the graphic or Symbol.
Leaving a Group
The Leave Group option allows you to remove one or more graphic elements from
a group. You can remove elements from a group either by selecting the element in
the Element Tree view and then deleting the element or selecting the Leave Group
option. The option is enabled only when you select an element serving as a group
child. Elements with the same parent will retain their relative z-order after they
leave the group. The position and angle of every removed element is recalculated
so that the element doesn’t visually change in the graphic or Symbol.
5.13.8
Element Alignment and Precision
When working with elements that need to be aligned precisely and of the same
size, care must be taken during the creation of the elements so that when the
elements are combined the composite Symbol image is seamless on the screen at
any resolution.
As a rule, when you are working with elements, you should always increase the
zoom level of the canvas to allow for greater precision. The higher the zoom level
the more granular the increments are, and the more precise any horizontal or
vertical lines can be achieved. Also keep in mind that at higher zoom levels the
incremental movement changes relative to the zoom level factor. When working
with a Path element, if the vertices alignment is not perfect, the final image may
result in rounding off that may be inconsistent with other elements that are aligned
to that path element.
For example, if you are connecting two "pipe" Symbol pieces that have been
created with the Path elements and the vertices of the Path elements that make up
the pipe pieces are vertically and horizontally straight to precision and the Symbol
pieces are of equal width, you will always see a consistent and uniform rendering
regardless of zoom level. As in the image below, the Paths and Symbols that make
up the adjacent sides of the pipes are inconsistent and the composite image of the
Symbols is not uniform.
134
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
Tips
5.13.9

When you create elements that will connected to other elements, it is
imperative that the elements are of the same size, otherwise, the transition
from one element to the next will not be smooth or perfect.

When creating a Path element, the vertices alignment should be perfectly
vertical and horizontal to avoid any rounding off and to ensure perfect
alignment with other elements.

When creating a Path element, you should also make sure that the adjacent
with of the element, is equal in size.
Notes on Resizing Elements
Elements can be resized on the active canvas using the control handles that
display when you click on an element(s) in Design mode. There are, however, a
few notes and exceptions to keep in mind when resizing elements:

The stroke thickness is never affected except for the XAML object.

The font size is not affected by resizing, unless you have enabled the Resize
Fonts

Resizing an element while pressing the ALT-key maintains the aspect ratio of
the element.

Resizing an element while pressing the CTRL-key maintains a square.
When the new width/height is “negative”, the FlipX/FlipY properties of all
elements are toggled.


Resizing a line or a polygon doesn’t change the point collection; it just changes
the “view”. For example: Resizing the polygon width from 100 to 0 is allowed.
After that, the polygon width can be resized back to 100 and the polygon looks
the same as before. This behavior is also important for scripting the size.

Resizing a Group or Symbol Instance affects all inner elements evenly.
Resizing an Animation object affects all resulting Symbol Instance frames with
the same scale factor. This is only important if the resulting frames have
different sizes (which is allowed). For example: If an Animation object is resized
to one-half of its original size, all resulting frames are one-half of their original
size.


5.13.10
from the Home tab’s Format group.
The resizing control handles are not affected by the zoom level; that is, they
never change their size.
About Tooltips
All graphic drawing elements have a Tooltip property that can be customized under
the General Category in the Property View. When you move your cursor over a
visible element, either in the Graphics Editor Runtime mode or in the Graphics
Viewer application, the descriptive text entered into the Tooltips property field
displays in the Tooltips text box with a yellow background. If you have a group of
elements, the Tooltips text box displays for the top-most element in the Z-order.
In addition to the customized Tooltip text, the text box also contains the following
information:

Dynamic tooltip information that is the result of a Tooltip evaluation that
displays a different tooltip depending on field values.

Static and Dynamic Link Reference and Link Description
Data point Reference(s) - The name(s) of the object and the System Browser
view the name is based on. One line entry per object. This information is

135
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
obtained from the evaluation expressions and the Object References property
from the Advanced category.
data point References Notes
The Tooltips text box displays the object names of all the element’s data point
references. These references are collected from the evaluation expressions and
the Object References property.
The following applies to how the object names and data points are listed and
displayed in the Tooltips text box:

Object names and addresses are never converted into another hierarchy. The
tooltip displays what was manually entered as the Object Reference.

Only the last part of the object name is shown. For example, Analog Input 1
instead of System\Removable Applications\BACnet Network #1\Simulator
Device #1\Analog Input 1


5.13.10.1
The property name or property ID of an object is never shown.
An object name is only displayed once, even if there are multiple properties
associated with the object.
Tooltips Text Box
Item
5.13.11
5.13.11.1
Description
1
Static Tooltip - Descriptive text entered into the Tooltip property field that is associated
with the General category in the Property Viewer.
2
Dynamic Tooltip – Current Tooltip text based on a Tooltip evaluation, if any, and the
current field values. Evaluations are created in the Evaluation Editor.
3
Static Link Reference and Link Description – The name and description of the file
linked to the element as entered in the Link Reference and Link Description fields
from the Commands category in the Property Viewer.
4
Dynamic Link Reference and Link Description – The name and description of the
associated link resulting from any evaluations on the Link Reference and Link
Description fields. The text displayed is dependant on the current field values.
Evaluations are created in the Evaluation Editor.
5
Data Point References - The name(s) of the object and the System Browser view the
name is based on. One line entry per object.
Basic Element Tasks
Copying an Element
 You are in Design or Test mode and have one or more elements on the graphic
canvas you want to copy.
1. Click on the element(s) you want to copy. To select more than one element,
press CTRL and then continue to select the elements you want to copy.
2. Do one of the following:
-
While pressing the CTRL key, drag the selected elements to another
location on the canvas and then release the mouse button. The elements
are copied to the canvas.
-
Right-click on the selected elements and click Copy. The element(s) are
copied to the clipboard. To paste them onto the canvas, right-click on the
selected elements, and click Paste.
136
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.11.2
5
Deleting an Element
 You are in Design or Test mode and have one or more elements on a canvas.
1. Right-click on the element you want to delete.
 The element becomes active and its control handles display around the
element.
2. From the context menu, select Delete.
 The element is deleted from both the canvas and the Element Tree view.
5.13.11.3
Linking an Element
You can configure an element on a graphic to act as a quick link to an internal data
point object and display it as the new primary selection. Or, you can configure the
element to open an external object, such as a Website, application, or a document
(for example, PDF, text files, and word processing documents.)
 You are in Design or Test mode and have an element you want to link to
another object.
1. Click on the element you want to link.
 The element becomes active and its properties display in the Properties
view.
2. In the Properties view, locate and display the Navigation [ ➙ 240] properties.
3. Complete the fields as follows:
-
Navigation Target – Enter a data point reference, an application name
and/or a file name or a Web address.
-
Navigation Parameter – Only used with internal links. Enter an argument
that is sent as context to the new primary selection based on the navigation
target.
-
Navigation Trigger – From the drop-down menu, select how the navigation
should be triggered from the element. Options are: a Single click or a
Double click.
-
Navigation Description – (Optional) Enter a brief descriptive text that
displays in the tooltip. The description displays in parenthesis, following the
path to the link.
 The element is now configured so that when it is selected, one of the following
occurs:
5.13.11.4

If the navigation target is an internal Desigo CC link, the linked item becomes
the primary selection and displays in either the primary or secondary pane.

If the navigation target is external, the document, website, or application opens
and displays.
Modifying Element Properties
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. From the Element Tree or from the active canvas, navigate to and select the
element whose properties you want to modify.
 The Properties view displays the list of associated properties.
137
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
2. For each property you want like to modify, navigate to and click on the property
group to expand and display the associated properties.
3. Modify the properties as needed.
4. From the toolbar, click
5.13.11.5
to save the changes to the graphic.
Modifying or Removing a Link from an Element
 You have an element that is configured to navigate to an internal or external
link, and you want to modify the link or remove the link.
 You are in Design or Test mode.
1. Select the element from so that it is the primary selection.
 The element’s properties display in the Properties view.
2. In the Properties view, navigate to and expand the Navigations properties.
 The Navigations properties display.
3.
Do one of the following:
-
Modify the Navigation properties as needed.
-
From the Navigation Target property, delete the path or link. Clear any
other properties associated with the link.
4. From the Graphics Editor toolbar, click
to save your changes.
5.13.11.6
Modifying the Angle Center
 You are in Design or Test mode, and have an open graphic containing an
element with the angle center set.
1. Click on the element with the angle center
you want to modify.
2. Do one of the following:
-
Click on the angle center sizing handle and drag it to the desired location
within the bounding rectangle.
-
Press CTRL and click on the angle center sizing handle to drag and snap it
to the values of 0/50//100% of the bounding rectangle edge length.
 The element’s rotation angle center is modified.
3. From the toolbar, click
to save the changes to the graphic.
5.13.11.7
Moving an Element
 You have one or more elements on the graphic canvas you want to move
elsewhere on the canvas.
1.
Click-and-drag the element(s) over the canvas.
 A grayed-clone copy of the element(s) displays, while you move the
element to the new location on the canvas.
2. Release the mouse button.
 The clone copy disappears and the element placed in the new location.
138
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
NOTE: To cancel the move before you release the mouse button, press
ESC on the keyboard. The action is canceled.
5.13.11.8
Moving an Element with the Keyboard
 You want to move an element on the canvas using the UP, DOWN, LEFT, or
RIGHT keyboard keys and you are in Design or Test mode.
1. Select the element on the canvas you want to move.
2. Do one of the following:
-
Press the UP, DOWN, LEFT, or RIGHT arrows on the keyboard to move
the element by one pixel.
-
Press CTRL+UP, DOWN, LEFT, or RIGHT arrow on the keyboard to move
the element relative to the grid settings.
 From the toolbar, click
5.13.11.9
to save the changes to the graphic.
Resizing Elements
You can rotate and resize one or more elements at the same time on the active
canvas.
 You have a graphic open with one or more elements, and you are in Design or
Test mode.

Click on the active element on the canvas and move the adorners (nodes) in
the desired direction.
Notes on Resizing Elements
Elements can be resized on the active canvas using the control handles that
display when you click on an element(s) in Design mode. There are, however, a
few notes and exceptions to keep in mind when resizing elements:


The stroke thickness is never affected except for the XAML object.
The font size is not affected by resizing, [except when if the global setting
“Resize fonts” is enabled. – TC NOTE – don’t see this setting yet…]

With the ALT key, the aspect ratio is kept. With the CTRL key, the result will be
a square.

When the new width/height is “negative” the FlipX/FlipY properties of all
elements are toggled.

Resizing a line or a polygon doesn’t change the point collection; it just changes
the “view”. For example: Resizing the polygon width from 100 to 0 is allowed.
After that, the polygon width can be resized back to 100 and the polygon looks
the same as before. This behavior is also important for scripting the size.

Resizing a Group, SymbolInstance property, or CombinedObject affects all
inner elements evenly.
Resizing an Animation object affects all resulting Symbol Instance frames with
the same scale factor. This is only important if the resulting frames have
different sizes (which are allowed). For example: If an Animation object is
resized to one-half of its original size, all resulting frames are one-half of their
original size.


Resize selectors are not affected by the zoom level; that is they never change
their size.
139
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.11.10
Rotating Elements
You can rotate one or more elements at the same time on the active canvas.
 You have a graphic open containing one or more elements, and you are in
Design or Test mode.

5.13.11.11
Click on the active element on the canvas and move the rotation handle
adorner in the desired direction.
Selecting Elements from the Canvas
There are a several ways you can select elements from the graphic canvas in
Design mode.
 Click on an element – the element handles display and the element is selected.

Use the Rubber band – click-and-drag anywhere on the canvas, as you drag
the mouse, a line is created. Move the mouse around the canvas until the
desired elements are captured within the rubber band boundaries.
140
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.11.12
5
Selecting Elements from the Element Tree
 You have the Element Tree displayed in the Dock Panel and are in Design or
Test mode, and have elements on the canvas.
1. In the Element Tree view, from the Selected Depth and the Default Layer dropdown list menus, select the depth and Layer that contains the elements you
want to select.
2. Click Show all Elements
The Show all Elements icon
.
is enabled, and the elements are listed under
their associated layer(s) in the Element Tree view.
3. Do one of the following:
-
To select one element, click on the element from the displayed list.
-
To select multiple elements, press the CTRL-key and then click on the
elements you want active on the canvas.
 The element(s) are now active on the canvas, in the Element Tree, and the
Properties view.
5.13.11.13
Setting the Angle Center of an Element
Elements can be configured to rotate around a set axis, called the angle center.
 You are in Design or Test mode, and have an open graphic containing an
element for which you would like to set a rotational axis.
1. Click on the element you want to modify.
2. From the Properties view, navigate to and expand the Layout Properties.
3. Enter values for the Angle Center X and Angle Center Y properties.
 The angle center adorner
displays on the canvas based on the values
entered above.
5.13.11.14
Using Copy Format
 You are in Design or Test mode and you have formatted an element on the
active canvas and would like to apply the same formatting to other elements on
the canvas.
1. From the canvas, select the element whose formatting you want to copy and
apply to another element on the canvas.
2. On the Home tab, in the Edit group, click Copy Format
.
 The properties of the element are copied and stored.
3. Right-click on the target element to which the formatting is to be applied, and
from the Edit group, click Paste Format
.
 The target element properties are updated with the new formatting.
141
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.12
5.13.12.1
Working with Element Groups
Grouping Elements
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have drawn two or more elements on a
canvas, and you want to place them in a group.
1. From the keyboard, press CTRL.
2. Select the elements you want to place in a group.
3. From the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Group
.
 The elements are placed in a group.
5.13.12.2
Joining a Group of Elements
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have an existing group of elements, and
you would like to add an element to the group.
1. From the canvas, select the element that you want to add to the group.
2. From the keyboard, press CTRL.
3. Select the group that you want the element to join.
4. From the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Join Group
.
 The element joins the group.
5.13.12.3
Removing an Element from a Group
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have an existing group of elements, and
you would like to remove an element from the group.
1. From the Element view, navigate to the group that contains the element you
would like to remove.
2. Select the element.
3. From the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Quit Group
.
 The element is removed from the group.
5.13.12.4
Removing a Group
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have an existing group of elements, and
you would like to remove the group from the graphic.
1. From the canvas, select the group you want to remove.
2. From the Home tab, Edit group, click Delete
.
 The group, and all the elements contained in the group, is removed.
142
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.12.5
5
Repositioning Inner Group Elements
 You are in Test or Design mode, you have a group of elements, and you would
like to reposition an inner element.
1. From the canvas, select the group of elements containing the inner element
you want to reposition.
2. From the Element Tree view, navigate to the highlighted group.
3. Expand the group.
4. Select the element you want to reposition.
 The element on the canvas is selected.
5. From the canvas, move the inner element to its new position.
6. Click outside of the group of elements.
 The inner element is repositioned while remaining part of the group of
elements.
5.13.12.6
Resizing an Element Group
 You are in Test or Design mode, and you would like to resize a group of
elements.
1. From the canvas, select the group of elements you want to resize.
 The selection handles display around the group.
2. Hover over one of the selection handles until the cursor changes to
3. Click and drag a selection handle on the group of elements until you have the
desired size.
4. Release the selection handle.
 The group of elements is resized.
5.13.12.7
Resizing a Single Element in a Group
 You are in Test or Design mode, you have a group of elements, and you want
to resize one of the grouped elements.
1. From the canvas, select the group of elements containing the element you
want to resize.
2. From the Element Tree view, navigate to the highlighted Group.
3. Click
to expand the group.
 The elements associated with the group display under the Group folder.
4. From the list of elements, select the element to resize.
 The element on the canvas is selected.
5. From the canvas, hover over a selection handle on the element.
6. When the resize cursor displays, click and drag the selection handle on the
element and move the point to resize the element.
7. Click outside of the group of elements.
143
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
 The element is resized independently from the other elements in the same
group.
5.13.12.8
Selecting an Element in a Group
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have a graphic open, you have the
Element Tree open, and you would like to select an element in a group to
modify it without ungrouping the elements.
1. From the canvas, select the group that contains the element you want to
modify.
 The group is highlighted in the Element Tree.
2. Expand the group.
3. Select the element you want to modify.
 You can now modify the element independent of the group.
5.13.12.9
Ungrouping Elements
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements grouped on a
canvas, and you want to remove them from a group.
1. From the canvas, select the group of elements you want to ungroup.
2. From the Home tab, in the Selection group, click on the Ungroup icon
.
 The elements are removed from the group.
5.13.13
5.13.13.1
Working with Element Arrangement
Bringing an Element Forward
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have overlapping elements, and you
would like to bring an element forward one element at a time.
1. From the canvas, select the element you want to bring forward.
2. On the Home tab, from the Selection group, click Bring Forward
.
 The element moves forward one element.
5.13.13.2
Bringing an Element to Front
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have overlapping elements, and you
would like to bring one element to the front of the other elements.
1. From the canvas, select the element you want to bring to the front.
2. On the Home tab, from the Selection group, click Bring To Front
.
 The element is brought to the front.
144
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.13.3
5
Sending an Element Backward
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have overlapping elements, and you
would like to send an element backward one element at a time.
1. From the canvas, select the element you want to bring forward.
2. On the Home tab, from the Selection group, click Send Backward
.
 The element moves backward one element.
5.13.13.4
Sending an Element to Back
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have overlapping elements, and you
would like to send one element to the back of the other elements.
1. From the canvas, select the element you want to send to the back.
2. On the Home tab, from the Selection group, click Send To Back
.
 The element is sent to the back.
5.13.14
5.13.14.1
Working with Grids and Gridlines
Adding Guidelines
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you want to add a horizontal or vertical
guideline to the canvas.
1. On the View tab, check the Display Guidelines check box to enable the
guidelines.
 A gray border displays along the left and top side of the drawing board
providing a visual indicator that the guideline feature is enabled.
2. Do one of the following:
-
To Add a Horizontal Guideline. Place the cursor over the top boundary of
the graphic drawing board pane until the cursor turns into a vertical doubleheaded arrow
-
and the tooltip displays Add Horizontal Guideline.
To Add a Vertical Guideline. Place the cursor over the inside-left boundary
of the graphic drawing board pane until the cursor turns into a horizontal
double-headed arrow
and the tooltip displays Add Vertical Guideline.
3. Click and drag the dotted guideline onto the graphic canvas to the position you
want, and then release the mouse button.
 A guideline appears on the graphic canvas.
4. Repeat as necessary.
145
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5.13.14.2
Changing Guideline Properties
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you want to change the Guideline
properties of the active graphic.
1. On the Views tab, from the Workspace group, check the Display Guidelines
check box to display the guidelines in the drawing workspace.
2. From the canvas, select the guideline(s) you want to change. To select multiple
guidelines, press CTRL and then select the guidelines on the graphic canvas
you want to change.
 The selected guideline on the graphic displays in green and in the
Guideline Properties view the Layout, Colors, and Stroke property display.
3. Expand each section and make the necessary adjustments for each property.
-
NOTE: The Colors property can be changed using a hexadecimal color
code such as FFFF0000 (red) or by referencing a state text color defined in
the corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the
following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]
4. When you have finished updating a property, press TAB or ENTER to finish or
move to the next property.
 The guideline properties have been changed.
5.13.14.3
Copying and Pasting a Guideline
 You have a graphic open and the guidelines are visible. You want to copy and
paste a guideline to another location on the graphic.
1. Select the guideline you want to copy and paste.
 The selected guideline displays in green.
2. Press CTRL and move the guideline.
 The guideline is copied and pasted.
5.13.14.4
Moving Guidelines

Drag an existing guideline to the desired location on the grid, and then release
the mouse button.
 The guideline moves to the desired location.
5.13.14.5
Locking a Guideline
1. Select an unlocked guideline from the Workspace pane.
2. Hover over the guideline until the pointer changes to either a vertical
horizontal
or
two-headed arrow, depending on the type of guideline you are
Locking.
3. Right-click on the guideline.
 A context menu displays.
146
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
4. Select Locked.
 The guideline is locked and cannot be moved until it is unlocked from the
Element Tree view.
NOTE: You can also select multiple unlocked guidelines and lock them.
5.13.14.6
UnLocking a Guideline
 Guidelines can be locked from within the graphic canvas; however, when it is
locked it cannot be moved or selected on the canvas. The guideline must be
unlocked from the Element Tree view or the Property view. When the guideline
is locked, you cannot move a selected guideline. When the guideline is
unlocked, you can move it.
1. Navigate to the Element Tree view and select one or more guidelines to unlock.
 When you select a guideline from the element tree, the associated
guideline displays in green on the graphic canvas.
2. Check the Locked
check box associated with the selected guideline.
 The guideline is unlocked and can be moved.
NOTE: To select more than one guideline, press CTRL and then select the
guidelines you want to Unlock.
5.13.14.7
Deleting a Guideline
1. Select the guideline you want to delete.
 The guideline now displays in green.
2. Right-click on the green guideline, and from the displayed context menu, select
Delete.
 The guideline is deleted.
NOTE: You can also select and delete multiple guidelines by pressing CTRL and
then selecting the guidelines you want to delete.
5.13.14.8
Displaying or Hiding Guidelines

On the View tab, from the Workspace group, do one of the following:
 Check the Display Guidelines check box to display guidelines.
 Clear the Display Guidelines check box to hide guidelines.
5.13.14.9
Displaying and Clearing the Grid
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you want to display the grid pattern (lines
or markers) on the canvas.
1. On the View tab, from the Workspace group, check the Display Grid check box
to display the grid.
 The grid pattern displays on the graphic or the canvas. A gray border
displays along the left and top side of the drawing board providing a visual
indicator that the guideline feature is enabled.
147
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
2. If the angular Z- lines are not displayed, and you want them displayed on the
canvas, in the Properties view (Graphic Properties), from the Workspace
properties, check the Enable 3D Axis check box to display the Z lines.
3. In the Workspace properties, continue to configure and adjust the grid settings
as required. For details on each property, see Workspace [ ➙ 244].
4. The settings are stored with your user settings.
5. To clear the grid, click the View tab, and uncheck the Display Grid check box
so that it is disabled.
5.13.14.10
Enabling or Disabling Snap

On the View tab, from the Workspace group, do one of the following:
 Check the Snap check box to enable snap.
 Clear the Snap check box to disable snap.
NOTE: By pressing and holding the SHIFT key while the snap feature is enabled,
you can drag an element near or over a gridline or guideline without activating
snap, which gives you additional positioning choices.
NOTE: If you are working with a Symbol Instance, with an anchor enabled, the
snap feature aligns the anchor to the nearest gridline.
5.13.14.11
Changing Grid Properties
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you want to change the Grid properties,
which are located under the Workspace properties in the Properties view.
1. On the View tab, from the Workspace group, check the Display Grid check box
to display the grid marks on the canvas.
2. From the Graphic Properties view, navigate to and expand the Workspace
properties.
3. Make the necessary adjustments for each Grid property. For details on each
property, see Workspace [➙ 244]
-
NOTE: The Colors property be changed using a hexadecimal color code
such as FFFF0000 (red) or by referencing a state text color defined in the
corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the following
syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]
4. When you have finished updating a property, press TAB or ENTER to finish or
move to the next property.
 The Grid properties have been changed.
5.13.15
5.13.15.1
Working with the Stroke Group
Formatting Element Strokes
 You are in Design or Test Mode and have a graphic open and would like to
segment.
1. On the graphic canvas, select the element(s) whose stroke lines you want to
148
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
5
2. From the Home tab, in the Stroke group, from the Stroke Array drop-down
menu, select the type a stroke type.
 The stroke type selected is applied to the elements strokes.
3. From the Stroke Thickness drop-down menu, select a stroke thickness.
-
You can also click on the current value in the Stroke Thickness drop-down
menu, and manually type in a value for the stroke thickness.
 The stroke thickness is applied to the element stroke.
4. The following procedures depend on the element type you are working with. If
the active element contain:
-
A line or path element with a start and end handle, from the Start Stroke
Line and the End Stroke Line drop-down menus, select an appropriate
stroke shape.
-
Two lines converging, as in the corners of a square or rectangle, to set the
shape of the line join, from the Stroke Line Join drop-down menu, select a
line join shape.
-
Dashed lines, from the Stroke Dash Cap menu, select the type of cap (start
and end shape) for each dash.
 The stroke of the selected elements are formatted according to your selections.
Edit as needed.
5.13.16
5.13.16.1
Working with Element Alignment
Aligning Elements Horizontally
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have three or more elements selected,
and you want to space the elements evenly along a horizontal plane.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align horizontally.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Horizontally Even Spaced
.
 The selected elements are evenly spaced along the x-axis.
5.13.16.2
Aligning Elements to the Bottom
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements selected, and
you want to align the elements to the bottom.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align to the bottom.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Align Bottom
.
 The selected elements are aligned with the bottom edge of the element lowest
in position on the canvas.
5.13.16.3
Aligning Elements to the Center
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements selected, and
you want to align the elements to the center.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align to the center.
149
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Elements
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Align Center
.
 The selected elements are aligned to the average distance between the
element farthest to the left and the element farthest to the right among the
selected elements, and the center position of each element is aligned along a
vertical plane.
5.13.16.4
Aligning Elements to the Left
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements selected, and
you want to align the elements to the left.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align left.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Left
.
 The selected elements are aligned with the left edge of the element farthest to
the left.
5.13.16.5
Aligning Elements to the Middle
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements selected, and
you want to align the elements to the middle.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align to the middle.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Align Middle
.
 The selected elements are aligned to the average distance between the
element farthest to the top and the element farthest to the bottom among the
selected elements, and the center position of each element is aligned along a
horizontal plane.
5.13.16.6
Aligning Elements to the Right
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements selected, and
you want to align the elements to the right.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align right.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Align Right
.
 The selected elements are aligned with the right edge of the element farthest to
the right.
5.13.16.7
Aligning Elements to the Top
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements selected, and
you want to align the elements to the top.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align to the top.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Align Top
.
The selected elements are aligned with the top edge of the element farthest to the
top.
150
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.13.16.8
5
Aligning Elements Vertically
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have three or more elements selected,
and you want to space the elements evenly along a vertical plane.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to align vertically.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Align Vertical
.
 The selected elements are evenly spaced along the y-axis.
5.13.16.9
Aligning Elements to Wrap
You can align all the selected elements and objects on the canvas so that they
display in a row, side-by-side, and then wrap to the next row when space runs out
on the canvas. This allows you to view elements in a grid-like format.
NOTE: By default, when you drag-and-drop multiple elements over to the canvas,
the elements will display in this alignment wrap format.
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more elements or objects
selected, or you have dragged over several datapoint instances and you want
to align the elements to the middle.
1. From the canvas, select the elements\objects you want to align wrap.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click
.
 The selected elements are aligned in a row(s) to the upper-left-hand corner of
the canvas, and wrapped to the next line, if necessary.
5.13.16.10
Alignment and Multiple Drag-and-Drop
You can drag-and-drop multiple objects from System Browser to the Graphics
Editor. When you drag and drop multiple object over to the Graphics Editor, the
objects will display in the alignment wrapped mode. This means the objects will
display side-by-side in a row, and wrap to the next row as needed. When you drop
the objects, they will remain selected, and if you click
, they will then display in a
cascaded format on your canvas.
5.14
5.14.1
Working with Element Types
Animation Element
The Animation element allows you to set the property evaluations that determine
which images, Symbol instances, will display based on the resulting state or value
range of the animation element’s Symbol Reference property.
When you click on the Animation element from the ribbon, and draw on the active
canvas, a blank Symbol Instance is drawn with an empty Symbol Reference
property. This property must then be engineered.
151
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.2
5.14.2.1
Working with Animation
Inserting an Animation Element
1. On the Home tab, in the Elements group, click Animation
.
 An animation element is created on the active canvas or graphic.
2. In the Properties view (SymbolInstance Properties), navigate to the Symbol
Instance.
3. From the Symbol Reference property, click
, to display the Library Browser
view.
4. From the Library Browser, navigate to the library and Symbol that is to
represent the animation element.
5. Drag-and-drop the Symbol into the Properties view Symbol Instance field.
 The Symbol is now associated with the animated element, and displays on
the canvas.
6. Repeat Steps 1-3, as needed.
7. Navigate to the Evaluation Editor view, and from the Type drop-down menu,
select Animated.
5.14.3
Ellipse Element
The ellipse element allows you to draw an ellipse, arc, or pie. An ellipse is an
elongated circle and has a closed curve. An arc is a part of the ellipse curvature,
while a pie is an arc with the ends connected by a straight line to the center of the
imaginary ellipse.
5.14.4
5.14.4.1
Working with the Ellipse Element
Drawing an Ellipse or Circle
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the Home tab, from the Elements group, select Ellipse
.
 The mouse arrow changes to a crosshair when you move your cursor over
the canvas.
2. Do one of the following:
 To create an ellipse, click on the canvas and drag the crosshair until you
have created the desired ellipse dimensions.
 To create a circle, press CTRL, click on the canvas and then drag the
crosshair until you have created the desired circle dimensions.
 The ellipse or circle is created.
152
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.4.2
5
Creating an Arc from an Ellipse
 You have a graphic open and have selected an ellipse element on the canvas.
1. Under the Ellipse Properties view, navigate to the Ellipse properties.
2. From the Ellipse Type drop-down menu, select Arc.
 The control handles and the extent rectangle display around the element.
3. On the canvas, click on the Start (red) and End (orange) angles of the ellipse
element and move the mouse arrow until the desired arc is achieved.
4. The Start Angle and End Angle property values change as you move the
control handles. You can also manually adjust the values, by either by typing a
value or using the up and down arrows in the angle fields.
5.
(Optional) To close the arc, check the Close Arc property box.
 A line is drawn from the Start to the End angles to close the arc.
5.14.4.3
Creating a Pie Shape from an Ellipse
 You have a graphic open and have selected an ellipse element on the canvas.
1.
Under the Ellipse Properties view, navigate to the Ellipse properties.
2. From the Ellipse Type drop-down menu, select Pie.
 The control handles and the extent rectangle display around the element.
3. Click on the Start (red) and End (orange) control handles and move the mouse
until the desired a pie dimensions are achieved.
 The Start Angle and End Angle property values change as you move the
control handles. You can also manually adjust the values, by either by
typing a value or using the up and down arrows in the angle fields.
4.
(Optional) To close the arc, check the Close Arc property box.
 A line is drawn from the Start to the End angles in the shape of wedge to
close the arc.
5.14.5
Import AutoCAD Element
The import AutoCAD image element allows you to insert and modify AutoCAD files
created with AutoDesk software. When you choose to import an AutoCAD file, the
Graphics Editor prompts you to first convert the AutoCAD file to an .XPS compliant
file format.
NOTE: Once you have converted an AutoCAD and imported the converted file, the
original file is no longer required. You will continue to work with the converted,
imported file. You can, however, save the original as a back-up file.
The following file AutoCAD formats can be imported:

.DWG
.DXF
 .DWF
The following properties of an imported AutoCAD file can be modified; otherwise,
the content of an imported AutoCAD file cannot be changed by the Graphics
Editor:


Position
153
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types

Size

Rotation
Background color

5.14.6
Import .XML Element
The import .XML image element allows you to insert a .XML image file onto the
canvas. .XML images can be stretched and clipped.
The following .XML file types are supported and can be imported to the Graphics
Editor:

.XAML

.XPS
.DWFX
An image element has the following handles attached to it:
 Selection and Resizing (open\closed)


5.14.7
Rotational
Line Element
The Line element allows you to draw a line segment between two points---a Start
and End handle--on the canvas. A line also contains a mid-segment point, which
can be used to convert the line to a path element or to create polylines. Each
segment can be extended, shortened, split, and moved.
The line element consists of the following handles:



5.14.8
5.14.8.1
Selection and Resizing
Rotational
Start and End
Working with the Line Element
Drawing a Line Element
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open and want to draw a
line segment.
1. On the Home tab, from the Elements group, click Line
 The mouse pointer changes to crosshair
.
when you move the mouse
over the canvas.
2. On the canvas, click and drag the crosshairs cursor to draw a line.
3. Release the mouse button when you are done.
 A line segment with a mid-segment
5.14.8.2
handle is created.
Converting a Line Element
 You are in Design or Test mode and you have line element on the active
canvas you want to modify into one of the three path element options: Arc,
Cubic or Quadratic Bezier. Or, if you want to split the line.
154
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5
1. Select the line element you want to modify.
 The line element is active on the canvas.
2. Right click on the mid-segment icon
of the line element.
 The context menu displays. The Line option is checked by default.
3. Select from one of the following:
-
Arc
-
Cube Bezier
-
Quadratic Bezier
-
Split
 The element is updated to a path and in the Properties view, the Path
Properties.
5.14.9
Text Element
The text element allows you to display a text or number label on a graphic and
specify text formatting properties such as font family, size, and horizontal
alignment, etc., and numerical formatting such as engineering units to display
along with the value(s), Min, Max, and Precision properties.
You can also create a translated text label, which allows you to create a text
element on your graphic whose text displays according to the language settings for
the current user logged into the Desigo Control Center software.
Text elements can also display a corresponding icon according to the active state
or value of a data point property. For more information on formatting a text
element, see About Formatting Text [ ➙ 165]
For a complete listing of text element properties, in the Appendix, see Text Element
[➙ 243].
5.14.10
5.14.10.1
Working with the Text Element
Drawing a Text Element
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the Home tab, from the Elements group, click Text
 The mouse pointer changes to crosshair
.
when you move across the
canvas.
2. Click on the canvas and drag the crosshairs to draw a text box.
 When you release the mouse button, a text box is created, the word Text
is displayed and highlighted in the text box.
3. Double-click the text element and type the desired text.
 In the Properties view changes to Text Properties view, and the Text field
automatically displays the text as it is typed on the canvas.
4. With the text element still selected on the canvas, adjust the Text element
properties [➙ 243] as necessary.
155
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.10.2
Editing a Text Element
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open that contains a text
element you want to edit.
1. Do one of the following:
-
To modify the text on the canvas - Double-click on the text element and
modify the text as needed.
-
To modify the text properties in the Properties view – With the text element
that you want to edit selected from either the canvas or the Element Tree
view, navigate to the Properties view (Text Properties) and edit the
associated text element properties [ ➙243] as needed.
2. From the Graphics Editor toolbar or File menu, click Save
 The graphic is saved with the modified text element settings.
5.14.10.3
Creating a Translated Text Label
You can create translated text labels that display a specific text from a text group
table, in the language of the current user’s software settings.
 You are in the Graphics Editor and have a graphic or blank canvas open.
1. Navigate to Management View > Project > System Settings > Libraries, and
then locate the library folder that has the text group that has the text you want
to reference and display on the graphic.
2. Click on the text group and drag-and-drop the text group object onto your
canvas.
 A translated text element is created on the graphic.
3. Double-click on the translated text element, and from the drop-down menu
select the text you want to display.
 The language-specific text displays according to the current language settings
of the software. The Properties View Text Properties> Text and >Text Type are
updated to reflect the reference to the text group object.*
*NOTE: You can also reference the text group manually by typing the text
group object name and the text value (TextGroupObjectName.TextValue)
into the Text Properties > Text field, and from the Text Properties > Text Type
drop-down menu, selecting Translated Text.
5.14.11
Path Element
The path element allows you to draw a series of connected line and curve sections,
consisting of segments that can be manipulated in multiple ways to form any
number of shapes.
The following segment options are available when working with a path element
section:

Line –The line section can be moved around, and it can be extended. The
default option when you initially draw a path element on the canvas.

Cubic Bezier – Has two segments that can be moved in any direction.

Quadratic Bezier – Has one segment that can be moved in any direction.
156
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types

5
A path element can also contain one or more path figures, when selected from
the Right mouse-click context menu. These elements are path elements within
a path that have their own control handles, including a Start and End handle.
Path Handles and Functionality.
Icon
Handle Names
Description
Start Handle
Marks the beginning of a line or path segment.
End Handle
Marks the end of a line or path segment.
Mid-Segment
Allows you to select what path type should be applied to the
segment.
Example path, a heart-shape, consisting of a figure with the path element.
5.14.11.1
Cubic Bezier Segment
A Cubic Bezier is a type of segment you can from when you right-click on a midsegment of a path element. A Cubic Bezier segment consists of a Start point, two
Bezier handles, and an Endpoint. The start point may be the endpoint of the
previous segment of any type. The Bezier handles have helper lines that connect
to the point in which the helper line is a tangent to the path.
The example below, displays a path element that has two cubic Bezier segments.
5.14.11.2
Quadratic Bezier Segment
A quadratic Bezier is a type of segment you can from when you right-click on a
mid-segment of a path element. A quadratic Bezier segment consists of a start
point, one Bezier handle, and an endpoint. The start point may be the endpoint of
the previous segment of any type. The quadratic Bezier handle has helper lines
that connect to the point in which the helper line is a tangent to the path.
157
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.12
Working with the Path Element
5.14.12.1
Drawing with the Path Element
 You are in Design or Test mode, have an open canvas and you want to draw a
Path element.
1. From the Home tab, click Path
.
.
 The mouse changes to a cross-hair cursor
2. Click on the canvas and drag the crosshairs to draw your first line segment.
 Click on the canvas to change direction and add a new line segment. Continue
drawing with the mouse until you have the desired shape or number of line
segments.
1. For each segment of the element, you have the following options available
when you right click on the mid-segment icon
.
-
Line – A line with no segments. The line section can be moved around, and
it can be extended. This is the default option when you initially draw a path
element on the canvas.
-
Arc – The line section that crosses the mid-segment handle arcs out, and
an arc width and an arc height handle are added to the mid-segment
handle.
-
Cubic Bezier – Creates two segment handles.
-
Split – Splits the current section into two segments that can be dragged and
manipulated.
2. Double-click where you want the element to end.
To use keyboard shortcuts when drawing the segments, see Path Shortcuts [ ➙
235].
5.14.12.2
Modifying a Path Segment
A path consists of one or many segments. Each segment can be adjusted
individually.

To Move a Segment Point
–

Place the mouse over the segment point on the path you want to move,
when the hand-cursor display, click-and-drag the segment. The segment
moves to the new location.
To Move a Segment by increments of 45 Degree Angles
158
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
–

5
Place the mouse over the segment point on the path you want to move at
an angle. When the hand-cursor displays, press CTRL and then click-anddrag the segment. The segment moves in 45 degree increments to the new
location.
To Move a Mid-Segment Point
–
Click-and-drag the
mid segment point to move the entire segment,
including the Start and End points.

To Split a Segment into Two Segments
–
Place the mouse over the mid-point segment until the hand-cursor displays
over the
–
mid-point segment.
Press ALT + Click-and-drag the
mid-segment point. The one segment
is now two segments. A new segment point is created and dragged to the
new position.
5.14.12.3
Removing a Path Segment
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the canvas, click on the path element from which to want to remove a line
segment.
2. Navigate to the line segment you want to remove.
3. Right-click on the yellow intermediate control handle where the two adjoining
line segments meet.
4. Click Remove.
 The line is reconfigured to join to the two segments, making one line segment.
5.14.12.4
Modifying an Arc Segment
 You want to modify the width, height, or both angles of an arc segment’s
ellipse.

Do one of the following:
-
To modify both angle width and height of the arc - Place the mouse over
one of the arc segment handles until the hand-cursor displays. Click-anddrag the segment until the desired height and width are achieved.
-
To modify the width of the arc only - Place the mouse over the arc’s width
handle until the hand-cursor displays. Press the A key and click -and-drag
the handle until the desired width is achieved.
-
To modify the height of the arc only- Place the mouse over the arc’s height
handle until the hand-cursor displays. Press the S key and click-and-drag
the handle until the desired height is achieved.
-
To resize the width and height to square - Place the mouse over the arc’s
width handle until the hand-cursor displays. Press the CTRL and click-anddrag the handle to resize the width and height to square.
 Repeat the steps as needed to achieve the appropriate arc segment.
159
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.12.5
Modifying a Cubic Bezier
Cubic Bezier segments can be modified be moving its Start point (green) or its End
point (red) by clicking and dragging them with the mouse. The two blue control of
the cubic Bezier control the smooth curve separately.

5.14.12.6
Click-and-drag the circular blue control handle until you have the desired curve.
Modifying a Quadratic Bezier
Quadratic Bezier segments can be modified be moving its Start point (green) or its
End point (red) by dragging them with the mouse.

5.14.12.7
Click-and-drag the blue control handle of the Quadratic Bezier until you have
the desired curve.
Working with the Combine Feature
The combine tasks, located on the Home tab, in the Selection group, allow you to
combine two element shapes to create a new and separate path element. You
have several options to determine how the two elements should be combined to
create the new shape.
The combine feature only works with the drawing elements that create shapes:
Rectangle, Ellipse, Path, and the Polygon elements. The combine features do not
work with the Text, Line, or Animation elements.
5.14.12.8
Creating a Union
 You are in Design or Test mode, and want to combine two or more elements to
create a new, separate path element using the outside outline of the selected
elements.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to merge together.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click the Combine Union icon
.
 A new path element is created over the original combined elements.
3. Click and drag the new element path to move it around the canvas.
160
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.12.9
5
Intersecting Elements
 You are in Design or Test mode, and want to combine two or more elements to
create a new, separate path element shaped by the overlapping portions of two
elements.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to merge together.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click the Combine Intersection
icon.
 A new path element shaped like the overlapping areas of the two elements
is created.
3. Click and drag the new path element to move and work with it on the canvas.
5.14.12.10
Using the Exclude Overlap Feature
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more shape elements
selected, and you want to create a path shape that excludes the nonintersecting portion of the first shape selected.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to combine.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click the Exclude icon
.
NOTE: The order you select the elements to combine, determines which
element will be excluded to create the new path. The first element selected
minus the second element becomes the new path element.
 A combined path element is created, minus the overlap area of the original
two elements. The default Fill color of the new path is set to a gray tone.
-
3. Click and drag the new element path to move and work with it on the canvas.
5.14.12.11
Using the Subtraction Feature
 You are in Design or Test mode, you have two or more shape elements
selected, and you want to create a path shape that excludes the nonintersecting portion of the first shape selected.
1. From the canvas, select the elements you want to combine.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click the Subtraction
icon.
 NOTE: The order you select the elements to combine, determines which
element will be excluded to create the new path. The first element selected
minus the second element becomes the new path element.
5.14.13
Polygon Element
The polygon element consists of one closed figure with three or more line
segments.
Example of a 5-corner polygon element, which is a pentagon:
161
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
A polygon element with no Corner Offset
A polygon element with the Corner Offset set to „30“
5.14.14
5.14.14.1
Working with the Polygon Element
Drawing a Polygon
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the Home tab, in the Elements group, click Polygon
 The mouse changes to a cross-hair cursor
.
.
2. Click on the canvas and drag until the desired polygon is created, and then
release the mouse button.
 A polygon element displays on the canvas.
162
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
5.14.15
5
Rectangle Element
The rectangle element allows you to create rectangles and squares on a graphic
canvas. The element has two properties that are used to modify the curvature of
the rectangle edge. The default value of these properties, Radius X and Radius Y,
is “0” which results in two intersecting lines as seen in a rectangle or square.
Note: All corners of the rectangle are adjusted simultaneously; you cannot adjust
them individually.
The rectangle element has the following handles attached to it:



5.14.16
5.14.16.1
Selection and Resizing
Rotational
Cornering Radius
Working with the Rectangle Element
Drawing a Rectangle
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the Home tab, in the Elements group, click Rectangle.
 The mouse changes to a cross-hair cursor
.
2. Click on the canvas and drag until the desired rectangle or square is created.
Release the mouse button.
 A rectangle element displays on the canvas.
5.14.16.2
Rounding the Corners of a Rectangle Element
 You have a graphic open and have selected a rectangle element on the
canvas.

To round the corner angles of a rectangle, click on the element’s yellow corner
control handles
and drag until the proper curvature is reached.
 All four angles of the rectangle element are adjusted simultaneously and the
values of the Radius X and Radius Y properties are adjusted.
5.14.16.3
Modifying the Rectangle Properties
 You are in Design or Test mode, and have an existing rectangle on the canvas
you want to modify.
1. Select the existing rectangle you want to change.
2. Navigate to the Properties view (Rectangle Properties)
3. In addition to the Rectangle properties, Radius X and Radius Y, all the other
properties associated with the selected element display.
4. Make the necessary adjustments and selections to set the properties for the
rectangle.
5. From the Graphics Editor toolbar or File menu, click Save
163
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Types
 The graphic is saved with the modified rectangle element settings.
5.14.17
Import Raster Image Element
The import image element allows you to insert any of the following graphic file
types onto the canvas:
 BMP
 JPG
TIFF, TIF
PNG
Once an image file is inserted onto the canvas, the following properties of the
image can be modified:



Position

Size
Rotation



Background color
Clip
TIP
You can also import images directly via the clipboard. For example, a screen
capture obtained by using the keyboard key, PRINT SCREEN, can be inserted on
the canvas using the Paste
5.14.18
5.14.18.1
Image elements can be stretched and clipped.
Working with Imported Images
Importing Raster Image Files
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. On the Home tab, from the Elements group, click
.
 The Open dialog box displays.
2. Navigate to and click on the image file to insert, and then click Open.
 The dialog box closes and the image displays in the top left corner of the
canvas.
3. With the image selected on the canvas, navigate to the Properties view, and
adjust the Image properties as necessary.
NOTE:
The performance of a graphic may be severely impacted if it contains one or more
raster images with active values in the Rotation Speed property of the Layout
group property. Raster images supported by the Graphics Editor include: BMP,
JPG, GIF, TIF, TIFF, and PNG.
164
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Formatting Elements
5.14.18.2
5
Importing XAML, XPS, and DWF Files
 You are in Design or Test mode, a graphic is open on the canvas, and you
would like to insert a XAML, XPS, or DWF file into the graphic.
1. On the Home tab, from the Elements group, click
.
2. From the Open dialog box, select the file you want to import.
3. Select Open.
 The file is imported to the active graphic and placed in the upper left-hand
corner of the canvas.
4. Navigate to the Properties view and adjust the property settings as needed.
5.15
5.15.1
Formatting Elements
About Formatting Text
Text elements are drawing elements that allow you to add alpha-numeric text to a
graphic, or add a translatable text label. Line breaks (CTRL+ENTER) and tabbing
(TAB key) are supported within a text element. You can apply formatting to the text
elements from the Home tab, using the Format group options.
Advanced text formatting and settings can be applied via the Properties view.
Font Family and Size
You can easily apply a font and font size to your text element from the Format
group.
Vertical and Horizontal Text Alignment
You can determine how the actual text is aligned or set in the element’s bounding
rectangle. You can adjust the vertical and the horizontal alignment of text. These
selections are available via the Format group.
Standard Formatting
Standard formatting such as bolding, italicizing, underlining, and applying
strikethrough are quickly done from the Format group on the ribbon. You can apply
one or more of these options to the content; however, when selected, the
formatting is applied to the entire block of text in the element. You cannot select
individual letters or numbers for formatting.
Wrapping and Trimming Text
The wrapping and trimming properties are set in the Properties view. These
properties allow you to work with how the text displays within the viewable
bounding rectangle.
The Trimming property allows you to set text that is outside of the view of the
bounding rectangle to either display the last viewable item a character, Character
Ellipsis, or to allow you to see the last visible word within the elements bounding
rectangle, Word Ellipses.
The wrapping property allows you to apply wrapping to the content of the text
element, so that the entire content is visible within the bounding rectangle. There
are three options to choose for this property.

No Wrap -The text will continue on the same line, without regard for the
bounding rectangle. If the text exceeds the viewable boundaries of the element,
165
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Formatting Elements
horizontal scrollbars display allowing you to scroll through the text. This is the
default wrapping property.

Wrap – This option automatically wraps the text within the bounding rectangles.
The text wraps as soon as the first character exceeds the boundary.

Wrap with Overflow – This option does not separate words, but rather wraps
the word to the next line if it exceeds the boundary. When the Auto Size
property is set to size according to width or height, the Wrap with Overflow
property is overridden and the wrapping property is ignored.
Working with Short and Long Text Type References
The Short and Long text type options allow you add dynamic data point references
to a graphic. A dynamic reference is basically the name and\or description of the
data point displayed according to the format selected in the System Browser
Display Mode List Box.
The actual reference has to be set in the Evaluation Editor, using the Text property.
Displaying the data point reference is slightly different from displaying the data
point value:
- Invalid references (e.g. non existing data points) will show #FORMAT instead of
#COM
- Changing the display options in the System Browser automatically updates the
references of all text elements. Any other animation also updates the text
elements.
Working with Text Tables and Translated Text Labels
Text elements can be configured to display language-specific text from an existing
text group. The language of the text displayed is then dependant on the current
Desigo CC language setting, as long as the referenced text group offers a text
option for the current language setting. For example, en-US (English All). When the
software’s language setting is changed by a user, the text displayed on the
graphic--the text element label--also changes to match the new language setting.
The two text element properties that must be configured for this feature are the
Text and Text Type properties.
To reference text from a text group, , create a text element on the canvas and from
the Text Type property, manually select the Translated Text option, and then type
the text group object name and value associated with the targeted text into the
Text property field. The syntax for entering a text group object name and specifying
a value from the text group is: [TextGroupObjectName].[Value]. The two
components are separated by a “.”. For example, [TxG_Action.55]. The en-US
textual reference for the value “55” in this text group is, “Change of Password.” See
example below.
166
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Formatting Elements
5
Working with Numbers: Precision, Decimal Offset, and Units
Text elements that contain numbers (for example, values of data points), can use
the three Text properties that are specifically intended for formatting numbers. The
Precision property, allows you to specifically set the maximum number of digits
allowed for numeric data types. The higher the precision value entered, the more
decimal places display. Negative precision rounds the value to the left of the
decimal to the nearest to the nearest default precision is set to 2. This property
shows 0 for non-numeric data types. With the Decimal Offset property, you can
vertically align numbers by decimal point. The property is set by entering a value
that specifies the distance in pixels from the elements X position to the decimal
delimiter position. The default value is set to empty or zero; the decimal delimiter is
at the elements X coordinate.
The Unit property, is optional, and allows you to specify an engineering unit to
append to the value. If the property is left empty, the units of the last data point in
the text expression are used.
Resizing Fonts
The Graphics Editor provides several methods to resize text contained in the text
element. Once you have selected a font size for the text the options for resizing are
as follows:

Increase Font size and Decrease Font Size Buttons -- (Format group only).
These buttons allow you to automatically increase or decrease the font size of
the active element by one point with each click of the mouse.

Resize Fonts Button -- (Format group only). If this button is enabled, you can
set the content of the text element to maintain the aspect ratio whenever the
size of the text element changes. This means if the element is enlarged, the
text content will increase to the actual size of the element proportionately.

Auto Size Property – (Properties View only). This property allows you to resize
the content of the text element to adjust according to Height or Width. The
default setting is not set to resize. When this property is enabled, it overrides
the wrapping property.
167
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Formatting Elements
5.15.2
About Stroke
Stroke describes the formatting applied to a drawing element’s lines or borders.
You can apply a number of different strokes to an element depending on what kind
of lines or elements you are working with. Measurement for the stroke width,
dashes, and spacing is usually measured in pixels.
Most of the stroke formatting properties can be applied from the Stroke group or,
through the Properties view, under the Stroke property. The Arrow Start and End
shapes are configured in the Properties view only.
Stroke Array
A stroke array is a collection of values that determines whether or not an element’s
stroke is a solid line, or consists of a pattern of dashes and gaps. From the Stroke
group, on the Home tab, you can select from a list of pre-defined arrays, or, if you
navigate to the Properties view, you can enter the values in the Stroke Array
property to create a pattern of dashes and gaps for your array. The first value
entered determines the size of the dash measured in pixels, and the second value
determines the distance of the gap between dashes. You can continue to add
values for the alternating dash and gaps values. Whatever pattern is entered in the
stroke array field is then repeated until the end of the stroke length. If you only
have one value, this creates a dash and gap of equal length.
Stroke Thickness
You can set the width of the selected stroke. The width is measured in pixels and
must have a value of zero or higher. The default stroke width for all drawing
elements is set to one.
Stroke Start and End Lines and Stroke Dash Cap
The stroke start and end properties, and stroke dash cap properties all allow you to
set the shape at the start and end of a line, segment, or dash--depending on the
stroke array. For both lines and dashes, there are four shapes to choose from. The
default shape is set to flat.
You can choose from one of four shapes to apply to the start, end, and cap of a
line, dash, or segment:

Flat – A shape or cap that does not extend past the last point of the line. This is
the default shape for all stroke start, end, and dash cap properties.

Square – A rectangle shape that has a height equal to the line thickness and a
length equal to half the line thickness.

Round – A semi-circle shape that has a diameter equal to the line thickness.
Triangle – An isosceles right triangle, whose base length is equal to the
thickness of the line.

Stroke Line Join
You can determine how elements that have lines with corner joins meet. There are
three join options to choose from:

Miter – Angular vertices, two 45 degree angles that create a 90 degree angle.
The result is a pointed corner. This is the default join shape for elements with
corner joins.

Bevel -- The corners are flattened.
Round – The corners are rounded.

Arrow Start and End Shape
You can create a line that has an arrowhead at the start, end, or both ends, of a
line. To configure a line with an arrowhead you use the Arrow Start and Arrow End
168
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
5
Formatting Elements
Shape properties from the Properties view, Stroke group. These properties are not
available from the ribbon’s Stroke group.
See also

5.15.3
5.15.3.1
HTML Literal Word Colors [ ➙ 246]
Working with the Format Group
Resizing Text Element Fonts Automatically
 You are in Design or Test mode, and have a graphic containing one or more
text elements. You would like the text size to update relative to the bounding
rectangle. This means, when you shrink or expand the element, the text will
adjust according to size and display.

From the Home tab, the Format group, click Resize Font
 The icon background color turns orange.
.
 The text font size increases and decreases relative to the text element’s
bounding rectangle.
5.15.3.2
Formatting a Text Element Using the Format Group
 You are in Test or Design mode, and have a graphic containing one or more
text elements.
1. Click on the text or text elements you want to apply the formatting to.
 The selected elements are active on the canvas.
2. On the Home tab, from the Format group, select a font from the Font Family
drop-down menu, and select the size from the Font Size drop-down menu.
 The font family and style are applied to the text element(s).
3. (Optional) Apply one or more formatting options to the text by clicking on each
of the following formats needed: Bold, Italic, Underline, or Strikethrough.
4. The selected formatting is applied to the text element(s).
5. (Optional) Select the appropriate alignment of your text, the text element.
-
Horizontal Alignment - Select a horizontal placement of the text within the
bounding rectangle. Options are: Left
Justified
-
, Center
, Right
, or
.
Vertical Alignment – Select a vertical placement of the text within the
bounding rectangle. Options are: Top
, Center
, or Bottom
.
 The text element(s) are aligned within the bounding rectangles.
169
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
5.16
5.16.1
The Element Tree and Layers
Element Tree View
The Element Tree view allows you to work with a selected depth and layers to
create complex graphics that represent your site or building facility.
The Element Tree displays all the layers and associated drawing elements of the
selected graphic or Symbol and also allows you to add or delete layers from the
active graphic. Elements within a layer can be ordered using the positioning arrows
at the bottom of the Element Tree view.
Within the Element Tree you can also decide which layers, depths, or elements to
display in Runtime or Design mode.
Creating, Inserting, and Merging Layers
You can create, name, rename, and delete layers in the Element Tree view, as well
as insert one or more layers at a time. Each time you create a new depth, a new
layer is created and associated with the new depth. Multiple layers can also be
merged, resulting in a target layer absorbing all the elements in the order of the
selected layers. The order of selection is used to determine the z-order of the
merged graphic elements. Elements of the first selected layer have a lower z-order
than elements from a later selected layer.
Filtering and Sorting Layers
The list of layers associated with the graphic can be sorted and filtered in the
Element Tree view by name or by z-order. You can use the navigational arrows at
the bottom of the Element Tree view to establish the z-order of layers.
Viewing and Visibility of Layers
The Element Tree view provides you with several options for viewing and
previewing a graphics layers on the open canvas. When the Visible icon is
checked, the layer is visible in Design, Test, and Runtime mode. If not checked, the
layer is not visible on the canvas in any mode. This is useful if you want to isolate
one or more layers on the canvas without viewing all the layers in the graphic. The
Use check box determines the use of a layer in Runtime mode. If checked, the
layer will be active and visible in Runtime mode. If unchecked, the layer displays in
both Design and Test mode, but not in Runtime mode.
If you want to temporarily preview each layer, you can select the Hover check box
and move your mouse over a layer to reveal the layer and its associated elements
on the open canvas.
Locking Layers
You can lock all the elements of a layer by selecting the Lock
icon. However, a
locked layer does not allow you to select any graphic elements.
Displaying Elements
The Element Tree allows you to either show or hide all the elements associated
with the layer(s), using the Show All Elements
icon.
Alarm Category and Discipline Properties
Layers can be assigned to an alarm category and also associated to pre-defined
disciplines. This facilitates dynamic filtering of layers when a graphic is viewed in
the Graphics Viewer.
170
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
5.16.1.1
5
Element Tree View
The Element Tree displays all the layers and associated drawing elements of the
selected graphic or symbol and also allows you to add or delete layers from the
active graphic. Elements within a layer can be ordered using the positioning arrows
at the bottom of the view.
Within the Element Tree you can also decide which layers, depths, or elements to
display in Runtime or Design mode.
Element Tree
Field
Description
Selected Depth
Select a depth whose layers and elements will display on the
canvas. The depth of the top most layer in the graphic is selected by
default.
Default Layer
Select which layer is active on the canvas. Any newly created
elements will appear on the default layer.
Type to Filter
Display layers, elements, and depths by the text entered.
Name
Display the name of the layer, element, or group associated with the
active graphic. You can enter and modify text in the name field. The
following information may be included: type, description, and text
preview depending on how it was set up in the Property View.
Use
If checked, the layer’s visibility is extended to Runtime mode and the
171
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
Graphics Viewer. If unchecked, the layer is only visible in the
Graphics Editor.
If checked, the layer is visible in any of the Graphic Editor’s modes.
If unchecked, the layer or element is not visible in any of the modes.
NOTE: This check box has no bearing on what is visible in the
Graphics Viewer.
Visible
Lock an element so that it can’t be selected or edited.
Lock
Click on a layer or element from a layer and only see the associated
content associated with that layer.
Hover Mode
Display all associated elements with the graphic.
Show All
Elements
Change the element position in the display order. You can move an
element to the top of the list, up a level at a time, down a level at a
time, or to the bottom.
Position
5.16.1.2
New Layer
Create and insert a new layer in the active graphic and display it in
the Element Tree.
Merge Layer
Merge multiple selected layers into a single layer. The last layer
selected absorbs the merged and their elements.
Delete
Delete the selected item from the Element Tree.
Element Tree Icons
Icon
Description
Expander
Layer
Group
Drawing Element
XAML Element
5.16.2
5.16.2.1
Working with the Element Tree View
Displaying Elements in the Element Tree
You can select to display all the elements on your graphic in the Element Tree, or
you can hide them from view, if you just want to see the layers of your graphics.
1. Navigate to the Element Tree view.
2. To display elements in the Element Tree view, click Show All Elements
.
 The icon background changes to orange and the elements display in the
Element Tree under their associated layers.

To hide the elements from view in the Element Tree view, click on the now
orange Show All Elements icon.
172
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
5
 The icon background changes back to its default color, and the elements are
not visible in the Element Tree.
5.16.2.2
Deleting Elements from the Element Tree
An element can be deleted from the Element Tree, unless it is the last remaining
layer in the tree or it, and any of its child elements are locked.
 You have a graphic open in Design or Test mode to which you want to add a
layer.
1. Expand the Element Tree View.
2. Within the view, select and right-click on the element you want to delete, and
then select Delete.
 The element is deleted from the Element Tree and the active canvas.
5.16.2.3
Selecting Multiple Layers
You can select several layers at one time using keyboard and mouse functions. or
clicking the visible check box of one of the selected layers will make all selected
layers visible or invisible.
 You have a graphic with multiple layers open in Design Mode.

Do one of the following:
-
Several layers can be simultaneously selected with CTRL or Shift mouse
click operations.
-
Select All Layers - All layers can be selected with the keyboard shortcut
CTRL+A.
 The selected layer rows are then displayed with a blue background.
You can now apply another command to the selected layers, for example, Delete,
or clicking the visible check box of one of the selected layers will make all selected
layers visible or invisible.
5.16.2.4
Using the Hover Mode
 You have a graphic with multiple layers open in Design or Test mode and you
wish to see the contents of one layer only.
1. Click on the Hover Mode icon
.
 Hover Mode is active and the icon background color changes to orange
.
2. Move your mouse over the layer you want to view.
 Only the contents associated with that layer are now visible on the canvas.
3. To view a particular element of a layer, hover over the targeted element.
 All the elements of that layer are displayed and the selected element is
surrounded by a purple rectangle.
4. To exit this mode, click on the active Hover Mode icon
in the Element Tree.
 The Hover Mode is inactive and the icon is no longer highlighted.
173
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
5.16.3
About Layers
Layers are the building blocks of large graphics representing equipment, floors,
buildings, facilities and entire campuses. Each layer of a graphic represents a
grouping of graphical elements or system objects and has a unique name. Layers
are combined and organized in different ways to create all the required views at a
page level.
Each time you create a new graphic, a default layer is automatically generated and
displays in the Element Tree view. When you select a layer from the Element Tree,
the layer properties also display in the Properties view. Anytime you add or import
an element or image, you are adding it to the active layer. Additionally, every time
you create a new layer, it is automatically added to the Depth view, as a column
entry that can be associated with a specific depth.
Grouping Layers
To add more complexity to a graphic representing a facility, equipment, building for
example, you can add further detail by also associating a grouping of layers with a
depth.
Layer Visibility Range
Layers can have a visibility range so that they are only visible within a specific
zoom factor range. As you zoom in or out, the layer will become visible depending
on the current zoom factor.
174
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
5
Semi-Transparent Layers
Each layer can have a background color associated with it. The color of the
background is chosen using the Background property of the Colors category. If a
semi-transparent color is used, the elements on the layer are visible. If a nontransparent color is used, the elements on the layer are not visible.
5.16.4
5.16.4.1
Working with Layers
Adding a Layer
When you create a graphic for the first time, a default layer is automatically created
and displayed in the Element Tree view. Any elements deposited onto this layer
are listed under the layer.
To add more layers to a graphic, do the following:
 You have a graphic open and are in Design or Test mode.
1. From the Element Tree, click the New Layer icon
.
 A new layer is created on the active graphic and added to the list of
displayed layers in the Element Tree view in the order that it was created.
2. Set the following parameters for the layer:
 Use – When checked, the layer will be visible in Runtime mode.
 Visible – When checked, the layer will be visible in Design and Runtime
mode.
 Lock – When checked, the layer and all its associated elements are locked
and no editing allowed in Design Mode. This check box has no effect on
Runtime mode.
3. To associate a Discipline with the layer, make sure the layer is selected in the
Element Tree view, and navigate to the Properties view and expand the Layer
tab.
 The Layer properties for the active layer display. For a description of the
properties, see the Layer [➙ 239] topic for more information.
4. Adjust the layer settings and parameters accordingly.
 You can now save the graphic.
See also
 Layer [➙ 239]
5.16.4.2
Labeling a Layer
Each layer in a graphic can have a unique label or name. Once created, the layer
name will display in parenthesis next the object label, Layer.
1. Navigate to the Element Tree view.
2. In the Name section, click on the Layer you want to name or rename.
 The Layer Properties display in the Properties view.
3. In the Layer Properties view, navigate to the General property.
175
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
The Element Tree and Layers
4. Click on the Description property and type the desired name for the layer.
When you are done typing the name, with the mouse, click anywhere outside
the field to save the change.
 In the Element Tree view, you can now see the layer name in parenthesis.
5.16.4.3
Deleting a Layer
 You have a graphic open and want to delete a delete a layer from the graphic.
1. In the Element Tree view, navigate to and click on the layer you want to delete.
2. Click on the Delete Selection icon
.
 The selected layer is deleted from the Element Tree list and from the active
graphic. Any elements that on the layer, are also deleted.
5.16.4.4
Dynamically Activating a Layer
You can animate the visible property of a foreground layer by defining an object
reference in the Evaluation field of the layer.
NOTE: It is recommended that you only associate a foreground layer with a
system object. A system object residing in a specific layer must always be
associated with one depth.
 You have created a foreground layer and it is selected in the Elements Tree
view.
1. Navigate to the Evaluations Editor view.
2. Select the Under the Layout properties, type the name of the system object you
want to associate with the layer in the Evaluations field.
 The foreground layer is now associated with the system object and the visibility
of the layer is determined by the objects current value in the Runtime and Test
modes, and the Graphics Viewer.
5.16.4.5
Merging Layers
 You have a graphic open with multiple layers.
1. In the Element Tree view, press the CTRL key on the keyboard, and with your
mouse, select each layer you want to merge.
 The entire Element View menu bar is active.
2. Click on the Merge Layer icon
.
 The selected layers are now are now combined and merged into one layer.
176
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
5.16.4.6
5
Selecting Multi-Layers
Several layers can be simultaneously selected with CTRL or Shift mouse click
operations. All layers can be selected by pressing CTRL+A.
The selected layer rows are then displayed with a blue background. Most of the
above functions, such as delete, also work on multi selected layers, or clicking the
visible check box of one of the selected layers will make all selected layers visible
or invisible.
5.17
5.17.1
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
Brush View and Brushes Group Overview
Brush view—one of many views available in the Graphics Editor—allows you to
modify your drawing elements with options such as colors, gradients, light angles,
and other special effects to achieve a truly custom look.
The Brushes group, found on the Home tab, is another way you can quickly apply
fill, stroke, or background color to an element on the canvas.
Color, Brush, CompoundBrush
Most element properties are of type “CompoundBrush” but some are also just
“Brush” or even “Color”, so it might be useful to understand the three different
types:



A Color is a simple solid color, represented with an ARGB value, for example,
Blue or Pink. Or, a reference to a state text color defined in a Text Group using
the following syntax: [TextGroupName].[Value].
A Brush is either a solid color brush or a gradient brush (linear or radial). The
string representation can contain many ARGB values and control characters.
A CompoundBrush represents a blinking brush and consists of two brushes,
the main brush and the blink brush.
Fills and Strokes
The most common uses of the Brush view revolve around the fill and stroke
functions. Fill refers to the process of coloring or shading the area inside of a
geometric shape, whereas stroke refers to the font color or the line that serves as
the path or border of the drawing element. You can apply a fill or a stroke to a
drawing element by using any of the sixteen base colors, by either specifying a
custom color from the ARGB using slider controls, by manually entering a
hexadecimal color code, or by entering the name of a color from the list of HTML
Literal Word Colors [ ➙ 246], for example, ‘Blue.’
If you see a color anywhere on the monitor screen that you would like to apply to
your drawing elements, you can use the color eyedropper to capture it instead of
trying to determine the color’s custom color through the slider controls.
Finally, you can use the HSV palette to specify the hue, saturation, and light value
of the color to fine-tune your selection.
Additional Color Controls
Additional color controls allow you to select the background color of a drawing
element, apply a solid color to a drawing element, or specify a 2-state color that
blinks alternately between the two colors you choose. The compound brushes in
the Brush Editor, allow you to select a color for the “on” state of the blink, and the
177
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
“off” state of the blink. Whereas, the Blink property, in the Property view of the
selected element, affects the overall visibility of the entire element on the canvas.
Linear and Radial Gradients
Linear and radial gradients allow you to gradually blend colors together. Radial
gradients blend colors while radiating or branching out in all directions from a
common, specified center, while linear gradients blend colors along a straight path.
Brush view provides predefined gradient Stops in the form of drop-down menus
that allow you to move your mouse over them to see what your element will look
like before you actually select the stop. You can also specify a gradient fill by using
the Gradient View Bar or by entering values into the Direct Radial or Direct Linear
Gradient Control fields.
You can achieve additional special effects with a gradient fill by employing the
Mapping Mode options (Padded, Reflect, or Repeat), the Adorners options, and the
Angle Control option—which allows you to choose the angle of the light for a
gradient fill.
Copy and Paste
The copy and paste functions allow you to copy the content of one element and
paste it into one or more selected elements. This can save you time and effort
when you have multiple graphical elements that all need the same look.
5.17.2
State Color Overview
In addition to selecting and modifying element color properties with the Brush
Editor and the Brushes group, you can also determine color by using references to
existing Text Group tables that among other definitions (icon and text) have state
colors defined for a data point’s property, depending on its Value.
These state settings are created in the Text Group Editor. Each Text Group is
stored in the Management View > Libraries under the associated library.
For example, if you open the Text Group, HVAC_Alarm_01 in the Text Group
Editor, you see that it has two states defined, Normal and Alarm. Each state has
the Value associated with it, as well as the assigned Color and an Icon.
Referencing Color in Text Group Tables:
There are two methods you can use in the Graphics Editor to reference the Text
Group tables Color and Value information: Entering the correct syntax to reference
the information from the Text Group, or, drag the Text Group object from the
appropriate Library in System Browser and drop it into the supported field in the
Graphics Editor.
The syntax to manually reference state colors in a Text Group, is:
TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]
For example, using the Text Group HVAC_Alarm_01 as an example, we can add
the following references to element properties:
178
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group

5
TxG_HVAC_Alarm_01.1 = This references the Normal state (see above) which
is represented by the Color green.
TxG_HVAC_Alarm_01.2 = This references the Alarm state, which is
represented by the Color red.
Please note, that the Object Name of the Text Group table may not be the name
you see in System Browser. Always use the Object Name, which prefaces the Text
Group with “TxG_”

Supported Properties and Fields
Most element color properties in the Graphics Editor support the state color
references. Below is a list of areas that support manual or drag-and-drop
references to state colors.

Element Properties
– Fill
– Stroke
–

Graphic Properties
–
–
5.17.3
Background
Background color
Grid and Guideline colors

Blinking supported

Expressions and Substitutions in the Evaluation Editor

– Value field
– Expression Field – Use double quotes when entering Text Group reference.
Conditions in the Evaluation Editor
Brush Editor View
The Brush Editor view allows you to modify your graphical elements with brush
options such as color, gradient, and light angles. The top portion of the Brush
Editor view enables you to make your brush and color selections. When you
choose either the Linear or Radial brush options, additional settings choices are
enabled at the bottom of the Brush Editor view.
179
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
General Settings – Brush Editor View
Brush Editor Top
Item
Description
1
Base Color Palette
Display the sixteen base colors for graphics you can choose from.
2
Brush Bar
Select from the available brush types and tools available for working with the
Selected elements, canvas, and work area. Also allows the user to select linear
and radial gradient fill options, copy and paste features, and revert to the last
brush.
Fill Brush
Set the color apply to the Fill (interior) property of the selected element(s).
Stroke Brush
Set the color that is applied to the Stroke property or the font color of the
selected element(s).
Background Brush
Set the color that is applied to the Background property of the selected element
on the canvas.
Miscellaneous Color Brush
Indicate a brush, other than the ones available from the Brush Bar, is currently
active on the element. For example, when setting the shadow color of a property,
etc.
NOTE: The Miscellaneous Color Brush icon only displays on the Brush Editor
when it is active, otherwise, it does not display on the Setting bar.
Toggle Blinking Brush
Split the Main Brush into two panes. When the Toggle Blinking brush is selected,
the Main Brush is split in two, and two colors can be applied to the brush; one in
each pane of the now split Main Brush. In Test or Runtime mode the element will
toggle between the two state colors applied.
NOTE: Do not confuse this with the Blinking property check box of the Layout
group in the Properties view, which, when enabled allows the associated
element to blink (toggle between visible and non-visible) on the graphic canvas.
Main Brush
The main brush reflects the current color(s) and brush settings applied to the
180
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
5
selected element(s) on the canvas.
Main Brush and Blink Brush
When the Toggle Blinking Brush is selected, the Main Brush icon splits into two
panes and displays the main brush color and then the blink brush color.
Solid Color Brush
Apply a single solid color without any blending, etc.
Linear Gradient Brush
Blend colors along a straight path.
Radial Gradient: Brush
Blend colors while radiating or branching out in all directions from a common,
specified center.
No Brush
Remove any brushes applied to the element when selected.
NOTE: Shapes without a fill brush are not selectable and do not show tooltips
within the shape.
Copy Brush
Copy any brush applications from the selected element to the clipboard.
Paste Brush
Paste any brush applications from an element currently saved to the Copy Brush
clipboard.
Revert Back
Re-apply the previous brush applications to the Main brush and the selected
element.
3
Hue, Saturation, and Value (HSV) Palette
Move the mouse over a spectrum of color, ranging in saturation. When the
mouse is moved, the current hue is also reflected on the RGBA sliders, the Main
brush, and the selected element on the canvas. The hexadecimal value is also
updated.
4
Hue Slider
Move the slider up and down the hue color spectrum to select a color. When the
Hue slider is moved, the current hue is also reflected on the RGBA sliders, The
HSV palette, the Main brush, and the selected element on the canvas. The
hexadecimal value is also updated.
5
RGBA Sliders
Adjust the opacity of your graphical elements and select custom colors from the
RGBA Hue slider controls, or by entering a hexadecimal color code, or by
entering the name of a color from the table of HTML Literal Word Colors [➙ 246].
The sliders have dynamically changing backgrounds showing the current color
selection as they change.
6
Color Eyedropper
Move your cursor over a color and brush content and copy it to the selected
element. As the eyedropper is moved around, the current color or brush hovered
over is previewed on the current element and the Brush Editor view color tools
are updated as well.
7
Current Color and Initial Color Initial Color
Displays the current color on the left, and the initial (previous) color selected.
181
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
Gradient Option Settings – Brush Editor View
Brush Editor View – Gradient Options
8
Spread Mode Options
Select padded, reflect, or repeat for a variety of visual gradient effects.
9
Gradient Options
Select from common predefined gradient definitions or you can select the
Custom option, and use the gradient stops.
10
Gradient Slide Bar
Set the definition for linear and radial gradients using the gradient stops.
11
Gradient Stops
Set the colors in the gradient by clicking on the gradient slide bar and selecting a
color from the palette for the stop.
12
Angle Control Selector
Select the angle of light for a linear and radial gradient.
13a
Linear Gradient Control
Enter explicit values to define the linear gradient Start and End positions.
13b
Radial Gradient Control
Enter explicit values to define the radial gradient Center, Origin, Radius X, and
Radius Y positions.
14
Adorners Option
Apply and control visual effects using gradient spread and vector position.
15
Absolute Option
Define a coordinate system not relative to a bounding box. The values you enter
are interpreted directly in local space.
182
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
5.17.4
5.17.4.1
5
Brush Editor View Tasks
Applying Background Color Using the Brush Editor View
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to apply background color.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Brush bar at the top of the Brush view, click Background
.
4. From the Base Color chart, select the color you want to use as a fill.
 The background color is applied to the drawing element’s background. If this is
the first color applied to the element, then the entire drawing element has the
background applied to it, until a fill or stroke color is applied.
5.17.4.2
Applying Fills using the Brush Editor View
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to fill.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Brush bar at the top of the Brush view, click Fill
.
4. From the Base Color chart, select the color you want to use as a fill.
 The fill is applied to the drawing element.
5.17.4.3
Applying Linear Gradients
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want a linear gradient applied to.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Brush bar at the top of the Brush Editor view, click Linear Gradient
.
 The options for linear gradients displays.
4. Select the options you want for your element or elements.
 The options for linear gradients displays, allowing you to edit the element
as needed.
5. To set the gradient style, do one of the following:
-
From the Pre-defined drop-down menu, select a gradient definition.
-
From the Gradient slider, click and drag the gradient stops until the desired
setting is achieved. To add more gradient stops, click on the gradient slider.
A new stop is created. To remove a stop, simply click on the stop and drag
it away from the slider.
6. To select a spread option, select a mode from the spread mode drop-down
menu.
183
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
7. By default the Start and End light source parameters are set so that they are
relative to the element size. To maintain the position of the light source,
regardless off the element size, click the Absolute check box.
8. To define the vector Start and End points of the light, choose from one of the
following methods:
5.17.4.4
-
Enter values directly in the associated fields.
-
Click the Adorners check box to visually enable the adorners, consisting of
a centered line with a blue Start handle, a white Middle handle, and a red
End handle. Click and move the points to the appropriate positions.
Applying Radial Gradients
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open. Any options you set
for the selected element are optional and are applied as the selections are
made.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want a radial gradient applied to.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Settings bar at the top of the Brush Editor view, click Radial Gradient
.
 The options for radial gradients displays, allowing you to edit the element
as needed.
4. To set the gradient style, do one of the following:
-
From the Pre-defined drop-down menu, select a gradient definition.
-
From the Gradient slider, click and drag the gradient stops until the desired
setting is achieved. To add more gradient stops, click anywhere in the
Brush Editor view and then click on the gradient slider. A new stop is
created. To remove a stop, simply click on the stop and drag it away from
the slider.
5. To select a spread mode option, select a mode from the Spread Mode dropdown menu.
6. By default the light source parameters are set so that it is relative to the
element size. To maintain the position of the light source, regardless off the
element size, click the Absolute check box.
7. To define the Center, Origin, Radius X, and Radius Y parameters, choose from
one of the following methods:
5.17.4.5
-
Enter values directly in the associated fields.
-
Click the Adorners checkbox to visually enable the adorners, consisting of
the center point (icon), the origin, and the Radius X and Radius Y lines.
Click and move each item around as needed to set the angle of the light
source on the element.
Applying a Stroke Using the Brush Editor
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to apply a stroke to.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
184
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
5
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
3. From the Brush bar at the top of the Brush Editor view, click Stroke
.
 The stroke is applied to the drawing element.
5.17.4.6
Copying and Pasting a Brush
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element from where you want to copy the brush.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Brush bar at the bottom of the Brush Editor view, click Copy Brush
.
4. Select the drawing element or elements you want to paste the brush to.
5. From the Brush bar, click Paste brush
.
 The brush is applied to the drawing element.
5.17.4.7
Applying the Toggle-Blinking Brush
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open. Any Brush Editor
options you set for the selected element are optional and are applied as the
selections are made.
 NOTE: Do not confuse this with the Blinking property check box of the Layout
group, which when enabled allows the associated element to blink (toggle
between visible and non-visible) on the graphic canvas.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to apply a blinking color to.
2. Navigate to the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Brush bar at the top of the Brush Editor view, click Fill
or Background
, Stroke
,
.
4. Select the Toggle Blinking icon
.
 The main brush splits into a compound brush
- the first half is the Main
Brush, and the second half, yellow by default, is the Blink Brush.
5. From the Base Color chart, select a color you want to use for the Blink Brush.
 The Blink Brush color changes to the selected color.
In Test or Runtime mode the element will toggle between the two colors applied to
the main and blink brush.
5.17.4.8
Setting HSV
 You want to change an element’s fill, stroke, or background color, you are in
Design or Test mode, and you have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element you want to set HSV for a fill or stroke of an
element.
185
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
2. Select the Brush Editor view.
3. From the Brush bar, select the appropriate brush to apply to the element.
 The Brush Editor view color features are enabled and display. If you select
the No Brush icon
, the color palette does not display in the view.
4. Do one of the following:
 Click Fill
.
 Click Stroke
.
 Click Background
.
5. Move the mouse pointer to the HSV palette.
 The pointer changes to display a crosshairs
pointer.
6. Move the crosshairs pointer to the location on the HSV palette that has the
color you want and Click on that location.
 The fill, stroke, or background changes.
5.17.4.9
Using the Color Eyedropper
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to fill.
2. Expand the Brush Editor view.
3. Click-and-drag the Eyedropper icon
and do one of the following:
-
As you drag the eyedropper, it picks up the color of whatever you are
moving your cursor over and the selected element on the canvas reflects
the same updated color.
-
Drag the eyedropper over a color property from the Brush Editor view,
Base Color chart, select the color you want to use as a fill.
4. Release the Eyedropper when the selected element is the desired color.
5.17.5
5.17.5.1
Brushes Group Tasks
Applying Fills Using the Brushes Group
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to fill.
2. On the Home tab, from the Brushes group, click on the drop-down menu next
to the Fill icon
 The Base Color chart displays.
3. Select the color you want to use as a fill.
 The fill is applied to the drawing element.
186
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with the Brush View and Brushes Group
5
NOTE: For more color and brush options, right-click on the brush group icon to
display the Brush Editor view. From the Brush Editor view, you can also set or
adjust the color, using one of the following methods:



5.17.5.2
The RGBA sliders in the Brush Editor view.
A hexadecimal color code or a name, for example, “Green” in the # field to set
the transparency, red, green, and blue values of the color you want to use as a
fill.
The Color Eyedropper tool; and then move the eyedropper to the location on
your monitor screen that has the color you want to use as a fill. Release the
mouse button.
Applying Stroke Using the Brushes Group
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements you want to apply stroke.
2. On the Home tab, from the Brushes group, click on the drop-down menu next
to the Stroke icon
 The Base Color chart displays.
3. Select the color you want to use as a stroke.
 The stroke is applied to the drawing element.
NOTE: For more color and brush options, right-click on the brush group icon to
display the Brush Editor view. From the Brush Editor view, you can also set or
adjust the color, using one of the following methods:
5.17.5.3

The RGBA sliders in the Brush Editor view.

A hexadecimal color code or a name, for example, “Green” in the # field to set
the transparency, red, green, and blue values of the color you want to use as a
fill.

The Color Eyedropper tool; and then move the eyedropper to the location on
your monitor screen that has the color you want to use as a fill. Release the
mouse button.
Applying Background Color Using the Brushes Group
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open.
1. Select the drawing element or elements to which you want to apply background
color.
2. On the Home tab, from the Brushes group, click on the drop-down menu next
to the Background icon
.
 The Base Color chart displays.
3. Select the color you want to use as the background color.
 The background color is applied to the drawing element’s background. If the
element has not other color applied to it, then, the entire drawing element will
have the background applied to it, until you apply a fill or stroke color.
NOTE: For more color and brush options, right-click on the brush group icon to
display the Brush Editor view. From the Brush Editor view, you can also set or
adjust the color, using one of the following methods:
187
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5.18
5.18.1

The RGBA sliders in the Brush Editor view.

A hexadecimal color code or a name, for example, “Green” in the # field to set
the transparency, red, green, and blue values of the color you want to use as a
fill.

The Color Eyedropper tool; and then move the eyedropper to the location on
your monitor screen that has the color you want to use as a fill. Release the
mouse button.
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
About Property Evaluations
Evaluations are expressions and conditions applied to element or Symbol property
values to determine how an element or Symbol behaves in a graphic. Property
evaluations are the basis for creating animated graphics that automatically update
to show a graphical representation of real time conditions of your system or facility.
Evaluation Types
There are five types of evaluations you can apply to an expression: Simple, Linear,
Discrete, Animated, and Multi. The type of animation or condition(s) required for
your graphic will determine which evaluation type to use. Evaluations and
expressions are configured in the Evaluation Editor view.
Expressions
The expression can be either a data point name or a literal (of type Boolean,
number or string).
An expression consists of a data point reference or value followed by an optional
operator with another data point or value. The result of an evaluation to a property
value, for example, can determine which image or Symbol instance to display or
what color to apply to an element depending on the value of a property.
Every property evaluation stems from the result of an expression that is used to
determine how an image displays according to property values, expressions, and
conditions.
Expressions consist of a data point reference, for example, an object name or
value followed by an optional operator with a second data point or value. This
allows you to have simple comparisons or calculations as well as use constant
literals.
Syntax and Conditions
Expressions in the Evaluation Editor adhere to specific syntax and consist of data
point references, such as an object name or object address, or one of three literal
value types: boolean, double, and string. Conditions are applied to Linear,
Discrete, and Multi evaluations.
Text Group References
In addition to using the Brush Editor or referencing a hexadecimal color code such
as FFFF0000 (red) to determine the color for a property evaluation, you can also
reference a color from an existing Text Group table. When you ref separated by a
period, as follows: [TextGroupName].[Value]. The color associated with that value,
will be displayed.
188
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
Multi Editing
You can simultaneously update multiple elements whose matching properties have
evaluations applied to them. If an element in a group of elements doesn’t have a
matching property with the other elements in the group, the element is ignored and
not included in the evaluation. If the same property for multiple elements have
different values applied to them, those properties display with a blue background
and a new value can be entered that will be applied to all the elements that share
the property.
5.18.1.1
Evaluation Types
There are five evaluation types you can apply to an element or Symbol property in
the Graphics Editor.
Simple
Simple evaluations are the most basic type of property evaluation. Simple
evaluations allow you to specify a one-to-one substitution or behavior for the
expression result of the property, without setting any conditions.
Simple evaluations only require you select a property and enter an expression.
Animated
The Animated evaluation is used to change a property value by setting a value for
each frame and then setting the interval times between frames and their associated
values. In the Animated evaluation each value condition is considered a “frame”.
One frame is used as the Off frame.
Linear
Linear allows you to broaden the range of the expression by mapping the
expression result to a minimum and maximum range. The minimum and maximum
values are set to the original expression range or you can manually enter a range.
A range condition can be another literal value or a Symbol from the Symbol Library.
You can have multiple range conditions for each property expression. If a minimum
or maximum range is blank, the value is taken from the expression range.
Discrete
Discrete evaluations allow you to map the expression result to one or more
conditions. However, unlike the linear evaluation, the conditions of the expression
are evaluated and processed in order of priority from top-to-bottom in the
Evaluation Editor view. The value of the first “true” condition is applied and all other
conditions are not used.
You can use the Discrete’s And condition to compare individual bits of an analog
data point expression. The And condition uses binary encoding to compare a
hexadecimal value with the binary equivalent to see whether a condition is true. For
example, the hexadecimal number 2A is equivalent to the binary value of 0010
1010, and the decimal value of 42. For any bit conditions that match the bit places
of2, 4, and 6 being “ON” or “1”, the condition is true.
Multi
Multi evaluations allow you to create evaluations for digital data points. Every
possible combination of digital data point states can have results which you can set
or limit in your evaluation. The tri-state check box allows you to manage the
number of required conditions for your evaluation.
189
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5.18.1.2
Animated Example
Example: You have a rectangle drawn on the canvas and would like to change the
Fill property color. Each frame is set to the color you would like the Fill to be for that
frame.
5.18.1.3
Condition Syntax
Each evaluation type requires specific input and syntax for the Condition field.
Linear
Valid syntax and input include double or integer values. The Condition field can
also be left blank, in which case the expression range is used.
Discrete
The following table shows examples of valid syntax for the Condition fields
associated with Discrete evaluations.
Condition Example
Condition is ...
12.34
Double literal
NOTE: It recommended that you use a range for
the condition.
12
Name reference.
<5
Condition is smaller than 5.
<=5
Condition is smaller than or equal to 5.
>5
Condition is greater than 5.
>=5
Condition is greater than or equal to 5.
..5
True, if equal to or less than 5.
190
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
Condition Example
Condition is ...
5..
True, if equal to or greater than 5.
12.34..56
True, if value is equal to or between12.34 and 56
..
Always true. This is the same as a blank field.
Always true.
&2A
True, if the (zero-based) bits 1, 3, and 5 are true.
&4
True, if the (zero-based) bit 2 is true.
&0002
True, if the (zero-based) bit 1 is true.
Multi
In this evaluation type, every condition has a check box that is associated with an
expression created for the evaluation. If you have four expressions, each condition
will display four check boxes. Each check box indicates if the expression is true,
false, or unspecified (ignored) for the particular condition. The condition applied is
then determined by how the associated check boxes are marked and the
conditions are met. For each condition, the related expression check boxes from
the top section of the Evaluation Editor are ordered from left (first expression) to
right (last expression).
The check box states are represented as follows:


Checked = condition is true.
Unchecked = condition is false.
Green Fill = condition is neither true nor false (unspecified) and the
corresponding expression is ignored.
The example condition is true if:

-Expression 1 is true or false (that is, this expression is ignored AND
-Expression 2 is true AND
-Expression 3 is false.
If an expression is not digital, the result is false if the expression result is:
 0 for integer, double, or any other analog types
 Empty string or “0” for string types.
5.18.1.4
Linear Examples
Linear Examples
Examples of how the Linear Evaluation can be used:
Example 1:

The fill color of a rectangle is used to reflect the current water temperature. You
can enable the Auto Range check box, and set the minimum and maximum
temperature in Expression field. The fill color is set to dark blue to represent
cold water (-50) and to represent a normal water (100) temperature the fill color
is set to light blue. The Auto Range check box is enabled for this scenario. The
fill color changes according to the set temperature range.
191
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
Example 2:
Same Example 1, however, the Auto Range is disabled, and a rate is set to
10…30. The rectangle fill color is dark blue for any expression values below 10 and
light blue for any values above 30.
Example 3
Same as Example 1, however, Auto Range is disabled. The minimum range is set
to 20; the maximum range is left empty. If either the Min or Max condition value is
empty, the corresponding minimum or maximum range is taken from the
Expression range. If the expression doesn’t have a range, the values -1.79E+308
(Min) or +1.79E+308 (Max) are used.
5.18.1.5
Discrete Example
Discrete Example I
The Fill color of a rectangle should be depicted as follows:



Blue if the temperature is below -20
Red if the temperature of the water is 40 or above 40.
Orange for any other temperature.
The design value of the rectangle is set to orange.
Result
If none of the conditions is true, the design value, orange, is taken. Optionally, a
third color condition can be specified if the design color should be different from the
default animated color. This could be relevant for the preview.
Discrete Example II
You want to change the background color of an analog object depending on the
value of data point 2 (dp2).
 The first Condition is set to &1, and the Value is set to the Red.

The second Condition is set to & 2A and the Value is set to Green.
Result
According to these conditions, see example below, the background color of the
data point changes as follows:
 Red, if the first bit is set to “1”, and when the actual value of dp2 is 1, 3, or any
other odd number, the condition is true.

Green, if the bits “2”, “4”, and “6” are set to “1”. Therefore, when the actual
value of dp2 is 42, 46, 254, or any value whose binary codes have the 2nd, 4th,
and 6th bit set to 1, the condition is true.

If neither condition is True, then the background color is by default the design
value.
192
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5.18.1.6
5
Multi Example
Multi Example
Example: The property, Stroke Dash Cap, depends on three digital data points.
The following conditions are set:

In the first condition, if the expressions result for the digital data point BP1 is
True, then data point BP2 and BP3 are ignored and the Round attribute is
applied to the property Stroke Dash Cap.

In the second condition, if the expression result for the digital data point BP2
and BP3 are True, the Flat attribute is applied to the property Stroke Dash Cap.
In the third condition, if the expression result for the digital data point BP2 is
True and data point BP3 is False, the Triangle attribute is applied to the
property Stroke Dash Cap.


A fourth condition with all check boxes set to “unspecified” could also have
been added.

If the expression value results in any other combination, the condition
automatically applies the default value of the Stroke Dash Cap.
193
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5.18.1.7
Understanding Binary Encoding
Analog data points use a range of values to represent a condition which has more
than two states, for example, the temperature data point or damper position.
Analog data points use a range of values to represent the information. A computer
uses binary digits, consisting of 1’s and 0’s, to read and represent those values. A
“1” usually represents an “On” state, and “0” represents “Off”. To simplify the binary
coding for the user, hexadecimal numbers are used to map the binary numbers into
more legible values. See the table below for binary, decimal, and hexadecimal
equivalents.
Binary and Hexadecimal Weights
Binary numbers are based on two because it consists of a combination of the digits
0 and 1. Because a base of 2 is used in binary notation, the second place from the
right has a weight of 2 because it is 2 raised to the power of 1. Hexadecimal
notation is based on 16 because it is based on 16 digits.
About Hexadecimal’s
The hexadecimal notation is based on 16 digits and uses the digits 0-9 and then
the letters A-F to represent the digits 10-15. Hexadecimal numbers are often
preceded by “Ox” or followed by h.
A hexadecimal number consists of two values; each value represents one of two
nibbles. A nibble is a byte (8 bits) that has been separated into two nibbles, each
consisting of 4 bits.

The lowest value for a nibble with each bit turned off is: 0000, which equals a
value of 0

The highest value for a nibble with each bit turned on is: 1111, which equals a
value of 15(1).
Converting a Hexadecimal to a Binary
To convert a hexadecimal to a binary number, use the table below. For example,
the hexadecimal number: 2A
From the table below, do the following:

Locate the hexadecimal value “2” and note the binary equivalent. The binary
value for “2” is 0010
Locate the hexadecimal value “A” and note the binary equivalent. The binary
value for “A” is 1010.
Therefore, the binary value for the hexadecimal number 2A is equivalent to: 0010
1010

Binary, Decimal and Hexadecimal Equivalents
Binary
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Binary
Decimal
Hexadecimal
0000
00
0
1000
08
8
0001
01
1
1001
09
9
0010
02
2
1010
10
A
0011
03
3
1011
11
B
0100
04
4
1100
12
C
0101
05
5
1101
13
D
0110
06
6
1110
14
E
0111
07
7
1111
15
F
194
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
Converting a Hexadecimal to a decimal
We are working with the hexadecimal value: 2A. This value, according to the table
above represents the nibble values of: 2 and 10. Since the hexadecimal values are
based on 16 digits, to get the decimal value, it is necessary to multiply 2 and 10 by
their position weight values and add them up. The weight is calculated
This is calculated by adding the bit weight based on two digits from right to left,
starting with 160 progressing to 161: (2 *161) + (10*160) = 42.
Analog data point Types
Analog data point Types
Name
Type
Description
CHAR
Character
A 16-bit value.
INT
Integer
A value that is either negative or
positive.
The range is as follows:
Positive: 0 to 32767
Negative: -1 to -32768
0-3267
UINT
Unsigned Integer
A positive value. An unsigned 16-bit
integer has a range from: 0 – 65,535
INT32
Integer32
A positive or negative value:
-2e31 to 2e31 -1
Float
Floating Point
Values with decimals (
(1)This
is calculated by multiplying each bit by its weight, based on its place, and
added together with the other values. The weight based on two, from right to left,
starting with 20 progressing to 21, 22, and finally, 23: (1 *23) + (1*22) + (1*21) + (1*20) = 15.
5.18.2
Properties View
The Properties view displays all the properties of the active canvas or a selected
graphic element on the canvas. The title bar text of the Properties view changes to
reflect the name of the selected element, and the associated properties are
displayed by category in the view. Properties can also be filtered to display by
property name or by a value.
Within the Properties view you can view, edit, or delete a properties settings. If you
are unsure of what a property does or what types of values are accepted for that
value, you can select to view detailed information about a property. The view also
displays a brief description when you place your mouse over a property.
195
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
Property View
Item
Name
Description
1
Title Bar
Display the name of the currently selected element on
the active graphic. The title bar text changes to reflect
the name of the active element whose properties
display in the Property View list area.
2
Filtering Search Area
Search the element’s properties and limit the properties
displayed. You can search by property name
a property value
or by
. When you enter the text in the
Search text box, the matching results display in the list
area below the text box.
When you enter text into the Search field, the
displays and you can delete the entered text and restart
your search.
3
Show Property Detail Button
Enables the Property Detail Sub-section of the Property
view. When Show Property Detail
is enabled, at the
bottom of the Property view, details about the selected
property displays, such as property type, allowable
values, the default setting, and property description.
4
Category\Property List Area
Displays the properties and their settings associated
with the active element.
Click the Show Evaluation Editor
to open the
Evaluation Editor view and automatically enter the
property into the Property field of the Evaluation Editor.
When a property has an active evaluation the
196
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
Evaluation Editor button changes from gray to green:
.
The following icons display next to if a property has an
evaluation associated with it.
- Deletes the associated property evaluation.
Allows you to enable (box is checked) or disable
(box is not checked) an associated property evaluation.
Note, this is not the same as “deleting” the evaluation.
The list area can also be filtered via the Search field.
5
Property Detail Sub-section
Display information about a selected property when
Show Property Detail
is enabled. The following
information displays for each property: the property
Type, permitted Values, Default values, and a
Description of the property.
The sub-section can be resized by clicking and
dragging the borderline.
5.18.3
5.18.3.1
Working with the Properties View
Filtering in the Properties View
 You have a list of properties in the Properties view that are associated with
elements on the canvas, and you want to filter the properties by name or value.

Enter the name of a property or enter a value you want to filter by, doing one of
the following:
-
To filter on a property name, click Name
and enter a property name. All
matching properties display.
-
To filter on property value, click Value
and enter a value. All matching
property values display.
5.18.3.2
Setting the Tooltip Property
 You are in Design or Test mode, and have elements on the active canvas you
want to add tooltips to.

In the Properties view, navigate to the General category and enter the desired
tooltip text into the Tooltip property field.
 When you are in Runtime mode and move the mouse over the element, the
tooltip now displays in with a yellow background.
5.18.3.3
Modifying Element Property Details
You want to view and modify the properties of a graphic, graphic object, or
element.
197
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
 You have a graphic open and from the View tab, in the Display Views group,
have check marked the Properties option.
1. Select the element or object on the canvas, whose properties you want to view
or modify. To select the actual graphic properties, click anywhere on the
canvas.
 The Properties view changes its title to the selected element or object type,
and all the properties available for that object display in the view.
2. Optional. You can type a property name in the filter field to quickly locate a
property by name
or by value
.
3. To change a property value, navigate to the property and click in the properties
field.
 The property is highlighted in yellow.
4. Optional. To view more information about a property, select the property and
click Show Property Detail
.
 Detailed information about the selected property displays in the Properties
view.
5. For each property you want to modify, do one of the following:
-
From System Browser, you can drag-and-drop and object over the field.
-
Type a value or text. In some cases, you will see up and down arrows in
the field, which allows you to increase or decrease the current value. If you
place your mouse over the arrows, the Horizontal and Vertical Slider
displays. Click-and-drag to use the slider to change the value of that
property.
-
Check mark the box to enable or disable the property.
-
NOTE: If you see a Substitutions property with a “*” next to it, you cannot
change that property directly. The property takes the value from the Symbol
Instance > Object Reference property.
 The property is automatically updated.
6. Optional. If you want to apply an evaluation to the property, click Show
Evaluation Editor
next to the property.
 The Evaluation Editor view displays the property in its Property field.
5.18.4
About Animation
Animation is the visualization of a change and can be used to show moving units,
flashing lights, and rotating elements. The visualization of change is represented by
displaying images, Symbols, based on a data point’s state or value range. All
element properties in the Graphics Editor can be configured for animation using the
animation element.
Animation Element
The Animation element, available from the Insert group, allows you to set the
property evaluations that determine which images (Symbol instances) will display
based on the resulting state or value range of the animation element’s Symbol
Reference property.
For example, you can create animated Symbols to visually show the state of a fan:
198
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations

Display the Fan Stopped Symbol, when the fan speed = 0

Display the Fan Rotation Slow when the fan speed = 1
Display the Fan Rotation Fast when the fan speed = 2

5
Displaying the Animation Element
The following rules apply to value of the Symbol Reference property of an
animation and how the animation element or Symbol displays in Preview and
Design mode:

If the Symbol Reference property is empty:
– If there is no Symbol Reference evaluation – The default Symbol displays
(INSERT Animation ICON).
– If a Symbol Reference evaluation exists - Display the first non-empty
Symbol of the evaluations.
–
If the Symbol Reference property is set - Display the associated Symbol.
The following rules apply to the Animation element Symbol Reference property and
how the animation element or Symbol displays in Test, Runtime, and in the
Graphics Viewer:

If there is no Symbol Reference evaluation:
– If the Symbol Reference property is empty - Show nothing.
– If the “Symbol Reference property is set - Display this Symbol.

If a Symbol Reference evaluation exists:
– If the evaluation result is empty - Show nothing.
– If the evaluation result is a valid Symbol – Display the resulting Symbol.
–
If the evaluation result is an invalid Symbol – Display the #Ref Symbol
(ICON: Insert SGOT Reference Error Symbol).
Size and Resizing
Resizing an Animation element on the canvas affects all resulting Symbol instance
frames with the same factor. This is only important if the resulting frames have
different sizes. For example, If an Animation object is resized to half of its original
size; all the resulting Symbol instances will be half of their original size.
A Symbol instance can also be resized. Based on the currently visible Symbol
instance, the resize factors for the Width and Height properties are used if and
when the resulting visible Symbol is updated due to changes in the Symbol
reference property.
Position
The position, as set by the X and Y properties, of a Symbol instance does not
change when the resulting Symbol instance that is displayed on the canvas is
updated due to changes in the Symbol Reference property, for example, after a
data point COV.
The anchor element (Insert ICON) is used to specify the logical origin of the
Symbol when it is displayed as an instance on the canvas. Every Symbol has an
associated anchor, which can be toggled to be visible or not in the Element Tree
using the Visible check box. If the anchor is not visible, the top left corner of the
bounding rectangle and all the Symbol elements are used for positioning.
199
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5.18.4.1
Animation Matrix
Any data point type can be used to create an expression for animating an
element’s property. The relationship between the data point type and the element
property type are generally converted to the target element type.
The table below represents the animation matrix and conversions possible
between data point type and element property types.
Property Type:
Data Point Type:
5.18.5
Double String
Bool
CompoundBrush
Eg.
Eg.
Eg.
Eg. BackColor
Angle
Text Blinking
Sint32
Eg.
Precision
ENUM
Eg.
Ellipse
Type
UInt8 (char, byte)
X
X
X
X
X
X
UINT32 (UInt,
bit32)
X
X
X
X
X
X
SInt32 (Int)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Double (Float)
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bool1
X
X
X
X
X
X
String
X
X
X
X
X
X
DateTime2
X
X
X
X
X
X
Dpld
NA
X
NA
NA
NA
NA
LangText
NA
X
NA
NA
NA
NA
Blob
NA
X
NA
NA
NA
NA
1)
O or an empty value is set to False and Black. Any other value is set to True and White.
2)
Based on the number of seconds since 12:00:00 midnight, January 1st, 0001 for the date/time
value. For example, May 5, 2010, 3 PM, is represented by the value: 63408495600
Evaluation Editor View
The Evaluation Editor view allows you to select element properties from the
canvas, and configure evaluations to facilitate animated graphics by creating and
applying expressions and applying substitutions to the properties.
200
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
Expression Section
Evaluation Editor
Item
Description
Expand/Collapse Button
Expand and collapse the Evaluation Editor view.
Property
Select from a list of properties in the drop-down menu. The properties
listed are all associated with the active element on the canvas. The
property selected receives the evaluation.
Type
Select and display the type of evaluation to apply to the selected
element property.
Clear
Empty all the fields in the Evaluation Editor, except for the Property field.
The Type field is reset to Simple.
Enable\Disable Evaluation
Select the check box to enable the current evaluation or, deselect this
check box to disable the evaluation.
Value
Display the current value used to manipulate the associated graphic
object.
Read Only Field: Displays the current value of the property in Test and
Runtime mode. In Design mode, the value displayed is the current value
of the element property in the Property Viewer.
Previous and Next Arrows
Select previous or next arrow to scroll through recently created
evaluations associated with the active element on the canvas. The
arrows are only visible if there are existing evaluations associated with
the active element.
Expression
The path and property name of the data point whose value is applied to
the element evaluation.

The path of the data point displays using the data point “Names”
setting. (See System Browser)

The data point’s default property value is used, if none is specified
in the path. For example, the following is the path to data point
AI_1:
System1.ManagementView:ManagementView.FieldNetwor
ks.BACnetNetwork_1.Hardware.TECDevice_1.Local_IO.
AI_1::
To specify a specific data point property, type “.Property_Name”
at the end of the data point path, after the “::”. For example,
System1.ManagementView:ManagementView.FieldNetwor
ks.BACnetNetwork_1.Hardware.TECDevice_1.Local_IO.
201
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
AI_1::.Limit_Enable

Result:
To find out what properties are associated with the currently
selected data point, navigate to the Extended Operations tab in
System Manager.
Display the result of the expression using the value type of the source.
The data type of the expression result is always the type of the
expression. This value is mapped to the property type.
Evaluation Editor Tools Menu
Evaluation Editor Tools Menu
Item
Description
Condition Order
Organize the conditions in order of preference.
Delete Condition
Delete a condition.
Only applies to Animated, Discrete, and Linear evaluations.
New Condition
Add a new condition to the list.
Only applies to Discrete and Linear evaluations.
Linear Evaluation Editor Section
Linear Evaluation Fields
Item
Description
Range
Display the minimum and maximum range applied to the expression value. If the
expression value falls below the Min value, then the associated Value is applied
202
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
to the property evaluated. If the expression value is higher than the Max range,
than that Value is applied to the property.
Value
Display the value associated with Min and Max fields determine how the property
displays in the graphic.
Auto Range
If checked, the Min and Max value range from the expression is applied. If one of
the Min or Max values is left blank, then the corresponding minimum or maximum
range is taken from the expression range.
Discrete Editor Evaluation Section
Discrete Evaluation Fields
Item
Description
Condition
Display a range or threshold, when met by the expression result, applies the
associated Value to the property evaluation.
Multiple conditions are supported.
203
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
Animation Editor Evaluation Section
Animated Evaluated Fields
Item
Description
Frame
The frame number.
Value
The value that is applied to the expression result during that frame interval.
Animation Interval
The interval time between frames in mille-seconds when animated. The
value must be greater than or equal to 100.
204
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
Multi Evaluation Editor Section
Multi Evaluated Fields
5.18.6
5.18.6.1
Item
Description
Condition
Associates one check box per expression, indicating whether an expression
is true, false, or unspecified. If a condition(s) are true, the associated Value is
applied from left (top) to right (bottom) expression. One checkbox per
expression displays for each condition.
Value
If checked, the enumerated values of a property type display with the
property value in the Discrete and Linear Value field.
Working with the Evaluation Editor View
Starting an Evaluation
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic or Symbol open and would
like to provide some property substitutions to an element.
1. From the canvas or the Element Tree view, click on the element you want to
evaluate.
 The Properties view title is updated to reflect the name of the selected
element and the associated properties display in the view. Additionally, in
the Evaluation Editor, the Property drop- down menu is populated with the
associated properties.
 Navigate to the Evaluation Editor view.
2. From the Property drop-down menu, select the property you want to evaluate.
3. From the Type drop-down menu, select an evaluation type.
4. Proceed to the following topics to complete the evaluation configuration:
205
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5.18.6.2
-
Defining a Simple Evaluation [ ➙206]
-
Defining a Linear Evaluation [ ➙206]
-
Defining a Discrete Evaluation [ ➙206]
-
Defining a Multi Evaluation [ ➙207]
-
Defining an Animated Evaluation [ ➙207]
Defining a Simple Evaluation
 You are in the Evaluation Editor, and have selected Type > Simple.

5.18.6.3
In the Expression field, enter the data point name or address of a system object
and the corresponding expression using the correct syntax. For help with
expression syntax, see Expression Syntax.
Defining a Linear Evaluation
 You are in the Evaluation Editor and have selected Type > Linear.
1. In the Expression field, enter a data point name or address of a system object
along with a minimum and maximum value range you want to apply. For help
with expression syntax, see Expression Syntax.
2. Do one of the following:
-
To manually enter a minimum and maximum range for the expression,
deselect the Auto Range check box. Set the Range: enter values for the
Min and Max fields and then enter a Value to apply for each range. If you
leave a Min or Max value blank, the corresponding minimum or maximum
range is taken from the expression range. If the expression doesn’t have a
range then the values -1.79E+308 (Min) or +1.79E+308 (Max) are used.
-
To apply the minimum and maximum range of the expression to the Range,
leave the Min and Max fields blank and enter a Value to represent each
threshold.
3. On the Home tab, from the Modes group, select Test.
4. Navigate to the Value Simulator view and complete the fields to configure a
simulation.
 The evaluation is simulated on the canvas.
5.18.6.4
Defining a Discrete Evaluation
 You are in the Evaluation Editor and have selected Type > Discrete.
1. In the Expression field, enter a data point name or address of a system object.
For help with expression syntax, see Expression Syntax.
2. For each Condition, enter a value range and enter or select an associated
Value to apply if the condition is met. Add and repeat for each condition as
needed.
3. Sort the conditions in order of preference, using the arrow button at the bottom
of the view.
4. On the Home tab, from the Modes group, select Test.
206
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Element Properties and Evaluations
5
5. Navigate to the Value Simulator view and complete the fields to configure a
simulation.
 The evaluation is simulated on the canvas
5.18.6.5
Defining an Animated Evaluation
 You are in the Evaluation Editor, and have selected Type > Animated.
1. In the Expression field, enter a data point name or address of a system object
along with a result or value you want to apply. For help with expression syntax,
see Expression Sy.
2. For each Frame [Condition], enter the value to associate with that frame. To
insert another frame, click
.
 You are now ready to test your Evaluation with the Simulation View. Be
sure you have enabled your evaluation by checking the Evaluation Enable
check box.
3. On the Home tab, from the Modes group, select Test.
4. Navigate to the Value Simulator view and complete the fields to configure a
simulation.
The evaluation is simulated on the canvas.
5.18.6.6
Defining a Multi Evaluation
 You are in the Evaluation Editor and have selected Type > Multi.
1. Enter a data point name or address of a digital system object for each
Expression as needed.
2. Enter or select the Value for each required Condition.
3. For every Condition, set the state for each related expression by using the
check boxes. For each condition, the expression checkboxes are ordered from
left (first expression in the expression list) to right (last expression in the list).
4. The check box states are represented as follows:
-
Checked (Show Icon) = condition is true.
-
Unchecked (Show Icon) = condition is false.
-
Grey check mark (Show Icon) = condition is neither true nor false
(unspecified) and the corresponding expression is ignored.
5. Sort the conditions in order of preference, using the arrow button at the bottom
of the view.
6. On the Home tab, from the Modes group, select Test.
7. Navigate to the Value Simulator view and complete the fields to configure a
simulation.
 The evaluation is simulated on the canvas.
207
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Value Simulation
5.18.6.7
Modifying or Deleting an Existing Evaluation
 You are in Design or Test mode and have an active element on the canvas that
has one or more properties associated with an evaluation.
1. On the canvas, click on the element whose property evaluation you want to
modify.
 The element is active and the scrolling arrows in the Evaluation Editor view
are active.
2. In the Evaluation Editor view, click on the navigation arrows (ADD icons) until
you get the property evaluation you want to modify.
 The property with the evaluation settings display.
3. Do one of the following:
-
Clear all evaluations fields – click on the (Insert Icon) to clear all the fields.
-
Modify the existing evaluation settings as necessary.
-
Click on the (Insert Icon) to delete the evaluation. The evaluation is deleted.
4. If you have not already enabled value simulation to test your settings, navigate
to the Value Simulator view and select the Run Value Simulator check box. If
necessary, adjust your simulation preferences.
 The results of the evaluation should be reflected in the running simulation.
5.19
5.19.1
Working with Value Simulation
About Value Simulation
Value simulation allows you to simulate COVs for data points while not online. You
can test a graphics elements whose properties have values and expressions
attributed to them when you are offline and do not have a live database to work
with.
The Value Simulator populates when you have a graphic open with values
attributed to them. You can control the simulation of the data point in two ways: to
control values of data points.
Automatic – the value simulator generates values based on a mathematical
function cycle.
Manual - The value simulation can be changed manually through a slider.
You can also adjust the value range settings of the simulation and filter the data
points displayed in the Object Selection section of the view.
Types of Cycle Selections:
You can choose the type of simulation you to use based on mathematical wave
graphs. You can set the Sample Rate and the Cycle rate, which is the number of
complete cycles passing a given point in one second (or the customized time) and
is measured in Hertz.
The wave type choices are as follows:

Cosine: A cycle that represents the orthogonal projection of the rotated Unit
Circle, starting at 1.

Ramp: The values are incremented and decremented evenly.
Random: Generates random values and ignores the cycle time.

208
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Value Simulation
5.19.2
5

Sawtooth: A cycle that increases linearly with time for a fixed interval and then
drops sharply and repeats the process.

Sine: A cycle that represents the orthogonal projection of the rotated Unit
Circle, starting at 0.
Value Simulator View
The Value Simulator view allows you to select, view, and adjust the settings for
simulating property values to test how graphic settings will be applied. The four
sections, Automatic, Manual, Graphic Template, and Object Selection, can be
expanded or collapsed.
Value Simulator View
Field
Description
Automatic Section
Run Value Simulator
Select this option to run the automatic simulation of data
points or values associated with element properties. If the
check box is cleared, simulation will not be run on the data
points.
Type Drop-Down Menu
Select a simulation type, view the simulation type selected,
and adjust the Sample Rate and Cycle of the simulation
values.
Auto Range
Run an enable automatic calculation of the minimum and
maximum value range for each data point selected for
simulation. If the check box is cleared, you can manually set
the Min. and Max value range for each data point.
Manual Section
Slider
Manually control the simulation. The tick marks on the slider
are 1/10 apart from each other and the value of each tick
209
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Working with Value Simulation
mark is dependent on the Min. and Max data value range
entered.
The data point Value range and Text are updated as you
move the slider.
Snap to Tick Marks
Snap the slider to the nearest tick mark when moving the
slider.
Auto Range
Use the slider to represent the data point range and manually
the values for simulation. If the check box is cleared, you can
manually enter the Min. and Max value range for each data
point.
Graphic Template Section
Enter a data point reference instance to assign to an object on a Graphic Template and
test for COVs.
Object Reference
Enter a data point instance text to filter the list of all data
points currently used in an evaluation and in a currently open
graphic. Click Assign to start the COV subscription on the
graphic.
Object List Section
All data points available for simulation are listed with the following information:
Filter
Enter text to filter the list of all data points currently used in an
evaluation and in a currently open graphic.
#
Display the number of times the data point is used in any
evaluation. display-Only field.
Name
Display the name of the data point. If the value is 0, the data
point is not being used and can be deleted from the list.
Display-Only field.
Value
Display the current value of the data point. Display-Only field.
Text
Display the formatted version of the current value. DisplayOnly field.
Type
Display the expression type of the data point or allows you to
select a data point type from the drop-down menu.
PVSS
Display the PVSS-related data types and allows you to select
a data point type from the drop-down menu.
Precision
Display the actual number or decimal points. Formatted
values are rounded with the precision.
Min
Display the minimum range of the data point.
If the Minimum range is empty, NAN displays in the field, and
the simulation is ignored.
Max
Display the maximum range of the data point.
If the Maximum range is empty, NAN displays in the field, and
the simulation is ignored.
Units
Enter a measure of units for the data point.
Status
Select a condition to apply to a data point from the drop-down
menu or view the last current status of a data point.
Available status messages:
 FormatError
 Invalid
 No Access – the data point is not readable.
 Pending
 Undefined - default value; no status change has occurred.
 Valid
Simulated
Include the data point value in the simulation. If checked, the
data point is included in the value simulation.
210
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Depths
Writable
5.19.3
5.19.3.1
5
Use the manual slider and simulator to write values down to
the system (for example, to a field device). NOTE: The Value
field is not affected by this check box. This check box is not
checked by default.
Working with Value Simulation
Enabling Value Simulation
 You have a graphic open with elements whose properties have data points or
values have evaluations applied to them in the Evaluation Editor view.
1. Navigate to the Value Simulator view.
2. Expand the Automatic section and enable the Run Value Simulator check box.
3. From the drop-down menu, choose a simulation pattern and enter values for
the Sample Rate and Cycle.
 NOTE: The Cycle field is disabled if you have selected Random simulation.
4. You can manually enter the minimum and maximum value range for the data
points in the simulation or have the range calculated automatically. Do one of
the following:
 Check the Auto Range box to enable automatic calculation of the minimum
and maximum value range for each data point selected for simulation.
 Enter a value in the Min and Max fields for manual range entry.
5. In the Manual section, do the following:
 Check the Auto Range box to enable automatic range selection or enter a
value in the Min and Max fields for manual range entry.
 Check the Snap to Tick Marks box to increment the slider values 1/10th
apart. When you move the slider, it will jump to the nearest tick mark.
6. The Object Selection and Control section displays a list of all the available data
points in the graphic. Check the Simulate box for the data points you want to
include in the simulation.
7. Optional. In the Graphic Template section, drag-and-drop a data point instance
from System Browser to the Object Reference field. The object reference is not
stored in the graphic template, it is purely for testing. A graphic template always
has to be opened indirectly via a data point in order to see the correct COV
values.
8. On the Home tab, from the Mode group, select Test.
 Test mode is enabled and the simulation of the selected data point values
begins.
5.20
About Depths
A depth is a grouping of layers displayed at a pre-defined zoom factor. The depth
allows you to navigate up and down through a graphic to view increasing levels of
functional detail.
When you create a graphic, a default layer and a depth are automatically
generated and associated with the graphic. Though you must have at least one
layer associated with a graphic, it is not necessary to have an associated depth;
211
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Depths
therefore, using the default depth is optional. Each time you create a new depth, a
layer is created and associated with the new depth.
When a graphic or a graphic template is opened, the initial depth is selected as
follows:

If you open the graphic or graphic template, by clicking on a data point, the
depth is determined by the primary selection of the point.

If you open the graphic directly in the Graphics Viewer, the depth with the
largest Display Size is selected.

If you open the graphic in the Graphics Viewer by clicking on a manual
viewport, the depth from the viewport is used. If the viewport has no depth
associated with it, then the depth with the largest "Display Size" is selected.

If you have a point associated with a manual viewport, the viewport has a
higher priority for depth calculation.
The Depths view is where you create, delete, and rename depths, as well as select
which existing layer to associate with a given depth. For each depth, you can also
manually set the display size and the Symbol scale factor.
5.20.1
Planning Your Depths
When you create a new depth the current display size (based on the current zoom
factor) is stored and displayed with the depth. If required, this display size can be
manually modified.
When you select a depth from the Depths view, the layers belonging to the depth
display and the zoom factor is set so that the current display size is defined in the
active depth.
5.20.2
Depths View
The Depths view allows you create, rename, and delete a depth, re-order multiple
depths, and to change the display size and Symbol scale factor properties of a
depth. You can view a list of depths associated with the active canvas and move
them up or down to order them.
The width of the Depths Overview View columns can be adjusted manually.
Depths View
Field
Description
Selected Depth
Displays the selected depth and its associated layers on the canvas.
Use the drop-down arrow to select from a list of available depths. When
you select a depth, the current factor is adjusted according to the
display size of the selected depth. Additionally, only the layers
associated with this depth will be displayed.
Depth Name
When checked, the Depths Overview expands the layer columns to
display all available layers. To return to the default Depths View,
212
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
About Depths
5
uncheck the box. This is unchecked by default.
Display Size
The display size of the active depth. The default value in this column is
taken from the display size of the main view at its current zoom factor
when creating a depth. This value can be manually changed by clicking
on the current value and entering the desired display factor. The current
zoom factor in the Graphic Editor will then automatically be adjusted
according to the display size value.
Symbol Scale Factor
Display size of symbol. The default value in this column is set to the
display size\graphic size. This value can be manually changed by
clicking on the current value and entering the desired value as a ratio.
Layer 1-12
The available layers and their property descriptions for each depth.
When checked, the associated layer appears with that depth. If
unchecked, the layer does not appear with that depth. To remove the
associations, deselect the layer box for each layer. The boxes are
unchecked by default.
All checked layers are visible in the Element View; unchecked layers are
not. If you add a new layer, it will automatically be checked to display
under in the active depth.
NOTE: Background layers can be associated with multiple depths;
foreground layers can only be associated with one depth. If a second
depth is selected for a foreground layer, the previous foreground layer
box will automatically be unchecked.
Depth Order Arrows -- Allows you to change a depths position in the
depth order. You can move a depth to the top of the list, up a level at a
time, down a level at a time, and to the bottom.
Insert New Depth -- Allows you to insert a new depth.
Delete Depths -- Allows you delete the selected depth.
5.20.3
5.20.3.1
Working with Depths
Adding a Depth
 You are in Design or Test mode and want to add a depth to the active graphic.
1. From the Depths view, click Insert New Depth
.
 A new depth and a new layer associated with the depth are added to the
list of depths in the Depths view, the Element Tree, and the active graphic.
2. Complete the following fields as necessary:
-
Depth Name: Click in the current depth name field and type the new name
for the depth.
-
Display Size: The default size is displayed according to the current display
size of the main menu. You can manually enter a value, by clicking in the
field. To manually update the size, click in the field and enter a new value.
-
Symbol Scale Factor: Enter a value
-
Layer 1-12: Select a layer
 You have added a new depth to the graphic and can add elements, etc.
5.20.3.2
Selecting an Existing Depth
 You have an open graphic that contains multiple levels of depth, and you want
to select a specific depth to view or work on in the canvas work area.
213
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing

From the Depths view, navigate to and double-click on the depth you would like
to make active.
 The selected depth is now active on the canvas.
5.20.3.3
Deleting a Depth
 You are in Design or Test mode and have a graphic open with more than one
depth level.
 NOTE: By default, every graphic (Symbol, graphic template, etc.) always
contains at least one depth level for each graphic, and cannot be deleted.

In the Depths view, do one of the following:
-
Navigate to the depth you want to delete, and click Delete Depths
-
To delete more than one depth at a time, press down the CTRL key while
.
selecting the depths you want to delete, and then click Delete Depths
.
 The depth and any associated layers are deleted.
5.20.3.4
Renaming a Depth
 You are in Design or Test mode and have an open graphic.

From the Depths view, click on the current name of the depth and then type the
new name.
 The depth is named or renamed.
5.21
Overview of Printing
You can print your documents (Symbols, graphics, templates, etc.) from the
Graphics Editor. There are several views and panes that allow you to select what
to print, how to format the printed copy and to preview the document before
sending it to the printer.
Printing options are accessible from the File menu or the Home tab.
Printing
You can print a document from the following locations:




File Menu
Home tab of the Ribbon
Page Setup view
Print Preview pane
Page Setup View
The Page Setup view allows you to select what or which document(s) to print, and
provides filters to help you select the specific type of documents to locate and print.
As you make your selection on the Page Setup view, a sample graphic instantly
updates in the view to display how the selection will affects the printed document.
To view your actual document with the applied settings, click on the Preview button
at any time to view how the selections affect your document.
From the Page Setup View you can specify the following print settings:
 The Zoom ratio of how the image(s) will display on the printer paper.
214
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
5

How many sheets to Fit to Page; you can have more than one page printed on
a sheet.

Adjust the Paper Format to set paper type and page orientation, and set the
Margins according to inches, millimeters, or pixels.
How the Content of the graphic prints, such as color or grayscale, or you can
enable an ink saving options, such as printing without the background or to
print the wireframe only. Additionally, you can specify whether or not to print
the bounding rectangles and the grid and guidelines, if enabled in the original
document.


How the Header and Footer should be customized by choosing from a list of
existing Keywords or selecting Images from the Image Library. As you add
items to the header and footer fields, a preview of your selections display below
the customizable fields, showing the actual text used.

The font type, size, and color for the header and footer.

You can select to use the Graphics Editor Default settings or Import an existing
print settings file (.xml). A print setting or page setup file is created when you
make your Page Setup selections on then click on the Export button to save
them as a page setup file (.xml).
Preview Pane
The Preview Pane allows you to view your document before sending it to the
printer. You can adjust the viewing size of the printed document, by increasing or
decreasing the zoom or selecting one of four viewing options: 100%, Page Width,
Whole Page, and Two Pages. Additionally, you can highlight and copy text from the
header or footer areas to use elsewhere. You can also right-click on the displayed
document in the preview pane to access the context menu to access the viewing
options.
Image Library
The Image Library pane, lists the available images for inserting into your printed
document’s header or footer. You can also add or delete images from the library.
The Image Library is accessible via the Page Setup view in the Header and Footer
section.
5.21.1
Print Preview
The Print Preview pane allows you to view your document before sending it to the
printer. You can increase or decrease the viewing area of the document to get
either get a close-up of a specific area or to view the document from a distance for
layout, formatting purposes etc.
Icon Name and Functionality.
Icon
Name
Description
Print
Launch the Print dialog box.
Copy
Copy text from the headers and footers.
Increase Content Size
Enlarge the content by increasing the
magnification level in the Print Preview
pane.
Decrease Content Size
Diminish the content by decreasing the
magnification level.
100%
Display the content at a 100%
215
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
5.21.2
Page Width
Adjust the view of the document to the
width of the preview pane.
Whole Page
Fit a whole page into the preview pane.
Two Pages
Display two pages in book layout in the
preview pane.
Page Setup View
The Page Set-up pane is available from the Home tab > Printing group or from the
File menu. Once displayed, the pane can be docked in the dock panel, just like the
other Graphic Editor views.
5.21.2.1
Page Setup View
Page Setup Pane
216
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
5
Section
Field
Description
Documents
Look In
Select a print option from the drop-down menu to
choose what to print:
 Current Document – Prints the active
document.
 All Open Documents – Prints all open
documents.
NOTE: When either one of the above options are
selected, the Type and Name options are inactive.
 Entire Project – Allows you to print all project
documents, and any open graphics.
Type
Select what type of document to filter.
Only active when the Entire Project option is
chosen in the Documents section.
Name
Enter text to filter by a documents name.
Print Single
Documents
Print the documents selected in the Look In field as
one single document. No print preview provided if
this option is chosen.
NOTE: Disabled if Current Document is selected.
Print Only Visible Print only the area of the current document that is
Part
visible and has the current focus.
NOTE: In the Graphics Viewer this feature is
enabled by default.
Zoom
Fit to Page
100%
View the document at a 100% zoom-factor.
Custom
Enter a value to adjust the zoom-factor rate at
which you want to view the document.
Grow
Increase the graphic to fit on the selected number
of pages as entered in the Number of Sheets area.
Shrink
Decrease the graphic to fit on the selected number
of pages as entered in the Number of Sheets area.
Number of
Sheets
Across – Enter a value to specify how many sheets
are displayed.
Down - Enter a value to specify how many sheets
are displayed vertically.
Alignment
Select the positioning of the graphics on the page. The sample graphic
updates when you make your selection.
Paper Format
Paper Form
Select a page size and format from the drop-down
menu.
Select the orientation of the printed documentation:
 Portrait
 Landscape
Margins
Left
Enter a value to set the left margin.
Right
Enter a value to set the right margin.
Top
Enter a value to set the top margin.
Bottom
Enter a value to set the bottom margin.
Units
Select the measurement type to apply to the margin
scale from the drop-down menu. Options include
Inches, Millimeters, and Pixels.
Mini Preview Pane Display a sample graphic of how the document will print. The sample
graphics automatically adjusts with each selection made in the Page
Setup pane. Margins can be adjusted by clicking on the blue margin
lines.
Content
Color Mode
Select how you want to print the content, header,
217
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
and footer, choose from:
 Color – Document is printed using the original
colors.
 Greyscale – Document is printed using a
greyscale color scheme.
Header and
Footer
Save Ink Mode
Select either print the document in its original color
state, or to select from one of two ink-saving
modes:
 Original – Print document(s) as created.
 No Background – Set the document
background to white. Additionally, the nearlywhite colors (#FFFFFFFE) in all fill, stroke,
background, shadow and glow properties are
set to black. Images and XPS elements are not
affected.
 Wireframe - Set the document background to
white. Additionally, all fill and background
properties are set to white. If the border of a
modified shape is not set or transparent, it is
also set to black.
Graphic Mode
Print documents in the following modes:
In Design Mode, the document prints:
 Without animation
 Invisible elements
 Grid and guidelines, if enabled
 Content outside the graphic boundaries
In Runtime, the document prints:
 Animation, without actual values – values set to
zero for printing purposes.
 Content inside the graphic boundaries
In Online the document prints:
 Animation, displaying real online values (User
login required).
 Content inside the graphic boundaries.
 Timeout field is enabled. Enter a value to
specify a maximum wait time until all data
values are gathered and processed. As soon
as all values are processed the document
prints. Values not processed by the specified
timeout period are displayed with the #COM
error.
Show Grid and
Guidelines
Specify how any enabled grid and guidelines on
your document are printed. From the drop-down
menu select from the following:
 ON to always display and print.
 OFF to never display and not print.
 AUTO to show the grid and guidelines only in
Design mode and only when the grid is enabled
in the document.
Show Bounding
Rectangle
Select whether the bounding rectangle around the
elements are visible on the printed document.
 ON - Display bounding.
 OFF - never display.
 AUTO - Display the document bounding
rectangle only in Design mode.
Add a customized Header and\or Footer to your documents, and then
preview how they will appear on the documents.
Header\Footer
Display the text, keywords or images currently
218
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
Print Setup
Toolbar
5.21.2.2
5
Field
added to the Header or Footer field.
Font
Display the Font Chooser [➙ 220] pane, which
allows you to customize the Header\Footer font
type, color, and size.
Preview
Display the text and substituted key words that will
display in the header\footer.
NOTE: Images are not displayed in the preview
filed.
The substituted keywords show the final text, when
possible. Some key words are updated during the
print process.
Keywords
Select and insert predefined text from the dropdown menu to display in the Header or Footer
fields.
Images
Select and insert an image reference from the
Image Library [➙ 219] into the Header or Footer
fields.
Image Library
Open the Image Library and allows you to add,
modify, or delete images that can be inserted in the
Header or Footer fields.
Default
Click this button to return to the default Page Setup
settings and disregard any selections made.
Export
Save the current settings as a page setup (.xml) file
for future use.
Import
Navigate to and select an existing page setup file
(.xml) file to open and use on the selected items to
print.
Preview
Apply the settings and displays the selected
document(s) in print preview.
Print
Apply the settings and sends the document to the
selected printer.
OK
Send the document(s) to the printer.
Cancel
Close the dialog box and discard any selections
made without printing anything.
Apply
Accept all selections made, but, do not print
anything.
Image Library Window
The Image Library window is where you can view, import, and delete images that
can be added to a document’s header or footer.
The Image Library window is accessed from Page Setup pane.
219
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
Image Library
5.21.2.3
Section\Field
Description
Images
Display a list of available images that can be inserted into the
header or footer of your document.
Import
Display the Open dialog box that allows you to browse to and add
images to the Image Library list.
Delete
Delete the currently highlighted image in the Images list.
Copy
Copies the bitmap of the selected image onto the clipboard.
The Bitmap Transparency [➙ 61] color is applied.
Paste
Replaces the image data of the selected image with the bitmap in
the clipboard.
The Bitmap Transparency [➙ 61] color is applied.
Preview
Display the currently selected image from the Images list.
Enable Fill check box to have the entire image displayed in the
header or footer.
OK
Save any changes made in the Image Library and closes the pane.
Cancel
Do not save any of the changes made in the Images Library
Font Chooser
The Font Chooser window allows you to customize the font settings for text in the
Header and Footer fields of a document. Settings made are stored with the header
and footer settings in the user settings.
The Font Chooser window is accessed from Page Setup window.
220
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
5
Font Chooser
5.21.3
5.21.3.1
Section\Field
Description
Font Family
Display a list of available fonts that can be applied to the header or
footer of your document.
Size
Enter a font point size.
Color
Select a color to apply to the text.
Style
Apply Bold and Italic styling to the text.
Preview
Display how the current font selections will be applied to the
Header\Footer. The preview pane updates automatically every time
a font setting is made.
OK
Save selections made and close the Font Chooser pane.
Cancel
Ignore any selections make and close the Font Chooser pane.
Working with Printing
Aligning a Graphic on the Print Page
 You can specify how you want to align documents images on a printed page.
1. On the Home tab, in Printing group, click Page Setup
.
 The Page Setup view displays.
2. From the Alignment section, click on one of the nine squares to specify the
location of the image on the printed page.
 The Sample Graphic thumbnail is updated to display selected alignment.
3. Click one of the following:
5.21.3.2
-
OK – The selected alignment is saved and the Page Setup view closes.
-
Apply – The selected alignment is saved; the Page Setup view remains
open.
Customizing the Header and Footer Fonts
 You are in the Page Setup window and you want to customize the fonts for the
Header\Footer for your printed documents.
221
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
 As you make your selections in the Font Chooser window, the sample text in
the Preview pane automatically updates to the selections made.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Page Setup
.
 The Page Setup window displays.
2. Click the expander arrow
to expand the Header and Footer section.
3. To change the header font, click the header Font button.
 The Font Chooser window displays.
4. From the Font Family drop-down menu, select a font.
5. Enter a value for the font in the Size field.
6. From the Color drop-down menu, select a font color.
7. (Optional) Select the Bold and\or Italic check boxes to further format the text.
8. Click OK when you are done.
 The font selections are saved and applied. The Font Chooser window closes.
5.21.3.3
Inserting Headers and Footers
 You have a document (graphic, symbol, or template) open and you want to
insert a header and or footer. You can set the Header and Footer fonts from
the Font Chooser window.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Page Setup
.
 The Page Setup view displays.
2. Click the expander arrow
of the Header and Footer section, and do the
following:
-
Click the Header and Footer check boxes, respectively, to enable as
necessary.
-
To add keywords to the header or the footer - Click in the appropriate field
and position the cursor where you want to add a keyword. From the
Keywords drop-down menu, select the keyword you want to add and click
Insert. The keyword field is added to the field and a preview of it displays
below. Repeat with as many keywords as necessary.
-
To format the header text - Click the Font button next to the Header field.
The Font Chooser window displays. Select the desired font settings for the
text. Click OK to save your font selections and close the Font Chooser
window. To format the footer text, click the Font button next and repeat the
steps.
-
To add images to header or footer - Click in the Header or Footer field and
position the cursor where you want to add an image. From the Images
drop-down menu, select the image you want to add and then click Insert.
The keyword field is added to the field and the mini preview pane is
updated. Repeat with as many keywords as necessary. If you do not see
the image you want to add, click on the Edit button, and the Image Library
displays. From here you can add more images to the drop-down menu.
222
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
5.21.3.4
5
Inserting Page Numbers
You can add page numbers to your documents from the Page Setup view.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Page Setup
.
 The Page Setup view displays
2. Navigate to the Header or Footer field, and click to place the cursor in the
correct position.
 The cursor is flashing in the correct position of the Header or Footer field.
3.
From the Keyword drop-down menu, select PageNumber, and then click
Insert.
 The PageNumber field displays in the Header or Footer field.
5.21.3.5
Previewing a Document to Print
 You have a document (graphic, symbol, or template) open and you want to
preview it before printing.
 NOTE: You cannot print manual or automatic pages.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Preview
.
 The Print Preview window opens and the currently active documents
displays.
2. (Optional) To search for specific text in the previewed document header and
footer, do the following:
-
In the Type text to find field, type the text to locate, and from the drop-down
menu, select a search option.
-
Click the Find Previous
and Find Next
arrows to navigate from one
match to another in the document. The current match is highlighted in blue.
3. When you are finished previewing your document, from the Print Preview
toolbar, click Print
.
 The Print dialog box displays.
4. Make your print selections, and then click Print.
5.21.3.6
Printing Documents
 You have a document (graphic, Symbol, or template) open and you have made
any print or page setup selections, if necessary, from the Page Setup view.
 NOTE: It is not possible to print manual or automatic pages.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Print
.
 The Print Progress bar shows the loading progress and then the Print
dialog box displays.
2. Make your selections and click Print.
 The document is sent to the printer.
223
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Overview of Printing
5.21.3.7
Saving Page Setup Settings
 You have made your selections in the Page Setup view and want to save the
settings for future use. You can create a page setup (.xml) file from the Page
Setup view.
1. Navigate to the bottom of the Page Setup view, and click Export.
 The Save As dialog box displays.
2. Enter a File name and click Save.
 Your selections have been saved and can be retrieved for future use to apply
to other documents.
5.21.3.8
Working with Page Setup
The Page Setup view allows you to make selections that determine how your
documents print.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Page Setup
.
 The Page Setup view displays.
2. Do one of the following:
-
To use an existing set of selections from an existing page setup file (.xml),
click on the Import button and navigate to the appropriate file. Once
selected, the file selections are applied to the page setup fields.
-
Make new print setting selections, complete the fields in the Page Setup
view ( See Page Setup View [ ➙ 216]).
 NOTE: You can click on the Preview button at any time to see the result of
your selections applied to the actual document.
3. (Optional). Expand the Header and Footer section to add images or keywords
to the header and footer.
4. Do one of the following
5.21.3.9
-
Save your selections for future use; see (See Saving Page Setup Settings
[➙ 224])
-
Click Print. Your document is sent to the printer and the Page Setup view is
closed.
Working with the Image Library Window
 You want to add or delete images from the Image Library, a repository which
contains the images available to add to a header or footer.
1. On the Home tab, in the Printing group, click Page Setup
.
 The Page Setup view displays.
2. Click the expander arrow
to expand the Header and Footer section.
 The Header and Footer fields display.
3. Click the Image Library Edit button.
 The Image Library displays.
4. Click the Import button to navigate to the image you want to add. Repeat as
needed. Each image added, is listed in the Images section. The highlighted
224
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5
image displays in the Preview pane. Click the Fill checkbox to have the image
fill the Preview pane. To remove an image from the Images list, click on the
Delete button. The image is removed from the Images list.
5. (Optional) Select an image from the Images list and click Copy. A copy of the
selected image is sent to the clipboard. From the Images list, select an image
whose data you wish to replace with the image data just copied to the
clipboard, and click Paste. The image data of the selected image is replaced
with the image from the clipboard.
6. Click OK.
 The Image Library pane closes and the Images drop-down menu now lists the
imported images.
5.22
5.22.1
Graphics Editor Appendix
Context Menus
The Graphics application allows you to access context menus that display
commands to help you to either edit objects and elements on the canvas, or work
with and manage the various views.
5.22.1.1
Graphic Context Menu
The Graphic context menu displays when you right-click anywhere on the white
space of the active canvas in Design, Test, or Runtime mode.
Graphic Context Menu
Item
Description
Undo
Undo an action from a list of the most recent actions.
Redo
Redo an action from a list of the most recent actions.
Repeat
Repeat the last action performed.
Paste
Not active in Runtime mode.
Select All
Select all the unlocked elements.
Graphic Mode
Switch modes. Select from: Design, Test, Runtime and Online.
Show Manual Pages
Display the manual viewports of the graphic.
Import
Image - Displays the Open dialog box and allows you select and open
Images file in any of the following file formats: .BMP, .DIB, .RLE, .JPG,
.JPEG,. JPE, .JFIF, .GIF, .TIF, .TIFF, ICO .PNG. The file opens and displays
in the active canvas.
XAML - Displays the Open dialog box and allows you to select and open
AutoCAD and XML files. The file opens in the AutoCAD Importer.
Not active in Runtime mode.
5.22.1.2
Print Preview Context Menu
The Print Preview context menu displays when you are in the Print Preview window
and right-click anywhere in the window.
Print Preview Context Menu
225
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.1.3
Command
Description
Copy
Copy selected text from the header and footers.
Find
Place the cursor in the Type text to find field. This allows you to enter text
and use the search filters to locate text in the previewed document.
Increase Zoom
Enlarge the content by increasing the magnification level in the Print Preview
pane.
Decrease Zoom
Diminish the content by decreasing the magnification level.
Selection Context Menu
The Selection context menu displays when you right-click on an element in the
Element Tree view or on the canvas in Design or Test mode of the Graphics Editor.
It allows you perform common editing, formatting, aligning, and grouping tasks.
Selection Context Menu
Item
Description
Repeat
Repeat the last action performed.
Cut
Delete selected graphic elements and copies them to the clipboard.
Copy
Copy selected graphic elements to the clipboard.
Copy Source
Copy and serialize the .xml that describes the properties of the selected
element for diagnosing configuration issues.
Paste
Paste the most recent content saved to the clipboard.
Delete
Delete the selected item.
Copy Format
Store all formatting properties of the last selected element.
Paste Format
Apply stored format properties to the target element properties. Multiple
elements can be selected and formatted simultaneously. Formatting can be
applied to more than one element at a time.
Reset Size
Reset the size of the selected images, XPS elements and Symbol instances
to their original size when they were inserted into the graphic. All other
drawing elements are not affected by this command.
Order
Bring to Front - Move the graphical element to the front of the stack.
Send to Back - Move the graphical element to the back of the stack.
Bring Forward - Move the graphical element forward one level in the stacking
order.
Send Backward - Move the graphical element backward one level in the
stacking order.
Align
Left - Align the selected elements with the left edge of the element farthest to
the left.
Center - Align the selected elements along a vertical plane based on the
average distance between the element farthest to the left and the element
farthest to the right among all the selected elements.
Right - Align the selected elements with the right edge of the element farthest
to the right.
Top - Align the selected elements with the top edge of the element farthest to
the top.
Middle - Align the selected elements along a horizontal plane based on the
average distance between the element farthest to the top and the element
farthest to the bottom among the selected elements.
Bottom - Align the selected elements with the bottom edge of the element
farthest to the bottom.
Horizontally Evenly Spaced - Space the elements evenly along a horizontal
plane (the “x” axis).
Vertically Evenly Spaced - Space the elements evenly along a vertical plane
(the “y” axis).
Align Wrapped – Aligns the selected elements with the top left corner of the
canvas and displays them in a row, and wraps to the next row as needed.
226
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
Group
5
Group - Combine multiple graphic elements into a group so that when one
element is repositioned, all the other elements move with it.
Ungroup - Separate individual graphic elements from a group so that they
can be repositioned independently.
Join Group - Add one or more graphic elements to an existing group.
Leave Group - Remove one or more graphic elements from a group.
Combine
Union – Combines= all parts of two elements into one path element.
Intersection - Create a new path element shaped by the overlapping portions
of two elements.
Exclude Overlap - Combines two elements to create a new path element.
Any overlapping portions are excluded. The excluded portion is transparent.
Subtraction - Create a new path element that is based on the first selected
element minus the overlapping portions of the two elements and the second
selected element.
Symbol Instance
Displays only when the selection contains a Symbol instance and only
applies to the main Symbol Instance selection that you right-clicked on.
Replace – Displays a list of alternative Symbols that belong to the function of
the selected Symbol Instance. You can select to replace the selected Symbol
Instances where the datapoint reference (Symbol Instance property: Object
Reference) is obtained.
Edit – Allows you to edit the Symbol on a separate canvas tab.
Convert to Group – Converts all selected Symbol Instances to Groups – from
which all format properties and evaluations are obtained.
Set Default Scale Factor – Sets the current scale factor as the default scale
factor for the Symbol Instance.
5.22.1.4
Snap Now
Align every selected element to the grid.
Save to File
Displays only when an Image, XPS, or imported AutoCAD file is selected.
Insert Path Figure
Displays only when a Path element is selected. Insert a path figure in the
Visible
Set the element to Visible.
Locked
Lock the element.
Properties
Display the element properties in the Property View.
Save an image as a separate file. When selected, the file is saved as a .PNG
in the local computer’s Temp directory.
existing path element.
Copy Format Table
The following table indicates whether or not a property is stored with the Copy
Format feature.
Copy Format Table
Property
Copy Formatting
AutoSize
x
AngleCenterX
x
AngleCenterY
x
BackColor
x
BevelLightAngle, BevelRelief, BevelWidth
x
Blinking
x
Bold, Italic, Strikethrough, Underline
x
No Copy Formatting
227
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
ClipBottom, ClipLeft , ClipRight, ClipTop
x
Description
x
EllipseType
x
EndAngle, StartAngle
x
Fill Color
x
FlipX, FlipY
x
Font Family, FontSize
x
GlowColor, GlowNoise, GlowOPacity,
GlowSize
x
Horizontal Text Alignment
x
Locked
x
IsArcClosed
x
RadiusX, RadiusY
x
ShadowColor, ShadowDepth,
ShadowDirection
x
Opacity
x
Stretch
x
TextType, Trimming, Vertical
TextAlignment, Wrapping
x
StrokeColor, StrokeDashArray,
StrokeDashCap, StrokeEndLineCap,
StrokeLineJoin, StrokeStartLineCap,
StrokeThickness
x
Tooltip
x
Vertical
x
Width, Height
x
X, Y
x
Zoomable
5.22.1.5
x
Status and Commands Menu
The Status and Command context menu is available from the Graphics Viewer in
Operating mode, and in the Graphics Editor in Runtime mode. The Status and
Commands context menu displays when you right-click on an element that has
properties that have evaluations associated with them.
Status and Commands Context Menu
Command
Description
Show Status and
Commands
Display the Status and Commands menu containing the properties for the
element on the graphic the mouse is currently hovering over. The Status and
Commands menu is only enabled if the element properties have evaluations
associated with them.
228
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.1.6
5
Library Browser Context Menu
The Library Browser context menu is available when you right-click on a Symbol in
the Library Browser.
Library Browser Context Menu
5.22.1.7
Item
Description
Insert
Insert a Symbol instance onto the active canvas.
Copy Reference
Copy the Library and Symbol name.
Delete
Deletes the selected Symbol or graphic template from the project library.
Edit
Edit the selected Symbol.
Tab Context Menu
The Tab context menu is available when you click on the tab of an open pane. This
menu allows you manage the open graphic panes.
Tab Context Menu
Command
Description
Close
Close the active tab.
Enabled when more than one tab is open. Close all the tabbed panes except
Close All But This
for the active bolded tab.
Tabbed Document
Auto Hide
Hide
5.22.1.8
New Horizontal Tab
Group
Display open tabs horizontally when you have multiple panes open.
New Vertical Tab
Group
Display the open tabs vertically, when you have multiple panes open.
Move To Previous Tab
Group
Switch between a vertical or horizontal display of the open tabs. This option
is available when you have multiple tabs open.
Move to Next Tab
Group
Switch between a vertical or horizontal display of the open tabs.
Task Menu - Consistency Checker
The Task context menu displays when you are in the Consistency Checker’s Tasks
tab and right-click on a task in the Tasks section.
Task Context Menu
Item
Description
Refresh
Update the task information.
Load
Navigate to and add a new task .DLL.
Unload all
Clear all the tasks from the task display area.
Check & Fix
Start the selected task and fix any errors found.
Check
Start the selected task. Errors are listed in the Findings section.
Pause
Temporarily stop the active task.
Stop
Terminate the active task.
Kill
Terminate the active task.
229
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.1.9
Fix
Enable the tool to correct any errors found.
Clear Findings
Clear the list of errors in the Findings section.
Unload
Remove the selected task from the Task section.
Unload all of same
assembly
Remove all the tasks from the same .DLL file as the selected task.
Clone
Replicate the selected task with different property settings.
Properties
Display the Properties View.
Findings Menu - Consistency Checker
The Findings context menu displays when you are in the Consistency Checker’s
Tasks tab and right-click on an error listed in the Findings section.
Task Context Menu
5.22.2
Item
Description
Fix All
Enable the tool to correct all errors found.
Clear All
Clear the list of all errors in the Findings section.
Clear Fixed
Clear the list of all fixed errors in the Findings section.
Fix
Enable the tool to correct any errors found.
Clear
Clear the selected errors listed in the Findings section.
Graphics Editor Keyboard Shortcuts
The Graphics Editor allows you to use a set of keyboard shortcuts to navigate
around the application and individual views, as well as carry out commands while
working with elements on an active canvas.
5.22.2.1
Element Tree View Keyboard Shortcuts
The Element Tree View keyboard shortcuts allow you work with and manage items
listed in the view.
Element Tree View Keyboard Shortcuts
To...
Use the...
Go to the next item in the list.
DOWN Arrow
Go up to the previous item in the list.
UP Arrow
Expand children of the last selected item. Expand RIGHT Arrow
a pane.
Collapse children of the last selected item.
LEFT Arrow
Expand all children recursive of all selected
items.
*
Collapse all children recursive of all selected
items.
/
Add/remove the item to/from the selection.
CTRL+Click
All elements between the first clicked and last
clicked element will be highlighted.
SHIFT+Click
230
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.2.2
5
Element Keyboard Shortcuts
The following keyboard shortcuts are available when you are working with
elements on the active canvas:
Element Keyboard Shortcuts
To...
Press…
Select all the elements on the
active canvas.
CTRL+A
Cut selected elements
CTRL+X, or
SHIFT+DEL
Create a copy of the active
elements
CTRL+Click+Drag
Copy selected elements to the
clipboard
CTRL+C, or CTRL+INSERT
NOTE: If the clipboard contains a raster image, a new Image
element is created and pasted.
Paste selected elements to the
clipboard
CTRL+V, or SHIFT+INSERT
Delete selected elements
DEL
Scroll to the far left
HOME
Scroll to the far right
END
Scroll to the top
CTRL+HOME, or PAGE UP
Scroll to the bottom
CTRL+END, or PAGE DOWN
Access quick panning mode
Space Bar
Access quick zooming mode
Z + Mouse Click (mouse turns to magnifying glass icon –TC NOTE:
Add ICON)
Zoom to 100%
CTRL+0 (0=Zero)
Move selected elements by one
pixel
In panning mode:
Arrows: Up, Left, Down, UP
Shift view by one pixel
When editing a Line/polyline
Node:
Move the node by one pixels
Move selected elements by the
grid pixels
In panning mode:
CTRL+UP, CTRL+LEFT, CTRL+DOWN, CTRL+UP
Shift view by grid pixels
When editing a Line/polyline
Node:
Move the node by the grid pixel
Move elements back to their
original position and cancel
moving operation
ESC
F+ Mouse click + Drag
Enable font stretching while
resizing a selected text element
and maintain ratio to current
element size
Enable font-stretching while
resizing a text element
F key.
The font size aspect ratio adjusts to the element size.
231
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
Element Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
To...
Press
Select an element on the
canvas
LEFT mouse click
Toggle between activating and
deactivating an element on the
canvas
CTRL+LEFT mouse click
Select an element on the
canvas and it’s respective:
CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT mouse click
-Child elements, or
-Nested Symbols. or
-Symbol Instances
5.22.2.3
Angle Center Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
Angle Center Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
5.22.2.4
To...
Do the following...
Move element and snap-to-grid
(if enabled)
Click and drag element
Make a copy of one or more
elements on the canvas
Press CTRL and then click and drag element
Move element and ignore snapto-grid, if enabled
Press SHIFT and drag element
Step of 0 / 50 / 100,
% or edge length.
Arc and Pie Angle Keyboard Shortcuts
Arc and Pie Center Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
5.22.2.5
To...
Do the following...
Move element and snap-to-grid
(if enabled)
Click and drag element
Use angle grid, Individual angle
Make a copy of one or more
elements on the canvas
Press CTRL and click on element
Move element and ignore snapto-grid, if enabled
Press SHIFT and drag element
Synchronize Start & End angle
Draw Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
From the Home tab, in the Elements group, you have already selected the element
you want to draw on the canvas.
Move Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
To...
Press…
Draw element and snap-to-grid
(if enabled)
CLICK and Draw element
Draw squares and paths with 45
degree angles
CTRL+Draw
232
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
SHIFT and DRAG element
Draw element and ignore snapto-grid, if enabled
5.22.2.6
5
Modify Line and Path Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
Modify Line and Path Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
5.22.2.7
To...
Press…
Modify Line and Path element
and snap-to-grid (if enabled)
CLICK and DRAG Line or Path element
Modify Line and Path element in
maintain 45 degree angle
CTR+CLICK on Line or Path element and DRAG
Modify Line and Path element
and ignore snap-to-grid, if
enabled
SHIFT and DRAG Line or Path element
Move Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
Move Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
5.22.2.8
To...
Press…
Move element and snap-to-grid
(if enabled)
CLICK and DRAG element
Make a copy of one or more
elements on the canvas
CTRL+CLICK on element and DRAG
Move element and ignore snapto-grid, if enabled
SHIFT and DRAG element
Resize Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
You can resize elements and snap to grid, by enabling the Snap, Display Grid, and
Display Guidelines tasks from the ribbon’s View tab > Workspace group. From the
Graphic Properties (Properties View) you can also select Lines or Markers for your
Grid Style.
Resize Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
To...
Press…
Resize element and snap-to-grid CLICK and DRAG element
(if enabled)
Maintain the following shapes:



CTRL+CLICK on element
Square
Circle
Polygon
Resize element and ignore
snap-to-grid, if enabled
SHIFT and DRAG
Resize and maintain the
element’s aspect ratio
ALT and DRAG
Text element only. Stretch the
font.
F Key
233
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.2.9
Rectangle Radius Keyboard Shortcuts
Rectangle Radius Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
To...
Press…
Move element and snap-to-grid
(if enabled)
Ignore grid, Sync RadiusX & RadiusY
CLICK and DRAG element
CTR+CLICK on element and DRAG
Make a copy of one or more
elements on the canvas
5.22.2.10
No Sync
Rotate Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
Rotate Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
To...
Press…
Rotate element and snap-to-grid
(if enabled)
CLICK and DRAG
Rotate element and ignore snap- SHIFT and DRAG element
to-grid, if enabled
5.22.2.11
Rubberband Key and Mouse Shortcuts
Rubberband Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts
5.22.2.12
To...
Press…
Activate elements contained in
the rubberband
CLICK and DRAG
(NOTE: Element must be completely contained in rubberband
section)
Toggle between activating and
deactivating selected elements
CTRL+CLICK and DRAG
Active elements that intersect
with the rubberband
ALT+CLICK and Drag
(NOTE: Entire element does not have to be in the rubberband area;
if any part of the element intersects the rubberband, it is activated.
Find and Replace View Shortcuts
Find and Replace Keyboard Shortcuts
5.22.2.13
To...
Press…
Search and locate next item.
F3
Search and locate previous item
SHIFT+F3
General Keyboard Shortcuts
The following general keyboard shortcuts allow you work with the views in the
Graphics Editor.
General Keyboard Shortcuts
To ...
Press…
234
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.2.14
Reload all open views
F5
You are prompted to reload all open graphics.
Toggle the Aerial View
On/Off
F12
5
Inline Text Element Shortcuts
You can edit a text element directly on the active canvas by double-clicking on the
element or pressing the F2 key. The table of keyboard shortcuts that apply are
listed below.
Inline Text Element Shortcuts
5.22.2.15
To...
Press…
Insert a return carriage
CTRL+ENTER
Insert a tab
TAB
Accept changes
ENTER
Undo
ESC
Path Shortcuts
The following keyboard shortcuts are available when you are using the Path
element to draw shapes on the canvas.
With the crosshair mouse on the canvas, you can press a key to specify the path
segment type.
Path Keyboard Shortcuts
5.22.3
To Draw….
Press…
Polyline segment, default for every Path drawn.
P
Arc segment
A
Cubic Bezier
B
Quadratic Bezier
Q
Table of Element Handles
Element Handles
Icon
Name
Function
Start Handle
Mark the beginning of a line or path segment.
End Handle
Mark the end of a line or path segment.
Cornering Radius Handle
Round the corners of a rectangle element.
Selection Handle
Select an element(s) on the canvas and clickand-drag to resize the selected element(s).
Each element is surrounded by six selection
handles.
Rotational Handle
Rotate the element 360 degrees.
Angle Center
The axis around which an element rotates.
NOTE: This handle only displays on the
235
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
canvas when the Layout Properties, Angle X
and Angle Y, have values associated with
them.
5.22.4
5.22.4.1
Segment
Mark the point where one line segment ends
and another line segment begins. Also known
as the vertex of two lines
Mid-Segment
Path element only.
Arc Corner Handles
Path element only.
Element and Graphic Properties
3D Effects
3D Effects Properties
5.22.4.2
Property
Description
Shadow Color
Specify a color for the shadow by typing a color name or using a
hexadecimal color code. The default color is FF000000 (black).
Shadow Depth
Enter a value to specify how far or close the shadow should display to
the element.
Shadow
Direction
Enter a value to set where the shadow displays around the element.
Advanced
Advanced Properties
Property
Description
Depth
Enter the name of a specific depth whose layers you want visible with a
particular viewport. Displays when you are in the Viewport mode, and
have a viewport selected.
Disable
Selection
If enabled, allows you to lock an element or data point reference so that
it is not selectable in Runtime mode. By default this property is not
enabled and elements and data points are selectable in Runtime mode.
Grayscale AntiAliasing
Set a color image to gray-scale. Displays when you have an imported
image or .XPS element selected on the canvas.
High Quality
Smooth image pixels creating a higher resolution image.
NOTE: Animated GIF images may show trails if the image is set to High
Quality. In that case, disable High Quality.
Link References Displays a list of data point references that display the viewport in their
Related Items. Displays when you are in the Viewport mode, and have a
viewport selected.
Max. Visibility
Set the maximum visibility range of a layer by entering the minimum
value of the graphic width at a given zoom factor.
Use the following equation to determine the value: Graphic width / zoom
factor. For example, the graphic width is 500 pixels and the zoom factor
is 2. The maximum visibility value for the property is 250. The layer is
visible unless the graphic width changes and is higher than the set
value.
If blank, the default value is set to 0 and the property is inactive.
Min. Visibility
Set the minimum visibility range of a layer by entering the minimum
value of the graphic width at a given zoom factor.
236
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5
Use the following equation to determine the value: Graphic width / zoom
factor. For example, the graphic width is 500 pixels and the zoom factor
is 2. The minimum visibility value for the property is 250. The layer is
visible unless the graphic width changes and is less than the set value.
If blank, the default value is set to 0 and the property is inactive.
5.22.4.3
Selection
Reference
Set an element to be selectable in Runtime mode and in the Graphics
Viewer. There are no COV subscriptions for the reference.
The default is False.
Zoomable
Determine whether the element size changes according to the current
zoom factor or not.
By default, this property box is checked and enabled. If unchecked, the
element size remains constant regardless of the current zoom factor and
does not change its position in the graphic. The Evaluation Expression
also allows you to enable this property by entering True to enable the
zoomable property, or False to disable the zoomable property.
Animation
This property applies to animated GIFs only.
Animation Properties
5.22.4.4
Property
Description
Run
Applies to animated GIF’s only. If checked, the GIF displays as animated
in the Test and Runtime mode, and in the Graphics Viewer. In Design
mode only the first frame displays.
Clip
Clip Properties
5.22.4.5
Property
Description
Clip Left
Enter a value to set where the left border of the element is cut off.
Clip Top
Enter a value to set where the top border of the element is cut off.
Clip Right
Enter a value to set where the right border of the element is cut off.
Clip Bottom
Enter a value to set where the bottom border of the element is cut off.
Colors
The following element properties can be changed using a hexadecimal color code
such as FFFF0000 (red) or referencing a state text color defined in the
corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the following syntax:
TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]. The syntax is case sensitive.
Colors Properties
Property
Description
Background
Change the background color of the element.
Stroke
Change the color of the element outlines.
Fill
Change the fill color on the enclosed areas of the element.
237
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.4.6
Ellipse
Ellipse Properties
5.22.4.7
Property
Description
Ellipse Type
Select how to present the ellipse shape: Ellipse, Arc, or Pie.
The default is Ellipse.
Start Angle
Enter a value between 1 and 360 to represent the start point of the arc’s
curve.
End Angle
Enter a value between 1 and 360 to represent the end point of the arc’s
curve.
Closed Arc
Join the start and end points of the arc with a straight line.
General
Allows you to enter text and a description for an element tooltip.
General Properties
5.22.4.8
Property
Description
Tooltip
Enter and associate a tooltip with the element.
Description
Enter a text description of the graphic element.
Graphic
Graphic Properties
Property
Description
Logical Scale
Factor
Enter a value used to multiply by the dimensions of the graphic. This
sets the scale or ratio of the graphic. A scale factor greater than 1
enlarges the objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the
objects. All proportions of the graphic are retained.
Logical Width
Enter a value to set the width of one pixel. This measurement is
applied to all elements added to the graphic. For example, if you are
creating a map of a facility, one pixel can be equivalent to 1 mile. The
measurement unit is set in the Logical Unit property.
Logical Height
Enter a value to set the height of one pixel. This measurement is
applied to all elements added to the graphic. For example, if you are
creating a map of a facility, one pixel can be equivalent to 1 mile. The
unit of measurement is set in the Logical Units property.
Logical Units
Enter the type of measurement to associate and display with the
graphic’s elements. For example, miles (m) or kilometers (km).
Background
Change the color of the graphi’s background using a hexadecimal
color code, such as FFFF0000 (red) or reference a state text color
defined in the corresponding Text Group of the associated data point,
using the following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value] – The
syntax is case sensitive.
Version
Display the version of the graphic in the following format:
[Major].[Minor].[Revision].[Build]
Creation Date
Display the date the graphic was created.
Auto Fit
When selected, the graphic automatically increases or decreases in
order to display the full content of the graphic in the pane. If not
238
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5
selected, the fit of the graphic is based on zoom factor of the
associated depth. Auto Fit is enabled by default.
Max Connection
Lines
5.22.4.9
(Graphic and Graphic Templates Only) Allows you to enter the
maximum number of connection lines for the Status and Command
windows to display.
If the actual number of connection lines associated with a Status and
Command window exceeds the number of connection lines specified
in this field, then none of the lines display.
If this field is left blank, then the default value of 65535 is used and
under normal circumstances all lines display with the Status and
Commands window.
Layer
Layer Properties
Property
Description
Discipline
Associate the layer with a discipline from the drop-down menu. The discipline
is used in the Graphics Viewer, using the Depths Navigator View to filter
layers on a depth by discipline.
The default discipline for a layer is Management System. .
5.22.4.10
Layout
Layout Properties
Property
Description
X
Change the position of guidelines on the X-axis of the selected graphic.
For elements, allows you to change their position on the X-axis relative
to their parent element, which can consist of a layer or group element.
Y
Change the position of guidelines on the Y-axis of the selected graphic.
For elements, allows you to change their position on the Y-axis relative
to their parent element, which can consist of a layer or group element.
Width
Enter a value to increase or decrease the width of the graphic.
Height
Enter a value to increase or decrease the height of the graphic.
Angle
Specify the number of degrees an element on a graphic rotates.
Angle Center X
Specify the position of the angle center for the X-axis. The angle center
originates in the top-left corner of an element and determines the point
around which an element rotates.
Angle Center Y
Specify the position of the angle center for the Y-axis. The angle center
originates in the top-left corner of an element and determines the point
around which an element rotates.
Rotation Speed
Adjust the speed an element rotates around its angle center.
NOTE: The performance of a graphic may be impacted if it contains one
or more imported raster based images with active values in the Rotation
Speed property.
Raster images supported by the Graphics Editor include: BMP, JPG,
GIF, TIF, TIFF, and PNG.
Rotation Steps
Specify the number of steps an element takes to complete one full
revolution.
Flip X
Reverse the position of the element along the X-axis.
Flip Y
Reverse the position of the element along the Y-axis.
239
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.4.11
Visible
Select the check box so that the image is visible in Runtime and Test
mode. If the check box is not selected, the image is not visible in
Runtime or Test mode; however, the bounding handles in Test mode.
NOTE: If the Locked property for the image is checked, then the image
cannot be selected in Test mode.
Blinking
Select the check box to set the element to display on and off in Runtime
mode. The Fill, Stroke, and Background properties blink at the same rate
set for the blinking color property.
Stretch
Determine how to fill (increase or decrease) the image scaling to fit in
the bounding rectangle or the dimensions of the graphic. The default
selection is set to Uniforrm.
Locked
Select the check box to lock the image in Runtime and Test mode. When
locked, the image cannot be selected from the canvas; however, it can
still be selected in the Element Tree view.
Navigation
The Navigation properties of an element allow you to configure the element so that
when you click on the element, the associated link displays. An internal Desigo CC
link to a data point object displays in the primary or secondary pane and becomes
the primary selection. An external link allows you to navigate to another application,
a website (URL), or document (for example, .doc, .txt, .PDF, etc.)
Navigation is triggered with a single click or double click, depending on the
configuration.
Navigation Properties
Property
Description
Navigation
Target
Enter the target path or name of the link you want to associate with the
element:
The navigation target can be one of the following:
 An internal data point reference. The reference is selected as the
new primary selection. For example, System1.AI_1::
 An external link to an application name and/or filename. When the
element is clicked, the linked application or file is opened. If no
application is specified, the corresponding application is started.
Examples:
– „C:\Data Files\Readme.txt“
– Winword mydoc.doc
 An external link to a Web address (URL). The URL must be
preceded by the protocol (http, https, ftp, etc.) When the element is
clicked, the default web browser opens and displays the specified
URL.
Navigation
Parameter
Enter an argument that is sent as context to the new primary selection
based on the navigation target.
NOTE: This property is only applied to internal data point links.
Navigation
Trigger
Select how the navigation is triggered with the left mouse button. The list
box allows you to choose Single Click or Double Click.
The default selection is set to Single Click.
Navigation
Description
Enter a descriptive text associated with the link. In the tooltip, the text
displays in parenthesis at the end of the path to the link.
For example: System1.Application
View:Applications.Schedules.BACnet Calendars.My
Calendar (My Schedule Link)
240
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.4.12
5
Path
Polyline Properties
5.22.4.13
Property
Description
Closed
Create a polygon out of a polyline by connecting the start and end node
segments.
Corner Offset
Enter a value to allow two adjacent polyline segments to have rounded
corners. This applies to any shape
This property is also used to round the corners of a polygon element.
Polygon
Regular Polygon
5.22.4.14
Property
Description
Nodes
Specify how many line segments are in the polygon.
Offset
Enter the number of degrees of rotation of the polygon.
Rectangle
Rectangle Properties
5.22.4.15
Property
Description
Radius X
Enter values between 0 and half of the edge length to create rounded
corners. The Radius X and Radius Y properties are adjusted
simultaneously to keep the integrity of the rectangle shape.
Radius Y
Enter values between 0 and half of the edge length to create rounded
corners. The Radius X and Radius Y properties are adjusted
simultaneously to keep the integrity of the rectangle shape.
Replication
Replication Properties
Property
Description
Replication
Index Range
Enter a value to specify s
Replication
Direction
Select the direction in which the elements are replicated on the canvas.
Options include:
 Horizontal
 Vertical
Max Replication Enter the maximum size for each replicated element on the canvas.
Extent
The value can be a:
 Relative value to the width or height by typing a % sign along with
the value, or an
 Absolute value in pixels.
 The default value is set to “300%”
Replication
Enter a value to specify the spacing between replicated elements on the
241
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
Space
5.22.4.16
canvas.
The value can be a:
 Relative value to the width or height by typing a % sign along with
the value, or an
 Absolute value in pixels.
The default value is set to “10”
Stroke
Style Properties
Property
Description
Stroke
Thickness
Adjust the line thickness from 0 through 5.
Stroke Dash
Array
Adjust the length of the dash and the space between the dashes (the
gaps) used to outline shapes.
Stroke Dash
Cap
Specify whether the end of a dash is flat, square, or round. Displays if
the active element consists of a dashed array.
Stroke Start
Line
Specify the shape at the beginning of the line. Options include flat,
square, round, triangle.
Stroke End Line Specify the shape at the end of the line. Options include flat, square,
round, triangle.
Stroke Line Join Specify how two lines are joined at the vertices. Displays when the
active element has lines that join. Options are: Miter, Bevel, or Round.
Arrow Start
Shape
Enter up to three values to add an arrow head to the Start of a stroke.
The Width, Length, and Offset values are entered in order and separated
by a semi-colon and no spacing. The values can be in entered as pixels
or a percentage that is relative to the stroke thickness.
The width value is mandatory. If only one value is entered, the value
adjusts the width of the arrow shape.
Arrow End
Shape
Enter up to three values to add an arrow head to the End of a stroke.
The values for Width, Length, and Offset, are entered in order and can
be in pixels or a percentage that is relative to the stroke thickness.
NOTE:
For Arrow Start and End Shapes:
Enter the Width, Length, and Offset values are in order and separated by
a semi-colon and no spacing. The values can be in entered as pixels or
a percentage that is relative to the stroke thickness.
The width value is mandatory. If only one value is entered, the value
adjusts the width of the arrow shape.
5.22.4.17
Substitutions
The Substitutions property displays the substitution default string and properties
associated with that particular Symbol Instance. The properties listed under this
property will vary according to the Symbol properties.
5.22.4.18
Symbol Instance
Symbol Instance Properties
Property
Description
242
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.4.19
5
Symbol
Reference
Display the data point or file reference. You can also manually enter an
evaluation in order to animate the Symbol Instance.
Data Point Example: 1:3:45345:0
File Name Example: C:\Temp\Symbol1.ccs
From here you can also click Symbol to open and display the Symbol
Browser.
Object
Reference
Display the drag-and-drop data point reference as a name. You can use
the auto-complete feature to manually enter the reference information
into the field.
For example: Physical View:\Stations\Server\BACnet
Adapter\BACnet Network #2\6099/6099-1531\6099/1-AI-1
NOTE: Changing this property updates all star substitutions.
Text Element
Text Properties
Property
Description
Text
Enter text or values for the text element to display on the graphic. You
can enter a text group table object name and a corresponding value from
the text group to create a translated text label. The syntax for referencing
a text group: TextGroupObjectName.TextValue
Text Type
Select how the displayed text is formatted.
 Formatted Value – Numeric text is formatted based on the text
Precision and Units properties.
 Raw Value – No Precision or Unit formatting is applied to numeric
text.
 Short Reference – Dynamic data point references in the Text
property display Name and Description of the data point in Runtime
mode. In the Evaluation Editor, the Text property must be selected,
and in the Expression field, the data point reference, via drag-anddrop, for example, must be enclosed in double quotes “”.
 Long Reference - Dynamic data point references in the Text
property display the Name and Description of the data point and the
entire reference path of the data point in Runtime mode.
 Icon – Displays default icon for the corresponding value associated
data point property in Runtime mode.
 Min – Displays the minimum value of the data point range.
 Max - Displays the maximum value of the data point range.
 Units – Displays the engineering unit of the data point property.
 Precision – Displays the number of digits allowed for the data point
value.
 Translated Text –Converts the text group reference from the Text
field to the associated text.
NOTE: If the Text data is not a data point reference and you select either
the Short Reference or Long Reference property for the Text Type, the
following error code displays in Runtime mode: #FORMAT.
Precision
Set the maximum number of digits allowed for numeric data types. The
higher the precision value, the more decimal places display. Negative
precision rounds the value to the left of the decimal. The nearest default
precision is set to 2. This property displays 0 for non-numeric data types.
Units
Specify an engineering unit to append to the value. If this property is left
empty, the units of the last data point in the text expression are used.
Horizontal
Alignment
Set the horizontal alignment of the text using the following options: Top,
Center, or Bottom.
Vertical
Set the vertical alignment of the text using the following options: Top,
243
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.4.20
Alignment
Center, or Bottom.
Trimming
Specify if and how to shorten the text field.
Wrapping
Set the following text wrapping options:
 Wrap With Overflow
 No Wrap
 Wrap
This property is ignored if Auto Size is Width or Size.
Auto Size
Display the text to by width, height, or size.
Font Family
Select a font style for the text.
Font Size
Set the size of the text. The default font is MS Sans Serif.
Bold
Apply a bold style to the text.
Italic
Italicize the text.
Strikethrough
Display text with a line across it.
Underline
Underline the text.
Decimal Offset
Align numbers by their decimal point by entering a value the vertical (X)
offset enter a value to set the vertical (X) offset value to align numbers
by their decimal point.
Workspace
GridAndGuidelines
Property
Description
Snap To Grid
Attach elements to the nearest guideline to make it easier to create an
accurate graphic.
Display Grid
Display or hide a pattern of equally spaced horizontal and vertical lines
or markers on a graphic to help you align elements symmetrically and
precisely.
Display
Guidelines
Display or hide all guidelines on the canvas.
Pitch X
Adjust the distance between the gridlines.
Pitch Y
Adjust the distance between the gridlines.
Pitch Angle
Determine the number of degrees an element on a graphic rotates
before it snaps into its next position.
Offset X
Move the grid starting point along the vertical axis.
Offset Y
Move the grid starting point along the horizontal axis.
Offset Angle
Determine the number of degrees of rotation of a graphical element.
Used in conjunction with the pitch angle.
Enable 3D Axis
Enable the Z-grid.
The property is disabled by default. When it is disabled, the Z-axis is
hidden and the X-axis angle is set to 0.
XGrid Color
Change the color of the X-grid using a hexadecimal color code, such as
FFFF0000 (red) or reference a state text color defined in the
corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the
following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]] The default color is set
to blue.
YGrid Color
Change the color of the Y-grid using a hexadecimal color code, such as
FFFF0000 (red) ) or reference a state text color as defined in the
corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the
244
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5
following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value]. The syntax is case
sensitive. The default color is set to red.
ZGrid
Change the color of the Z-grid using a hexadecimal color code, such as
FFFF0000 (red) ) or reference a state text color as defined in the
corresponding Text Group of the associated data point, using the
following syntax: TxG_[TextGroupName].[Value].. The default color is set
to black.
XGrid
Set the stroke dash of all the X-grid lines. The default is 1, 2.
StrokeDashArra
y
YGrid
Set the stroke dash of all the Y-grid lines. The default is 1, 2.
StrokeDashArra
y
ZGrid
Set the stroke dash of all the Z-grid lines. The default is 1, 2.
StrokeDashArra
y
5.22.5
XGridAngle
Determine the number of degrees an element on a graphic rotates
before it snaps to the next X line position. Valid values are 0 through 45.
Grid Style
Use markers or lines for displaying the grid.
Error Messages and Troubleshooting Graphics
Engineering
Error messages are warnings that inform you about conditions that may require
special consideration.
Example
Message
Situation
Object Reference not set to
an instance of an object
Graphics Editor - You may
see this error message when
you are trying to open
graphic file and the
objects….
5.22.5.1
Test Topic
5.22.5.2
Evaluation Editor
Do the following…
 You are in Design mode and have an element on the canvas.
1. Click on the element or Symbol on the canvas you want to create a substitution
for.
 The associated element properties display in the Property View and are
available in Evaluation Editor.
2. From the Evaluation Editor, click on the drop-down menu, navigate to the
element’s Property View, for each property you would like to create a
substitution for, and then enter the substitution text into the Eval Expression
field.
NOTE: An expression error is displayed with a red background. The tooltip shows
the detailed error description including the .NET exception if possible.
245
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
5.22.5.3
Value Simulation View
When a data point with an existing address is subscribed for COV’s, the data
point’s status and value are updated automatically in the Value Simulator view. If
the Status for the point reads, General AccessDenied, this indicates that the data
point is inaccessible and therefore not readable for COV subscriptions.
5.22.6
HTML Literal Word Colors
The following table shows the 140 HTML literal word colors in alphabetical order
from left to right and top to bottom. Instead of specifying hexadecimal color codes,
you can enter any of the colors from the following table. Go to the Graphic Editor
Views Pane, and select Brush, ARGB and then #.
HTML Literal Word Colors
Aliceblue
Antiquewhite
Aqua
Aquamarine
Azure
Beige
Bisque
Black
Blanchedalmond
Blue
Blueviolet
Brown
Burlywood
Cadetblue
Chartreuse
Chocolate
Coral
Cornflowerblue
Cornsilk
Crimson
Cyan
Darkblue
Darkcyan
Darkgoldenrod
Darkgray
Darkgreen
Darkkhaki
Darkmagenta
Darkolivegreen
Darkorange
Darkorchid
Darkred
Darksalmon
Darkseagreen
Darkslateblue
Darkslategray
Darkturquoise
Darkviolet
Deeppink
Deepskyblue
Dimgray
Dodgerblue
Firebrick
Floralwhite
Forestgreen
Fuchsia
Gainsboro
Ghostwhite
Gold
Goldenrod
Gray
Green
Greenyellow
Honeydew
Hotpink
Indianred
Indigo
Ivory
Khaki
Lavender
Lavenderblush
Lawngreen
Lemonchiffon
Lightblue
Lightcoral
Lightcyan
Lightgoldenrodyellow
Lightgreen
Lightgrey
Lightpink
Lightsalmon
Lightseagreen
Lightskyblue
Lightslategray
Lightsteelblue
Lightyellow
Lime
Limegreen
Linen
Magenta
Maroon
mediumaquamarine
Mediumblue
Mediumorchid
Mediumpurple
Mediumseagreen
Mediumslateblue
Mediumspringgreen
Mediumturquoise
Mediumvioletred
Midnightblue
Mintcream
Mistyrose
Moccasin
Navajowhite
Navy
Oldlace
Olive
Olivedrab
Orange
Orangered
Orchid
Palegoldenrod
Palegreen
Paleturquoise
Palevioletred
Papayawhip
Peachpuff
Peru
Pink
Plum
Powderblue
Purple
Red
Rosybrown
Royalblue
Saddlebrown
Salmon
Sandybrown
Seagreen
Seashell
Sienna
Silver
Skyblue
Slateblue
Slategray
Snow
Springgreen
Steelblue
Tan
Teal
Thistle
Tomato
Turquoise
Violet
Wheat
246
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
White
5.22.7
5.22.7.1
Whitesmoke
Yellow
5
Yellowgreen
Troubleshooting AutoCAD Conversion
Converting DWG AutoCAD Files
NOTE:
AutoCAD conversion is only possible on installed clients, i.e., conversion is not
possible from the Desigo CC Web Server and Remote Server clients.
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you would like to convert an AutoCAD file
to an XPS compliant file format so that you can import the file into a graphic.
1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to and right-click the AutoCAD file you want to
convert.
2. From the context menu, select Open with > Choose default program and
navigate to the DWG TrueView application.
 The file opens in the Autodesk DWG TrueView application.
3. From the upper left-hand corner of the DWG TruView screen, click the
DTV drop-down arrow and then select Export.
 The Export to a different format menu displays.
4. Select DWFx
 The Save As DWFx dialog box displays.
5. From the Save in drop-down menu, navigate to the directory where you want to
save the DWFx file.
6. From the Export drop-down menu, select All Layouts. This selection allows you
to convert the whole image, rather than just what is displayed on the screen.
7. Type a File name for the new file.
8. Click Save to save your settings and convert the file.
 The file is converted to a DWFx file format that is ready to be imported into a
graphic.
5.22.7.2
Converting DWG and DXF Files
NOTE:
AutoCAD conversion is only possible on installed clients, i.e., conversion is not
possible from the Desigo CC Web Server and Remote Server clients.
 You are in Design or Test mode, and you want to convert an AutoCAD file to
an XPS compliant file format so that you can import the file into a graphic.
1. In Windows Explorer, navigate to and right-click the AutoCAD file you want to
convert.
2. From the context menu, select Open with > Choose default program and
navigate to the Autodesk DWG Design Review application.
247
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
5
Overview of Graphics Editor
Graphics Editor Appendix
 The file opens in the Autodesk DWG Design Review 2012 application.
3. From the upper-left hand corner, click the
drop-down menu arrow.
4. With your mouse, hover over Save As
 The Save As menu displays.
5. Select Save as DWFx/DWF
6. The Save File dialog box displays.
7. From the Save in drop-down menu, navigate to the directory and file location
where you want to save the file, and in the File name field, type the file name.
8. From the Save as Type menu, select DWFx Files.
9. Click Save.
 The file is converted to a DWFx file format. Proceed to Importing a DWFx
AutoCAD File [➙ 104] that is ready to be imported into a graphic.
248
Siemens
Building Technologies
Graphics Editor Version 2
A6V10415487_en_b_02
2014-03-27
Issued by
Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Infrastructure & Cities Sector
Building Technologies Division
International Headquarters
Gubelstrasse 22
CH-6301 Zug
Tel. +41 41-724 24 24
www.siemens.com/buildingtechnologies
Document ID
A6V10415487_en_b_02
Edition
2014-03-27
© 2014 Copyright Siemens Switzerland Ltd
Technical specifications and availability subject to change without notice.